Chevrolet 2011 Express Owner Manual

Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Performance and Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-42
2011 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-34 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 Vehicle Data Recording and
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-56 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-8
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-11
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propritaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this
For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your
substitute the name General dealer or from:
Motors of Canada Limited for
The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and it appears in this manual. ce guide en franais auprs du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited If the vehicle has the Duramax suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, Diesel engine, see the Duramax
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and diesel supplement for additional and Helm, Incorporated
EXPRESS are trademarks and/or specific information on this engine. P.O. Box 07130
service marks of General Motors Detroit, MI 48207
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, quick reference. 1-800-551-4123
or licensors. Numro de poste 6438 de langue
This manual describes features that franaise
may or may not be on your specific www.helminc.com
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 25953303 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Warning or Caution indicates a Symbols

hazard that could result in injury
To quickly locate information about or death. The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the { WARNING the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number These mean there is something information relating to a specific
where it can be found. that could hurt you or other component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
people.
Danger, Warnings, and M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions Notice: This means there is
you need to see the owner manual
for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle something that could result in
information.
labels and in this manual describe property or vehicle damage.
hazards and what to do to avoid or This would not be covered by * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. the vehicle's warranty. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
A circle with a slash through it

is a safety symbol which means
Do Not, Do not do this, or
Do not let this happen.
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart $ : Brake System Warning Light j : LATCH System Child
Here are some additional symbols " : Charging System Restraints
that may be found on the vehicle * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
and what they mean. For more I : Cruise Control
information on the symbol, refer to B : Engine Coolant Temperature : : Oil Pressure
the Index.
O : Exterior Lamps } : Power
9 : Airbag Readiness Light # : Fog Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
# : Air Conditioning . : Fuel Gauge > : Safety Belt Reminders
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) + : Fuses 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 : Headlamp High/ _ : Tow/Haul Mode
or OnStar
Low-Beam Changer d : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Performance and Maintenance
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19
Steering Wheel Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driving for Better Fuel
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 Roadside Assistance
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 88. H. Infotainment on page 71. P. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) I. Exterior Lamp Controls on Tow/Haul Mode under Towing
Buttons. See Driver Information page 61. Equipment on page 953.
Center (DIC) on page 528. J. Instrument Panel Illumination Q. Power Outlets on page 59.
C. Turn and LaneChange Lever. Control on page 66. R. StabiliTrak System on
See Turn and Lane-Change Dome Lamp Override. See page 934 (If Equipped).
Signals on page 65. Dome Lamps on page 66. S. Airbag On-Off Switch on
Windshield Wiper/Washer on K. Cruise Control on page 937 page 332 (If Equipped) .
page 54. (If Equipped) . T. Front Storage on page 41.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on Fast Idle System (If Equipped). U. Passenger Airbag Status
page 65 (Out of View). See the Duramax diesel Indicator on page 519
E. Instrument Cluster on supplement for more (If Equipped).
page 511. information. OnStar System Button.
F. Shift Lever. See Starting the L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on (If Equipped).
Engine on page 918. page 52. V. Rear Heating System on
Manual Mode on page 930 M. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 85 (If Equipped).
(If Equipped). (Out of View). See Malfunction W. USB Port. See Auxiliary
G. Climate Control Systems on Indicator Lamp on page 521. Devices on page 719.
page 81. N. Horn on page 54.
O. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 52.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Press L and hold for more than

2 seconds to sound the panic alarm.
Information
Press L again to cancel the
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the panic alarm.
important features that may or may See Keys on page 22 and Remote
not be on your specific vehicle. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 23.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual. Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be
Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter With Remote started from outside of the vehicle.
(RKE) System Start Shown Starting the Vehicle
The RKE transmitter is used to Press K to unlock the driver door. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
remotely lock and unlock the doors vehicle.
from up to 60 m (195 feet) away Press K again within 5 seconds to
from the vehicle. unlock all remaining doors. 2. Press Q.
Press j to unlock only the cargo 3. Immediately after completing
doors. Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash.
Press Q to lock all doors.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
Lock and unlock feedback can lamps will turn on and remain on as
be personalized. long as the engine is running. The
Press L and release to locate doors will be locked and the climate
the vehicle. control system may come on.
In Brief 1-5
The engine will continue to run for Door Locks Power Door Locks
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
Manual Door Locks On vehicles with power door locks,
10-minute time extension. Remote
the switches are located on the
start can be extended only once.
doors.
Canceling a Remote Start T : Press to lock and unlock
To cancel a remote start: the doors.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the See Power Door Locks on page 28.
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off. Windows
. Turn on the hazard warning Manual Windows
flashers. Operate the manual windows by
. Turn the ignition on and then turning the hand crank on each door
back off. to raise or lower the side door
See Remote Vehicle Start on windows.
Lock and unlock the door from the
page 25. See Manual Windows on page 217.
outside using the key or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
if available. From the inside, slide
the manual lever on the door up
or down.
See Door Locks on page 27.
1-6 In Brief
Power Windows ExpressDown Seat Adjustment

The driver window switch also has Manual Seats
an express-down feature that allows
the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press fully and
release the window switch marked
AUTO to activate the express-down
mode. This mode can be cancelled
at any time by pulling up on the
switch. To open the window part
way, lightly tap the switch until the
window is at the desired position.
See Power Windows on page 217.
If the vehicle has power windows,
the controls are located on each of
the side doors. The driver door also To adjust a manual seat:
has a control to operate the front 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
passenger window.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
Press or pull up on the switch to position and release the bar.
lower or raise the window.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 32.
In Brief 1-7
Power Seats Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the

upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 33.
To adjust a power seat, if available, To recline the seatback:

use the controls on the front of 1. Lift the lever on the inboard side
the seat: of the seat.
. Adjust the seat by moving the 2. Move the seatback to the
center knob up, down, right, desired position, and then
or left. release the lever to lock the
. Raise and lower the front or rear seatback in place.
of the seat cushion by moving 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
the right or left lever up or down. make sure it is locked.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 33.
1-8 In Brief
Safety Belts Airbag On-Off Switch

If the instrument panel has one of
the switches pictured in the
following illustrations, the vehicle
has an airbag on-off switch that you
can use to manually turn on or off
the right front passenger airbag.
Canada and Mexico

To operate the airbag onoff switch,
Refer to the following sections for use the vehicle key.
important information on how to use See Airbag On-Off Switch on
safety belts properly. page 332 for important information.
. Safety Belts on page 38.
. How to Wear Safety Belts Sensing System for
Properly on page 312. United States Passenger Airbag
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 318. The passenger sensing system,
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for if equipped, will turn off the right
Children (LATCH System) on front passenger frontal airbag under
page 352. certain conditions. The driver airbag
and roofrail airbags, if equipped,
are not affected by this.
In Brief 1-9
If the vehicle has a passenger Mirror Adjustment Select each mirror by turning the
sensing system, the passenger knob clockwise for the passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible Exterior Mirrors side mirror or counterclockwise for
on the instrument panel when the Vehicles with outside manual the driver side mirror. Adjust the
vehicle is started. mirrors can be adjusted by moving mirror angle by moving the knob in
the mirror up and down or left to the desired direction.
right so you can see a little of the Keep the selector switch in the
side of the vehicle, and have a clear center position when not adjusting
view of objects behind you. either outside mirror.
United States
Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System on
page 335 for important information.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors Vehicles with towing mirrors can be
have controls located on the driver adjusted manually for a clear view
side door. of the objects behind you.
1-10 In Brief
Manually fold the mirrors inward Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
Adjustment Dome Lamp
To fold, pull the mirror toward the The dome lamps come on when any
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to door is opened. They turn off after
return it to the original position. all the doors are closed.
Interior Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in
the center to move it for a clearer
view behind the vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind. Push the tab,
located at the base of the mirror,
forward for daytime use and pull it
for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on For vehicles with a tilt steering
page 216. wheel, the lever is located on the
left side of the steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel: The instrument panel brightness
1. Pull the lever to move the knob extends when D is pressed.
steering wheel up or down into a To manually turn on the dome
comfortable position. lamps, press D then turn the knob
2. Release the lever to lock the clockwise to the farthest position.
steering wheel in place. In this position, the dome lamps
remain on whether a door is opened
See Steering Wheel Adjustment on or closed.
page 52.
In Brief 1-11
E DOME OFF : This button is Exterior Lighting AUTO: Automatically turns on

located above the instrument panel the headlamps, parking lamps,
brightness knob. taillamps, instrument panel lights,
and license plate lamps.
Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is ; : Turns on the parking lamps,
opened. Press the button again so taillamps, instrument panel lights,
that the dome lamps come on when and license plate lamps.
a door is opened. 2 : Turns on the headlamps,
Reading Lamps parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
panel lights, and license plate
For vehicles with reading lamps, lamps.
press the button located next to The exterior lamps control is located
each lamp to turn it on or off. on the instrument panel to the left of For more information, see:
the steering wheel. . Exterior Lamp Controls on
The vehicle may also have reading
lamps in other locations. The lamps O: Briefly turn the control to this page 61.
cannot be adjusted. position to turn the automatic . Exterior Lamps Off Reminder on
headlamps and Daytime Running page 62.
For more information on interior Lamps (DRL) off or back on.
lighting, see: . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
For vehicles first sold in Canada, on page 63.
. Instrument Panel Illumination the off position only works for
Control on page 66. vehicles that are shifted into the
. Automatic Headlamp System on
. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 67. P (Park) position. page 64.
1-12 In Brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer Climate Controls

The vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with these
systems.
The lever is located on the left side

of the steering column.
8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.
6 : Use to adjust the delay time
between wipes. Turn the band up or
down for more frequent wipes or
less frequent wipes.
d : Slow wipes. Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
a : Fast wipes. A. Fan Control
9 : Use to turn the wipers off. B. Temperature Control
L : Push the paddle on top of the C. Air Delivery Mode Control
multifunction lever to spray washer
fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 54.
In Brief 1-13
See Climate Control Systems on

page 81. See Rear Heating System
on page 85 (If Equipped) or Rear
Climate Control System on page 86
(If Equipped).
Vehicles With Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control

B. Temperature Control D. Rear Window Defogger
1-14 In Brief
Transmission To use this feature, do the following: Grade Braking is not available when
1. Move the shift lever to Range Selection Mode is active.
Range Selection Mode M (Manual Mode). See Tow/Haul Mode on page 931.
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, While using Range Selection Mode,

located on the steering column Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul
shift lever, to select the desired Mode can be used.
range of gears for current driving
conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected
The vehicle may have a Range a number displays in the DIC next to
Selection Mode. The Range the M indicating the current gear.
Selection Mode helps control the
vehicle's transmission and vehicle
speed while driving down hill or
towing a trailer by letting you select
a desired range of gears.
In Brief 1-15
Vehicle Features : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Press to switch the display
Radio(s) between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is
off, press this button to display the
time. Press to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS station or MP3 song.
A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist,
and CAT (category) can display.
Continue pressing to highlight the
desired tab, or press the softkey
located under any one of the tabs
and the information about that
tab displays.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Infotainment on page 71.
Radio with CD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

and off. Turn to increase or FM1, FM2, AM, and XM.
decrease the volume. f: Select radio stations.
1-16 In Brief
Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock Satellite Radio

Depending on which radio the To set the time and date for the XM is a satellite radio service based
vehicle has, radio stations are Radio with CD (MP3): in the 48 contiguous United States
stored as either favorites or presets. and 10 Canadian provinces.
1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
For vehicles with a FAV button, a XM satellite radio has a wide
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
maximum of 36 stations can be variety of programming and
day, and year) displays.
stored as favorites using the commercial-free music, coast to
six softkeys located below the radio 2. Press the softkey located below coast, and in digital-quality sound.
station frequency tabs and by using any one of the tabs that you
A fee is required to receive the
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to want to change.
XM service.
go through up to six pages of 3. Increase or decrease the time or
favorites, each having six favorite For more information, refer to:
date, depending on the radio, by
stations available per page. Each pressing the SEEK arrows,
. www.xmradio.com or call
page of favorites can contain any s / \ REV/FWD buttons or by 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
combination of AM and FM stations.
turning f clockwise or . www.xmradio.ca or call
If the radio does not have a counterclockwise. 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
FAV button, up to 18 stations
For detailed instructions on setting See Satellite Radio on page 710.
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the the clock for your specific audio
six numbered buttons. system, see Clock on page 57.
For more information on storing a
favorite station, see Operation on
page 73.
In Brief 1-17
Portable Audio Devices vehicle. Not all phones will support w or c / x : Press to change
all functions. For more information, favorite radio stations, select tracks
This vehicle may have an auxiliary visit www.gm.com/bluetooth. on a CD, or to navigate tracks or
input located on the radio faceplate
For more information, see Bluetooth folders on an iPod or USB device.
and a USB port located on the
instrument panel. External devices on page 724. b / g : Press to silence the vehicle
such as an iPod, laptop computer, speakers only. Press again to turn
MP3 player, CD changer, or USB Steering Wheel Controls the sound on. Press and hold longer
storage device can be connected to than two seconds to interact with
the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
(1/8 in) input cable or the USB port if equipped.
depending on the audio system.
+ e or e : Press to increase or
See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack" decrease volume.
and "Using the USB Port" in
Auxiliary Devices on page 719. c / x : Press to reject an
incoming call, or to end a call.
Bluetooth SRCE: Press to switch between
the radio and CD, and for equipped
For vehicles with a Bluetooth vehicles, the front auxiliary.
system, it allows users with a
Bluetoothenabled cell phone to : Press to seek the next radio
make and receive hands-free calls station, the next track while sourced
For vehicles with audio steering to the CD, or to select tracks and
using the vehicles audio system
wheel controls, some audio controls folders on an iPod or USB device.
and controls.
can be adjusted at the steering
The Bluetoothenabled cell phone wheel. For more information, see Steering
must be paired with the Bluetooth Wheel Controls on page 52.
system before it can be used in the
1-18 In Brief
Cruise Control SET: Press to set the speed and Performance and
activate cruise control or press and
hold to decelerate. Maintenance
[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set StabiliTrak System
speed from memory. The vehicle may have a traction
For more information, see Cruise control system that limits wheel spin
Control on page 937. and the StabiliTrak system that
assists with directional control of the
Power Outlets vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Both systems turn on automatically
The accessory power outlets every time the vehicle is started.
can be used to plug in electrical
equipment, such as a cell phone
. To turn off both traction control
or an MP3 player. and StabiliTrak, press and hold
For vehicles with cruise control, the d until d illuminates and the
buttons are located on the left side The vehicle may have appropriate DIC message
of the steering wheel. two accessory power outlets displays. See Ride Control
J: Turns the system on or off. located on the instrument panel. System Messages on page 537.
+RES: Press briefly to make the Remove the cover to access and . Press and release the button
vehicle resume to a previously set replace when not in use. again to turn on both systems.
speed, or press and hold to See Power Outlets on page 59. For more information, see
accelerate. StabiliTrak System on page 934.
In Brief 1-19
Tire Pressure Monitor During cooler conditions, the low tire Resetting the Oil Life System
pressure warning light may appear 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
This vehicle may have a Tire when the vehicle is first started and
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). with the engine off.
then turn off. This may be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are 2. Fully press and release the
getting low and the tires need to be accelerator pedal three times
inflated to the proper pressure. within five seconds.
The TPMS does not replace normal 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
monthly tire maintenance. It is the See Engine Oil Life System on
drivers responsibility to maintain page 1010.
correct tire pressures.
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of See Tire Pressure Monitor System Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
one of the vehicle's tires. If the on page 1062.
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
warning light comes on, stop as and a yellow fuel cap can use either
soon as possible and inflate the Engine Oil Life System unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
tires to the recommended pressure The engine oil life system calculates containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
shown on the Tire and Loading engine oil life based on vehicle use See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
Information label. See Vehicle Load and displays a DIC message when page 942. For all other vehicles,
Limits on page 912. The warning it is necessary to change the engine use only the unleaded gasoline
light will remain on until the tire oil and filter. The oil life system described under Recommended
pressure is corrected. should be reset to 100% only Fuel on page 940.
following an oil change.
1-20 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size. If you have an active OnStar
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips subscription, press the Q button
. Follow recommended scheduled
to get the best fuel economy and the current GPS location will be
maintenance.
possible. sent to an OnStar advisor who will
assess your problem, contact
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance, and relay
smoothly. Program your exact location to get the help
. Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 you need.
abrupt stops. Online Owner Center
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438
. Avoid idling the engine for long (U.S. and Canada)
periods of time. Canada: 1-800-268-6800
The Online Owner Center is a
. When road and weather Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 complimentary service that includes
conditions are appropriate, use As the owner of a new Chevrolet, online service reminders, vehicle
cruise control. you are automatically enrolled in the maintenance tips, online owner
Roadside Assistance program. manual, special privileges,
. Always follow posted speed
and more.
limits or drive more slowly when See Roadside Assistance Program
conditions require. (U.S. and Canada) on page 138 or Sign up today at:
. Roadside Assistance Program www.chevyownercenter.com
Keep vehicle tires properly
(Mexico) on page 1310 for more (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
inflated.
information.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
In Brief 1-21
OnStar How OnStar Service Works Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more
Q : Push this blue button to information, see the OnStar Owner's
connect to a specially trained
Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
OnStar Advisor to verify your
or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact
account information and to
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
answer questions.
(18884667827) or
] : Push this red emergency TTY 18772482080; or push the
button to get priority help from Q button to speak with an OnStar
For vehicles with an active OnStar specially trained OnStar Emergency Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
subscription, OnStar uses several Advisors. a week.
innovative technologies and live X : Push this button for handsfree, For a full description of OnStar
Advisors to provide a wide range voiceactivated calling and to give services and system limitations, see
of safety, security, navigation, voice commands for HandsFree the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
diagnostics, and calling services. Calling and TurnbyTurn glove box.
Automatic Crash Response Navigation.
OnStar service is subject to the
In a crash, builtin sensors can Automatic Crash Response, OnStar Terms and Conditions
automatically alert an OnStar Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, included in the OnStar Glove
Advisor who is immediately Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Box Kit.
connected to the vehicle to see Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
OnStar service requires wireless
if you need help. Roadside Assistance, TurnbyTurn
communication networks and the
Navigation, and HandsFree Calling
Global Positioning System (GPS)
are available on most vehicles.
satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
1-22 In Brief
OnStar service cant work unless Other problems OnStar cant control Your Responsibility
the vehicle is in a place where may prevent service to you, such as
Increase the volume of the radio if
OnStar has an agreement with a hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,
the OnStar Advisor cannot be
wireless service provider for service electrical system design and
heard.
in that area, and the wireless architecture of the vehicle, damage
service provider has coverage, to important parts of the vehicle in a If the light next to the OnStar
network capacity, reception, and crash, or wireless phone network buttons is red, the system may not
technology compatible with OnStar congestion or jamming. be functioning properly. Push the
service. Service involving location See Radio Frequency Statement on
Q button and request a vehicle
information about the vehicle cant diagnostic check. If the light
page 1319 for information
work unless GPS signals are appears clear (no light appears),
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
available, unobstructed, and your OnStar subscription has
Communications Commission (FCC)
compatible with the OnStar expired and all services have been
rules and Industry Canada
hardware. The vehicle has to have Standards RSS-210/220/310. deactivated. Push the Q button to
a working electrical system and confirm that the OnStar equipment
adequate battery power for the OnStar Steering Wheel is active.
OnStar equipment to operate. Controls
OnStar service may not work if the
OnStar equipment isnt properly This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
installed or you havent maintained button that can be used to interact
it and the vehicle is in good working with OnStar Hands-Free calling.
order and in compliance with all See Steering Wheel Controls on
government regulations. If you try page 52 for more information.
to add, connect, or modify any On some vehicles, the Talk button
equipment or software in the can be used to dial numbers into
vehicle, OnStar service may voice mail systems, or to dial phone
not work. extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Side Door
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Windows (60/40 Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks Enhanced Technology
Vehicle Security Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Interior Mirrors
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-16
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle,

call the Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance
Keys Program (U.S. and Canada) on
page 138 or Roadside Assistance
{ WARNING Program (Mexico) on page 1310.
Leaving children in a vehicle with Remote Keyless Entry

the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
(RKE) System
could be badly injured or even See Radio Frequency Statement on
killed. They could operate the page 1319 for information
power windows or other controls regarding Part 15 of the Federal
The key is used for the ignition and Communications Commission (FCC)
or even make the vehicle move.
all door locks. rules and Industry Canada
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag Standards RSS-210/220/310.
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith If there is a decrease in the
if caught in the path of a closing can use to make new keys. Store RKE operating range:
window. Do not leave the keys in this information in a safe place, not
in the vehicle. . Check the distance.
a vehicle with children. The transmitter may be
See your dealer if a replacement too far from the vehicle.
key or additional key is needed.
. Check the location.
Notice: If the keys get locked in Other vehicles or objects
the vehicle, it may have to be may be blocking the signal.
damaged to get them out.
Always carry a spare key.

. Check the transmitter's battery.
See Battery Replacement later
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
in this section. driver door. If K is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining
. If the transmitter is still not doors unlock.
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician The interior lamps come on and
for service. stay on for 20 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on. If enabled
Remote Keyless Entry through the DIC, the parking lamps
flash twice to indicate unlocking
(RKE) System Operation has occurred. See Vehicle
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Personalization on page 542 for
transmitter functions work up to RKE Transmitter With Remote additional information.
60 m (195 feet) away from the Start Shown j (Cargo Door): Press to unlock
vehicle. only the cargo doors.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock all
There are other conditions which doors. If enabled through the / (Remote Vehicle Start):
can affect the performance of the Driver Information Center (DIC), the For vehicles with this feature,
transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to indicate press Q and then press and
Entry (RKE) System on page 22. locking has occurred. hold / within five seconds to start
The horn may chirp when Q is the engine from outside the vehicle
pressed again within five seconds. using the RKE transmitter. See
See Vehicle Personalization on Remote Vehicle Start on page 25
page 542 for additional information. for additional information.
L (Vehicle Locator/ Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement

Panic Alarm): Press and release the Vehicle Replace the battery if the
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal Only RKE transmitters programmed REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE
lamps flash and the horn sounds to the vehicle will work. If a KEY message displays in the DIC.
three times. transmitter is lost or stolen, a See REPLACE BATTERY IN
Press and hold L for more than replacement can be purchased and REMOTE KEY under Key and Lock
two seconds to activate the panic programmed through your dealer. Messages on page 537 for
alarm. The turn signal lamps flash When the replacement transmitter is additional information.
and the horn sounds repeatedly for programmed to the vehicle, all Notice: When replacing the
30 seconds. The alarm turns off remaining transmitters must also be battery, do not touch any of the
when the ignition is moved to programmed. Any lost or stolen circuitry on the transmitter. Static
transmitters no longer work once the
ON/RUN or L is pressed again. from your body could damage the
new transmitter is programmed. transmitter.
The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF Each vehicle can have up to
for the panic alarm to work. four transmitters programmed to it.
2. Remove the old battery. Check local regulations for any

Do not use a metal object. requirements on remote starting
3. Insert the new battery, positive of vehicles.
side facing down. Replace with a Do not use the remote start
CR2032 or equivalent battery. feature if the vehicle is low on fuel.
4. Snap the transmitter back The vehicle may run out of fuel.
together. If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, the RKE transmitter
Remote Vehicle Start functions will have an increased
range of operation. However, the
This vehicle may have a remote range may be less while the
start feature. This feature allows vehicle is running.
To replace the battery: you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle. It may also start the There are other conditions which
1. Separate the transmitter with a can affect the performance of the
vehicle's heating or air conditioning
flat, thin object, such as a flat transmitter, see Remote Keyless
systems. See Climate Control
head screwdriver. Entry (RKE) System on page 22 for
Systems on page 81 for additional
. Carefully insert the tool information. additional information.
into the notch located along
Laws in some local communities
the parting line of the
may restrict the use of remote
transmitter. Do not insert
starters. For example, some laws
the tool too far. Stop as
may require a person using remote
soon as resistance is felt.
start to have the vehicle in view
. Twist the tool until the when doing so.
transmitter is separated.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): 3. If it is the first remote start since After the engine has been remote
This button will be on the RKE the vehicle has been driven, started two times, the ignition switch
transmitter if you have remote start. repeat these steps, while the must be turned to ON/RUN and then
engine is still running, to extend back to LOCK/OFF using the key
To start the engine using the remote the engine running time by before the remote start procedure
start feature: 10 minutes. Remote start can can be used again.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at be extended one time. To manually shut off the engine after
the vehicle. After entering the vehicle during a a remote start:
2. Press and release Q on the remote start, insert and turn the key . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
transmitter, then immediately to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
vehicle and press / until the
press and hold / for After a remote start, the engine parking lamps turn off.
four seconds or until the turn will automatically shut off after
10 minutes unless a time extension
. Turn on the hazard warning
signal lamps flash.
has been done or the key is flashers. See Hazard Warning
When the engine starts, the inserted into the ignition switch Flashers on page 65.
parking lamps will turn on and and turned to ON/RUN. . Insert the key into the ignition
remain on while the engine is
The maximum number of remote switch and turn the switch to
running. The doors will be
starts between ignition cycles with ON/RUN and then back to
locked. The airbag readiness
the key is two. LOCK/OFF.
light will be on during a remote
start. It should turn off when the If the remote start procedure is The remote vehicle start feature will
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. used again before the first 10 minute not operate if:
See Airbag Readiness Light on time frame has ended, the first . The key is in the ignition.
page 517 for more information. 10 minutes will immediately expire
and the second 10 minute time
. The hood is open.
frame will start. . The hazard warning flashers
are on.

. There is an emission control
system malfunction. See WARNING (Continued)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 521. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly
. The engine coolant temperature and the doors should be
is too high. locked whenever the
. The oil pressure is low. vehicle is driven.
. Two remote vehicle starts have . Young children who get into
already been provided. unlocked vehicles may be To lock the door from the inside,
unable to get out. A child can slide the manual lever on the door
Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat down. To unlock the door, slide the
and can suffer permanent manual lever up.
injuries or even death from
{ WARNING heat stroke. Always lock the From the outside, use the key.
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. If the vehicle is equipped with
dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter keyless entry, see Remote Keyless
through an unlocked door Entry (RKE) System Operation on
. Passengers, especially page 23.
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks

On vehicles with power door When locking the doors with the The vehicle may have an automatic
locks, the switches are located power lock switch and a door open, lock/unlock feature. This feature
on the doors. the doors will lock five seconds after can be programmed using the
T : Press the bottom of the the last door is closed. You will hear Driver Information Center (DIC).
switch to lock all the doors at once. three chimes to signal that the See Vehicle Personalization on
Press the top of the switch to unlock delayed locking feature is in use. page 542 for more information on
all the doors at once. DIC programming.
Pressing the e twice or the Q on
When a door is locked, the inside the RKE transmitter twice will
door handle will not work. override the delayed locking feature
and immediately lock all the doors.
Cargo Door Relocking This feature will not operate if the
If the cargo door is open when the key is in the ignition.
lock button is pressed on the door This feature can be programmed
or the RKE transmitter, all doors will using the Driver Information
lock except the cargo door. The Center (DIC). See Delay Door
cargo door will only lock when they Lock in Vehicle Personalization on
are closed or when the delayed page 542.
locking feature functions.
Lockout Protection Safety Locks Move the button to the left for the
driver side door or to the right for
This feature protects you from Security locks are located on the the passenger side door to return
locking the key in the vehicle front portion of the 60/40 side the door locks to normal operation.
when the key is in the ignition and swing-out door or the side
a door is open. sliding door.
If the power lock switch is pressed
when either the driver, passenger,
or rear door is open, all the doors
will lock and then the driver door will
unlock. This feature does not
include the side cargo door.
If the vehicle has an ambulance
package, this feature is disabled.
Side Sliding Door

60/40 Swing-Out Side For the side sliding door, move the
Door Driver Side Shown, button up to engage the security
Passenger Side Similar feature. Move the button down to
return the door locks to normal
For the 60/40 side swing-out door, operation.
move the button to the right for the
driver side door or to the left for the
passenger side door to engage the
security feature.
Doors
Side Door
(60/40 Swing-Out)
To open the front portion of a To open the rear portion of a

60/40 door from the inside, pull 60/40 door from the outside, pull
the handle toward you and push the handle on the side of the rear
the door open. door and pull the door toward you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close
the rear door first. Then close the
To open the front portion of a front door. Check to make sure that
60/40 door from the outside, pull out both doors are completely closed.
on the handle and open the door.
The swing-out doors have a Sliding Door

check strap assembly in the door
frame to keep the door from opening
beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond
90 degrees, close the door partially,
pull the check strap toward you and
then open the door. When the door
is closed, the check strap will
automatically re-engage.
To open the sliding side door from

the inside, pull the handle toward
To open the sliding side door from the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide
the outside, pull the handle toward the door toward the rear of the
the rear of the vehicle and slide the vehicle.
door open. To close the sliding side door from
To close the sliding side door the inside, grasp the handle and
from the outside, use the handle slide the door toward the front of
to slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
the vehicle. Make sure the door is completely
When the door is closed, it will be closed before driving away.
flush with the side of the body.
Rear Doors WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING . Young children who get into
Unlocked doors can be unlocked vehicles may be
dangerous. unable to get out. A child can
. Passengers, especially be overcome by extreme heat
children, can easily open the and can suffer permanent
doors and fall out of a moving injuries or even death from
vehicle. When a door is heat stroke. Always lock the
locked, the handle will not vehicle whenever leaving it.
open it. The chance of being . Outsiders can easily enter
thrown out of the vehicle in a To open the driver side rear door,
through an unlocked door
crash is increased if the pull the latch release at the inside
when you slow down or stop
doors are not locked. So, all edge of the door.
the vehicle. Locking the doors
passengers should wear can help prevent this from To close the rear doors, close the
safety belts properly and the happening. driver side rear door first. Then
doors should be locked close the passenger side rear door.
whenever the vehicle is Check to make sure both doors are
driven. To open the rear doors from the completely closed.
outside, pull the handle toward you
(Continued) to open the passenger side rear
door first.
Vehicle Security You do not have to manually arm

or disarm the system.
If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
This vehicle has theft-deterrent service. If the vehicle does start, the
The security light will come on if
features; however, they do not make first key may be faulty. See your
there is a problem with arming or
it impossible to steal. dealer or a locksmith who can
disarming the theft-deterrent
system. service the PASS-Key III+ to have a
Immobilizer new key made. See Fuses and
When the PASS-Key III+ system Circuit Breakers on page 1045.
See Radio Frequency Statement on senses that someone is using the
page 1319 for information wrong key, it shuts down the It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
regarding Part 15 of the Federal vehicle's starter and fuel systems. decoder to learn the transponder
Communications Commission (FCC) The starter will not work and fuel will value of a new or replacement key.
rules and Industry Canada stop being delivered to the engine. Up to 10 keys may be programmed
Standards RSS-210/220/310. Anyone using a trial-and-error for the vehicle. This procedure is for
method to start the vehicle will be learning additional keys only. If all
Immobilizer Operation discouraged because of the high the currently programmed keys are
number of electrical key codes. lost or do not operate, you must see
This vehicle is equipped with the your dealer or a locksmith who
PASS-Key III+ (Personalized If the engine does not start and can service PASS-Key III+ to have
Automotive Security System) the security message comes on, keys made and programmed to
theft-deterrent system. the key may have a damaged the system.
PASS-Key III+ is a passive theft transponder. Turn the ignition off
deterrent system. and try again. See your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
The system is automatically armed If the engine still does not start, and new key blank that is cut exactly as
when the key is removed from the the key appears to be undamaged, the ignition key that operates the
ignition. try another ignition key. At this time, system.
you may also want to check the
instrument panel PASS KEY fuse.
To program the new key: 4. Insert the key to be programmed Exterior Mirrors
and turn it to ON/RUN within
1. Verify the new key has 1 10 seconds of removing the
stamped on it. previous key. Convex Mirrors
2. Insert the original, already The security message will
programmed key into the ignition turn off once the key has been { WARNING
lock cylinder and start the programmed. It may not be
engine. If the engine will not A convex mirror can make things,
apparent that the security like other vehicles, look farther
start, see your dealer for service. message went on due to how
away than they really are. If you
3. After the engine has started, quickly the key is programmed.
cut too sharply into the right lane,
turn the key to LOCK/OFF and 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if you could hit a vehicle on the
remove the key. additional keys are to be right. Check the inside mirror or
programmed. glance over your shoulder before
If you lose or damage a changing lanes.
PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer
or a locksmith who can service The passenger side mirror is convex
PASS-Key III+ to have a new shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
key made. curved so more can be seen from
Do not leave the key or device the driver seat.
that disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Manual Mirrors Trailer-Tow Mirrors Power Mirrors

Adjust the mirrors by pressing
the mirror up and down and
left and right.
The mirrors can be manually
folded in or out.
On the lower portion of each mirror
is an auxiliary convex mirror.
A convex mirror's surface is curved
so you can see more from the driver
seat. The auxiliary convex mirrors
can be adjusted manually by
pressing the mirror.
Vehicles with towing mirrors can be Vehicles with outside power mirrors
adjusted manually for a clear view have controls located on the driver
of the objects behind you. side door.
On the lower portion of each mirror Select each mirror by turning the
there is an auxiliary convex mirror knob clockwise for the passenger
that can be adjusted manually to side mirror or counterclockwise for
provide an extended field of view. the driver side mirror. The center
The mirrors can be manually folded position is neutral.
in or out. Then, adjust the mirror angle by
moving the knob in the desired
direction. The auxiliary convex
mirrors can only be adjusted
manually.
Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors Windows

For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Defogger): Press to heat
Manual Rearview Mirror { WARNING
the mirrors. Hold the inside rearview mirror in
Leaving children, helpless adults,
An indicator light in the button lights the center to move it for a clearer
or pets in a vehicle with the
when the outside heated mirrors are view behind the vehicle. Adjust the
windows closed is dangerous.
activated. mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind. Push the tab They can be overcome by the
See Rear Window Defogger forward for daytime use and pull it extreme heat and suffer
under Climate Control Systems on for nighttime use. permanent injuries or even death
page 81 for more information. from heat stroke. Never leave a
If you have a cargo van without the child, a helpless adult, or a pet
rear door glass, the vehicle may not alone in a vehicle, especially with
have an inside rearview mirror.
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
Manual Windows could be seriously injured or killed If the vehicle has power windows,
if caught in the path of a closing the controls are located on each of
Operate the manual windows by window. Do not leave keys in a the side doors.
turning the hand crank on each door vehicle with children. The driver door has a switch for the
to raise or lower the side door
When there are children in the passenger window also. The power
windows.
windows will work when the ignition
rear seat use the window lockout
has been turned to ON/RUN or
button to prevent unintentional
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
operation of the windows. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 921.
Press the switch to lower the
window.
Pull up on the front edge of the
switch to raise the window.
ExpressDown Swing-Out Windows

The driver window switch also has
an express-down feature that allows
the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press fully and
release the window switch marked
AUTO to activate the express-down
mode. This mode can be cancelled
at any time by pulling up on the
switch. To open the window part
way, lightly tap the switch until the
window is at the desired position.
Rear SwingOut Windows
Side Swing-Out Window The vehicle also has rear swingout
windows. The rear swing-out
To open the side door swing-out windows work the same way as the
window, pull up on the latch at the side swing out window, but the latch
edge of the window. Swing the is located at the bottom edge of the
window out and push down on the window.
latch to lock the window into place.
To close the window, pull the latch
toward you and push down on the
latch to lock it.
Enhanced Technology Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

Glass Eight Seat Passenger Vans Sliding door forward window
The vehicle may be equipped with Twelve and Fifteen Seat Sliding door forward window and
Enhanced Technology Glass (ETG). Passenger Vans rear-most side windows
ETG is part of the overall occupant
protection system on passenger Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows
vans. ETG may help to keep
passengers sitting next to these
fixed windows from being ejected Sun Visors Visor Vanity Mirror
through the glass in some, but not in
To block out glare, swing down the The vehicle may have visor vanity
all crashes. Even with this glass,
sun visors. You can also swing them mirrors, with or without lamps.
safety belts must still be worn at all
to the side. Lift the mirror cover to turn the
times. For passenger vans, use only
lamps on, if equipped.
ETG glass approved for the vehicle
for replacement when damaged.
The following table shows laminated
glass location, based on vehicle
model and options.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Airbag System

Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Restraints Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27
When Should an Airbag
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-48
Head Restraints What Makes an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-50
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Lower Anchors and Tethers
How Does an Airbag for Children
Front Seats Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 What Will You See after an Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-32 Securing Child Restraints
Passenger Sensing (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-58
Rear Seats System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped (Front Seat-Passenger
Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Sensing System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Adding Equipment to the Securing Child Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-41 (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-42 Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Use During Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Front Seats

On vehicles with factory
installed seats, the front seats Seat Adjustment
have built-in head restraints that
are not adjustable in the outboard { WARNING
seating positions.
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
To adjust the seat:
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
the vehicle is not moving. of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Power Seat Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever on the inboard side
To adjust a power seat, if available, of the seat.
use the controls on the front of
the seat: { WARNING 2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
. Move the center knob to the If either seatback is not locked, it release the lever to lock the
right or left to move the seat could move forward in a sudden seatback in place.
forward or rearward. stop or crash. That could cause 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
. Move the center knob up or injury to the person sitting there. make sure it is locked.
down to raise or lower the seat. Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they
. Move the right or left lever up or
are locked.
down to raise or lower the front
or rear of the seat cushion.
To return the seatback to the

upright position: WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without The lap belt cannot do its job
applying pressure to the either. In a crash, the belt could
seatback, and the seatback will go up over your abdomen. The
return to the upright position. belt forces would be there, not at
2. Push and pull on the seatback to your pelvic bones. This could
make sure it is locked. cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
{ WARNING vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
Sitting in a reclined position when
back in the seat and wear the Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is in motion can be
safety belt properly. the vehicle is moving.
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
(Continued)
Rear Seats
Removing the Rear Seat
Disconnect the mini-latch plates for
the lapshoulder belts on the bench
seat to be removed.
Three-Passenger Seat Shown Three-Passenger Seat Shown

The left side pin has a gray cap The right side pin has a
with a black L marked on it. black cap with a white R
marked on it.
On a four-passenger seat, each
half of the seat has a set of pins.
The left side has a set
1. To do this, press the tip of a marked L, and the right side
key into the release hole of the has a set marked R.
safety belt buckle while pulling
up on the safety belt. If the vehicle has floor mats, the
pins are under a flap that has
2. Locate the pins. been cut into the mat.
On a three-passenger seat there
are two pins on the inboard sides
of the rear seats.
3. Pull the pin handle up to

disengage the pin from the
retaining clip, and then pull the
pin out.
4. Repeat this procedure for the
other pins.
5. Pull the seat rearward about
5 cm (2 in), and then lift the
seat from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the
vehicle.
7. For the second- and third-row For the last row of seats, stow
seats, stow the safety belt latch the safety belt latch plate on the
by attaching the clip on the clip at the window trim. Roll the
safety belt latch to the trim just mini-latch into the safety belt
inside the side door. webbing and then hook the
safety belt latch plate on the clip.
Reinstalling the Rear Seats 1. Position the seat into the open
slots in both rails. Push the seat
{ WARNING forward in the rail, hooking both
seat bases onto the pins inside
A seat that is not locked into of the rails.
place properly can move around 2. Locate the hole in the rail to
in a collision or sudden stop. install the locking pins at the rear
People in the vehicle could be of the seat base. If the vehicle
injured. Be sure to lock the seat has floor mats, pull the flap that
into place properly when has been cut into the mat.
installing it. 3. Insert the locking pins into the
seat base and push the seat to
Three-Passenger Seat Shown
line up the pins with the base.
4. Push the pin(s) marked R down
{ WARNING On a three-passenger seat,
until they are in the
the pin with the black cap
A safety belt that is improperly retaining clip.
marked R must be installed on
routed, not properly attached, the right side and the pin with
or twisted will not provide the the gray cap marked L on the
protection needed in a crash. The left side.
person wearing the belt could be On a four-passenger seat,
seriously injured. After raising the the pins marked R must be
rear seatback, always check to be installed on the half of the seat
sure that the safety belts are on the right side. The pins
properly routed and attached, and marked L must be installed on
are not twisted. the half of the seat on the
left side.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put Safety Belts

the flap back to its original
position. This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
7. Repeat this procedure for the
properly. It also describes some
other seat base.
things not to do with safety belts.
8. Connect the mini-latch plates
for the lap-shoulder belts by
inserting the latch plates into the
{ WARNING
mini-buckles attached at the Do not let anyone ride where a
outboard positions of the bench safety belt cannot be worn
seat. Do not twist the belt. properly. In a crash, if you or your
Three-Passenger Seat Shown 9. Check that all locking pins are passenger(s) are not wearing
locked into place before safety belts, the injuries can be
5. Push the pin(s) marked L down
operating the vehicle. much worse. You can hit things
until they are in the
inside the vehicle harder or be
retaining clip.
ejected from the vehicle. You and
your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work

{ WARNING provinces, the law requires wearing
When you ride in or on anything,
safety belts. Here is why:
It is extremely dangerous to ride you go as fast as it goes.
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in a
of a vehicle. In a collision, people crash. If you do have a crash, you
riding in these areas are more do not know if it will be a
likely to be seriously injured or serious one.
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
in any area of your vehicle that is crashes can be so serious that even
not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not
safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in
the vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people
a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed.
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
After more than 40 years of safety Take the simplest vehicle.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels.
page 516 for additional information.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until
vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
With safety belts, you slow down them. Whether or not an airbag
as the vehicle does. You get more is provided, all occupants still
time to stop. You stop over more have to buckle up to get the
distance, and your strongest bones most protection. That is true not
take the forces. That is why safety only in frontal collisions, but
belts make such good sense. especially in side and other
collisions.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle why should I wear safety
after a crash if I am wearing a belts?
safety belt?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
or the instrument panel... A: You could be whether you are but if you are in a crash even
wearing a safety belt or not. But one that is not your fault you
your chance of being conscious and your passenger(s) can be
during and after an accident, so hurt. Being a good driver does
you can unbuckle and get out, is not protect you from things
much greater if you are belted. beyond your control, such as
And you can unbuckle a bad drivers.
safety belt, even if you are
Most accidents occur within
upside down.
40 km (25 mi) of home. And the
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why greatest number of serious
should I have to wear safety injuries and deaths occur at
belts? speeds of less than
A: Airbags are supplemental 65 km/h (40 mph).
systems only; so they work with Safety belts are for everyone.
or the safety belts! safety belts not instead of
How to Wear Safety Belts It is very important for all occupants

to buckle up. Statistics show that
Properly unbelted people are hurt more often
This section is only for people of in crashes than those who are
adult size. wearing safety belts.
Be aware that there are special Occupants who are not buckled up
things to know about safety belts can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
and children. And there are different crash. And they can strike others
rules for smaller children and in the vehicle who are wearing
infants. If a child will be riding in the safety belts.
vehicle, see Older Children on First, before you or your
page 343 or Infants and Young passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
Children on page 345. Follow those there is important information you Sit up straight and always keep your
rules for everyone's protection. should know. feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the Q: What is wrong with this?

strong pelvic bones and you would { WARNING
be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt You can be seriously hurt if the
would apply force on your abdomen. shoulder belt is too loose. In a
This could cause serious or even crash, you would move forward
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt too much, which could increase
should go over the shoulder and injury. The shoulder belt should fit
across the chest. These parts of the snugly against your body.
body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.

It will not give as much
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will A: The belt is buckled in the
not give nearly as much wrong buckle.
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the You can be seriously injured if the
belt is buckled in the wrong place belt goes over an armrest like
like this. In a crash, the belt would this. The belt would be much too
go up over your abdomen. The high. In a crash, you can slide
belt forces would be there, not on under the belt. The belt force
the pelvic bones. This could would then be applied on the
cause serious internal injuries. abdomen, not on the pelvic
Always buckle the belt into the bones, and that could cause
buckle nearest you. serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
A: The shoulder belt is worn under spleen. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is behind the body.
the arm. It should be worn over go over the shoulder and across
the shoulder at all times. the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured by You can be seriously injured by a
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt twisted belt. In a crash, you would
properly. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
not be restrained by the shoulder to spread impact forces. If a belt
belt. Your body could move too is twisted, make it straight so it
far forward increasing the chance can work properly, or ask your
of head and neck injury. You dealer to fix it.
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across the body.
the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are
using a rear seating position with a The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
detachable safety belt and the you pull the belt across you very
safety belt is not attached, see quickly. If this happens, let the
Reinstalling the Rear Seats belt go back slightly to unlock it.
under Rear Seats on page 35 for Then pull the belt across you
instructions on reconnecting the more slowly.
safety belt to the mini-buckle. If the shoulder portion of a
The following instructions explain passenger belt is pulled out all
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
properly. buckle until it clicks.
If this happens, let the belt go
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to
adjustable, so you can sit up make sure it is secure. If the belt
straight. To see how, see Seats is not long enough, see Safety
in the Index. Belt Extender on page 323.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Safety Belt Height Adjuster

height adjuster, move it to the
The vehicle has a safety belt height
height that is right for you.
adjuster for the driver and right front
See Safety Belt Height Adjuster
passenger positions.
later in this section for
instructions on use and Adjust the height so the shoulder
important safety information. portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
To unlatch the belt, push the button to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
on the buckle. The belt should page 312.
return to its stowed position.
Slide the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing when the safety belt is
not in use. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop on the
5. To make the lap part tight, pull side wall.
up on the shoulder belt. Before a door is closed, be sure the
It may be necessary to pull safety belt is out of the way. If a
stitching on the safety belt door is slammed against a safety
through the latch plate to belt, damage can occur to both the
fully tighten the lap belt on safety belt and the vehicle.
smaller occupants.
After the adjuster is set to the They can help tighten the safety
desired position, try to move it down belts during the early stages of a
without pushing in to make sure it moderate to severe frontal, near
has locked into position. frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
Safety Belt Pretensioners activation are met. And, if the
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight vehicle has side impact airbags,
Rating) of the vehicle is below safety belt pretensioners can help
3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the vehicle tighten the safety belts in a side
has safety belt pretensioners for the crash or a rollover event.
front outboard occupants. See Pretensioners work only once.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 912 to If the pretensioners are activated in
locate the certification label which a crash, the pretensioners and
To move it down, pull on the center
contains the GVWR. possibly other parts of the safety
adjuster control labeled PULL.
You can move the height adjuster Although the safety belt belt system will need to be replaced.
up just by pushing up on the pretensioners cannot be seen, they See Replacing Safety Belt System
shoulder belt guide. are part of the safety belt assembly. Parts after a Crash on page 324.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer.
The guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats
and for some adults. When installed
and properly adjusted, the comfort
guide positions the shoulder belt
away from the neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort 2. Place the guide over the belt,
guide to the safety belt: and insert the two edges of the
1. Locate the guide in a pocket on belt into the slots of the guide.
the side of the seatback.
Make sure the shoulder portion

WARNING (Continued) of the belt is on the shoulder and
not falling off of it. The belt
The shoulder belt should go should be close to, but not
over the shoulder and across the contacting, the neck.
chest. These parts of the body To remove and store the comfort
are best able to take belt guide, squeeze the belt edges
restraining forces. together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide into its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not

twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could 4. Buckle, position, and release
be seriously injured. the safety belt as described
(Continued) previously in this section.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are working properly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in
around you, you should use it. a crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 516 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on page 324.
seat it is made to fit. The extender
A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the
throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety or replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon Readiness Light on page 517.
as possible.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver,
Airbag System the passenger seated directly
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
The vehicle has the following behind the driver, and the
third row outboard passenger
airbag:
position (passenger van { WARNING
. A frontal airbag for the driver. equipped with a sliding or You can be severely injured or
The vehicle may have the following hinged door). killed in a crash if you are not
airbags: . A roof-rail airbag for the right wearing your safety belt even
. A frontal airbag for the right front front passenger, the passenger if you have airbags. Airbags are
passenger. seated directly behind the right designed to work with safety
front passenger, and the belts, but do not replace them.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver
third row outboard passenger Also, airbags are not designed to
(cargo van).
position (passenger van deploy in every crash. In some
. A roof-rail airbag for the equipped with a hinged door). crashes safety belts are your only
right front passenger position
All of the airbags in the vehicle will restraint. See When Should an
(cargo or passenger van
have the word AIRBAG embossed Airbag Inflate? on page 328.
equipped with a sliding door).
in the trim or on an attached label
If you have a passenger van Wearing your safety belt during a
near the deployment opening.
with a right front passenger crash helps reduce your chance
For frontal airbags, the word of hitting things inside the vehicle
roof-rail airbag and a sliding
AIRBAG will appear on the middle or being ejected from it. Airbags
door, you will also have a
separate roof-rail airbag for the part of the steering wheel for the are supplemental restraints to
driver and on the instrument panel the safety belts. Everyone in your
passenger seated directly
for the right front passenger. vehicle should wear a safety belt
behind the right front passenger
and the third row outboard With roof-rail airbags, the word properly whether or not there is
passenger position. AIRBAG will appear along the an airbag for that person.
headliner or trim.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
Anyone who is up against, or when it inflates can be seriously
very close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel, which
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
shows the airbag symbol.
close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle safety belt The system checks the airbag
of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
position before and during a children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 517 for
belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always more information.
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 343 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 345.
windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
If the vehicle has one, the right front Driver Side Shown, Passenger
passenger airbag is in the Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the If the vehicle is a cargo or
middle of the steering wheel. passenger side. passenger van with a sliding door
and it has a roof-rail airbag for the
driver and right front passenger
position, the roof-rail airbags are in
the ceiling above the side window.
For passenger vans with a sliding

door, on the passenger side of the WARNING (Continued)
vehicle, you will have a separate
roof-rail airbag for the passenger through any door or window
seated directly behind the right front opening. If you do, the path of an
passenger and the third row inflating roof-rail airbag will be
outboard passenger position. blocked.
{ WARNING When Should an Airbag

If something is between an Inflate?
occupant and an airbag, the Frontal airbags are designed to
Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag might not inflate properly inflate in moderate to severe frontal
Side Similar or it might force the object into or near-frontal crashes to help
that person causing severe injury reduce the potential for severe
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags injuries mainly to the driver or right
or even death. The path of an
for the driver, right front passenger, front passenger head and chest.
inflating airbag must be kept
passengers behind the driver and However, they are only designed
right front passenger, and the third clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an to inflate if the impact exceeds
row outboard passengers, the a predetermined deployment
roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel threshold. Deployment thresholds
above the side windows. On the are used to predict how severe a
driver side of the vehicle, there is hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. crash is likely to be in time for the
one single roof-rail airbag for either airbags to inflate and help restrain
vehicles with a hinged door or a Never secure anything to the roof the occupants.
sliding door. of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
Whether the frontal airbags will or
by routing a rope or tie down
should deploy is not based on how
(Continued) fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit, Thresholds can also vary with Dual-stage airbags adjust the
the direction of the impact, and how specific vehicle design. restraint according to crash severity.
quickly the vehicle slows down. Frontal airbags are not intended to The vehicle has electronic frontal
Frontal airbags may inflate at inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear sensors, which help the sensing
different crash speeds. impacts, or in many side impacts. system distinguish between a
For example: moderate frontal impact and a more
Single Stage vs. Dual Stage severe frontal impact. For moderate
. If the vehicle hits a stationary Airbags frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
object, the airbags could inflate inflate at a level less than full
at a different crash speed than if Depending on the weight of
the vehicle, you will have either deployment. For more severe frontal
the vehicle hits a moving object. impacts, full deployment occurs.
Single Stage Airbags or
. If the vehicle hits an object that Dual Stage Airbags. Vehicles that The vehicle may or may not have
deforms, the airbags could have a passenger sensing system roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
inflate at a different crash speed also have dual stage airbags. See on page 325. Roof-rail airbags are
than if the vehicle hits an object Passenger Airbag Status Indicator intended to inflate in moderate to
that does not deform. on page 519 or Passenger Sensing severe side crashes. In addition,
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object System on page 335. these roof-rail airbags are intended
(like a pole), the airbags could If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight to inflate during a rollover. Roof-rail
inflate at a different crash speed Rating) of the vehicle is 3 855 kg airbags will inflate if the crash
than if the vehicle hits a wide (8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle may severity is above the system's
object (like a wall). have single stage airbags. If the designed threshold level. The
GVWR is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) threshold level can vary with
. If the vehicle goes into an object specific vehicle design.
at an angle, the airbags could then the vehicle may have dual
inflate at a different crash speed stage airbags. You can find the Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
than if the vehicle goes straight GVWR on the certification label on inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
into the object. the rear edge of the driver door. impacts, or rear impacts. All roof-rail
See Vehicle Load Limits on airbags will deploy when either side
page 912 for more information. of the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can Frontal airbag modules are located Roof-rail airbags distribute the force
say whether an airbag should have inside the steering wheel and of the impact more evenly over the
inflated simply because of the instrument panel. For vehicles with occupant's upper body.
damage to a vehicle or because of roof-rail airbags, there are airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
what the repair costs were. modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, are designed to help contain the
For frontal airbags, inflation is near the side windows for the first, head and chest of occupants in the
determined by what the vehicle hits, second, and third rows (if equipped). outboard seating positions in the
the angle of the impact, and how See Where Are the Airbags? on first, second, and third rows,
quickly the vehicle slows down. page 327 for more information. if equipped. The rollover capable
For roof-rail airbags, deployment is roof-rail airbags are designed to
determined by the location and How Does an Airbag help reduce the risk of full or partial
severity of the side impact.
Restrain? ejection in rollover events, although
In a rollover event, roofrail airbag no system can prevent all such
In moderate to severe frontal or
deployment is determined by the ejections.
near frontal collisions, even belted
direction of the roll. But airbags would not help in
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In many types of collisions, primarily
What Makes an Airbag moderate to severe side collisions, because the occupant's motion is
Inflate? even belted occupants can contact not toward those airbags. See
the inside of the vehicle. When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
In a deployment event, the sensing
page 328 for more information.
system sends an electrical signal Airbags supplement the protection
triggering a release of gas from the provided by safety belts. Frontal Airbags should never be regarded
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbags distribute the force of the as anything more than a supplement
airbag causing the bag to break out impact more evenly over the to safety belts.
of the cover and deploy. The inflator, occupant's upper body, stopping
the airbag, and related hardware are the occupant more gradually.
all part of the airbag module.
What Will You See after You can lock the doors, and turn off
an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING the interior lamps and the hazard
warning flashers by using the
After the frontal airbags inflate, they When an airbag inflates, there controls for those features.
quickly deflate, so quickly that some may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags for people with a history of { WARNING
may still be at least partially inflated asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate
for some time after they deploy. To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also
Some components of the airbag vehicle should get out as soon as damaged important functions in
module may be hot for several it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel
minutes. For location of the airbag breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering
modules, see What Makes an get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
Airbag Inflate? on page 330. airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a
The parts of the airbag that come by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be
into contact with you may be warm, If you experience breathing concealed damage that could
but not too hot to touch. There may problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate
be some smoke and dust coming deployment, you should seek the vehicle.
from the vents in the deflated medical attention.
airbags. Airbag inflation does not Use caution if you should attempt
prevent the driver from seeing out of to restart the engine after a crash
The vehicle has a feature that may has occurred.
the windshield or being able to steer automatically unlock the doors
the vehicle, nor does it prevent (if equipped with power door locks),
people from leaving the vehicle. turn on the interior lamps and In many crashes severe enough to
hazard warning flashers, and inflate the airbag, windshields are
shut off the fuel system after the broken by vehicle deformation.
airbags inflate.
Additional windshield breakage may Improper service can mean that

also occur from the right front an airbag system will not work
passenger airbag. properly. See your dealer for
. Airbags are designed to inflate service.
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new Airbag On-Off Switch
parts for the airbag system. If the instrument panel has one of
If you do not get them, the airbag the switches pictured in the
system will not be there to help following illustrations, the vehicle
protect you in another crash. has an airbag on-off switch that you
A new system will include airbag can use to manually turn on or off
modules and possibly other the right front passenger airbag.
parts. The service manual for Canada and Mexico
the vehicle covers the need to If the vehicle does not have an
replace other parts. airbag on-off switch, it may have a
. The vehicle has a crash sensing passenger sensing system. See
and diagnostic module which Passenger Sensing System on
records information after a page 335.
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 1317 and Event Data
Recorders on page 1318.
. Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
United States
This switch should only be turned to Child age 1 to 12. A child

. Makes the potential harm from
the off position if the person in the age 1 to 12 must ride in the the passenger airbag in a crash
right front passenger position is a front seat because: greater than the potential harm
member of a passenger risk group from turning off the airbag and
. My vehicle has no rear seat; allowing the passenger, even if
identified by the national
government as follows: . Although children ages 1 to belted, to hit the dashboard or
12 ride in the rear seat(s) windshield in a crash.
Infant. An infant (less than whenever possible, children
1 year old) must ride in the
front seat because:
ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
ride in the front because no
{ WARNING
. My vehicle has no rear seat; space is available in the rear If the right front passenger airbag
seat(s) of my vehicle; or is turned off for a person who is
. My vehicle has a rear seat too
small to accommodate a . The child has a medical not in a risk group identified by
rear-facing infant seat; or condition which, according to the the national government, that
child's physician, makes it person will not have the extra
. The infant has a medical necessary for the child to ride in protection of an airbag. In a
condition which, according to the the front seat so that the driver crash, the airbag will not be able
infant's physician, makes it can constantly monitor the to inflate and help protect the
necessary for the infant to ride in child's condition. person sitting there. Do not turn
the front seat so that the driver
off the passenger airbag unless
can constantly monitor the Medical Condition. A passenger
has a medical condition which, the person sitting there is in a
child's condition.
according to his or her physician: risk group.
. Causes the passenger airbag to
pose a special risk for the
passenger; and
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system.
For example, the right front
passenger airbag could inflate
even though the airbag on-off
switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or
United States Canada and Mexico others, have the vehicle serviced
To turn off the right front passenger right away. See Airbag Readiness
frontal airbag, insert the ignition key Light on page 517 for more
into the switch, push in, and move information, including important
the switch to the off position. safety information.
The airbag off light will come
on to let you know the right front
passenger airbag is off. The airbag
off light will stay on to remind you
that the airbag is off. See Airbag
On-Off Light on page 518. The right
front passenger airbag will remain
off until you turn it back on again.
Passenger Sensing
System
If the instrument panel has one of
the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, the vehicle
has a passenger sensing system
unless there is an airbag off switch
located on the instrument panel.
If there is an airbag off switch, the
vehicle does not have a passenger
sensing system. See Airbag On-Off
United States Canada and Mexico Switch on page 332 for more
information.
To turn the right front passenger
airbag on again, insert the ignition
key into the switch, push in, and
move the switch to the on position.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is now enabled, and
may inflate. See Airbag On-Off Light
on page 518 for more information.
When the system check is We recommend that children be

complete, either the word ON or the secured in a rear seat, including:
word OFF, or the symbol for on or an infant or a child riding in a
the symbol for off, will be visible. rear-facing child restraint; a child
See Passenger Airbag Status riding in a forward-facing child seat;
Indicator on page 519. an older child riding in a booster
United States The passenger sensing system will seat; and children, who are large
turn off the right front passenger enough, using safety belts.
frontal airbag under certain A label on the sun visor says,
conditions. The driver airbag and Never put a rear-facing child seat in
roof-rail airbags, if equipped, are the front. This is because the risk to
not part of the passenger sensing the rear-facing child is so great,
system. if the airbag deploys.
Canada and Mexico The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of { WARNING
The passenger airbag status the right front passenger seat.
indicator will be visible on the The sensors are designed to detect A child in a rear-facing child
instrument panel when the the presence of a properly seated restraint can be seriously injured
vehicle is started. occupant and determine if the right or killed if the right front
The words ON and OFF, or the front passenger frontal airbag passenger airbag inflates.
symbol for on and off, will be visible should be enabled (may inflate) This is because the back of
during the system check. If you are or not. the rear-facing child restraint
using remote start, if equipped, to would be very close to the
According to accident statistics,
start the vehicle from a distance, Children are safer when properly inflating airbag.
you may not see the system check. secured in a rear seat in the correct (Continued)
child restraint for their weight
and size.
If the vehicle does not have a

. The right front passenger seat is
WARNING (Continued) rear seat that will accommodate occupied by a smaller person,
a rear-facing child restraint, a such as a child who has
A child in a forward-facing rear-facing child restraint should outgrown child restraints.
child restraint can be seriously not be installed in the vehicle, . Or, if there is a critical problem
injured or killed if the right front even if the airbag is off. with the airbag system or the
passenger airbag inflates and the The passenger sensing system is passenger sensing system.
passenger seat is in a forward designed to turn off the right front When the passenger sensing
position. passenger frontal airbag if: system has turned off the right front
Even if the passenger sensing . The right front passenger seat passenger frontal airbag, the off
system has turned off the right is unoccupied. indicator will light and stay lit to
front passenger frontal airbag, remind you that the airbag is off.
. The system determines that an See Passenger Airbag Status
no system is fail-safe. No one can
infant is present in a rear-facing Indicator on page 519.
guarantee that an airbag will not infant seat.
deploy under some unusual The passenger sensing system is
circumstance, even though the
. The system determines that a designed to turn on (may inflate) the
airbag is turned off. small child is present in a child right front passenger frontal airbag
restraint. anytime the system senses that a
Secure rear-facing child . The system determines that a person of adult size is sitting
restraints in a rear seat, even if
small child is present in a properly in the right front
the airbag is off. If you secure a
booster seat. passenger seat.
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move . A right front passenger takes When the passenger sensing
the front passenger seat as far his/her weight off of the seat for system has allowed the airbag to be
back as it will go. It is better to a period of time. enabled, the on indicator will light
secure the child restraint in a and stay lit to remind you that the
rear seat. airbag is active.
For some children who have If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child
outgrown child restraints and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the
very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still
sensing system may or may not If a child restraint has been installed lit, turn the vehicle off. Then
turn off the right front passenger and the on indicator is lit: slightly recline the vehicle
frontal airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off. seatback and adjust the seat
person's seating posture and body cushion, if adjustable, to make
2. Remove the child restraint from
build. Everyone in the vehicle who sure that the vehicle seatback is
the vehicle.
has outgrown child restraints not pushing the child restraint
should wear a safety belt 3. Remove any additional items into the seat cushion.
properly whether or not there is from the seat such as blankets,
6. Restart the vehicle.
an airbag for that person. cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers. If the on indicator is still lit,
{ WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint
secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position
following the directions
If the airbag readiness light ever in the vehicle, and check with
provided by the child restraint
comes on and stays on, it means your dealer.
manufacturer and refer to
that something may be wrong Securing Child Restraints (Rear If no rear seat is available,
with the airbag system. To help Seat Position) on page 358 or do not install a child restraint in
avoid injury to yourself or others, Securing Child Restraints (Front this vehicle.
have the vehicle serviced right Seat-Passenger Sensing
away. See Airbag Readiness System) on page 360 or
Light on page 517 for more Securing Child Restraints (Front
information, including important Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch) on
safety information. page 364.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens, use the following Additional Factors Affecting
Adult-Size Occupant steps to allow the system to detect System Operation
that person and enable the right
front passenger frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and
2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger
from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the
cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status.
heaters, or seat massagers. See Safety Belts and Child
Restraints in the Index for
3. Place the seatback in the fully additional information about the
upright position. importance of proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material,
the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion,
cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such
If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. as seat covers, seat heaters, and
the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the seat massagers can affect how well
the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for the passenger sensing system
because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that you
properly in the seat. indicator is lit. not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
This allows the system to detect that
approved by GM for your specific
person and then enable the right
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
front passenger frontal airbag.
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 341 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
The on indicator may be lit if Servicing the

an object, such as a briefcase,
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
{ WARNING
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the
an unoccupied seat. If this is not should be serviced. There are ignition is turned off and the
desired remove the object from parts of the airbag system in battery is disconnected, an airbag
the seat. several places around the vehicle. can still inflate during improper
Your dealer and the service manual service. You can be injured if you
{ WARNING have information about servicing
the vehicle and the airbag system.
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
Stowing of articles under the To purchase a service manual, see They are probably part of the
passenger seat or between the Service Publications Ordering airbag system. Be sure to follow
passenger seat cushion and Information on page 1315. proper service procedures, and
seatback may interfere with the make sure the person performing
proper operation of the passenger work for you is qualified to do so.
sensing system.
Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle may If you have any questions
have a passenger sensing about this, you should contact
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system for the right front Customer Assistance before you
Q: Is there anything I might add passenger position, which modify the vehicle. The phone
to or change about the vehicle includes sensors that are part numbers and addresses for
that could keep the airbags of the passenger seat. The Customer Assistance are in
from working properly? passenger sensing system may Step Two of the Customer
not operate properly if the Satisfaction Procedure in this
A: Yes. If you add things that
original seat trim is replaced with manual. See Customer
change the vehicle's frame,
non-GM covers, upholstery or Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
bumper system, height, front end
trim, or with GM covers, Canada) on page 132 or
or side sheet metal, they may
upholstery or trim designed for a Customer Satisfaction
keep the airbag system from
different vehicle. Any object, Procedure (Mexico) on
working properly. Changing or
such as an aftermarket seat page 134.
moving any parts of the front
heater or a comfort enhancing If the vehicle has rollover
seats, safety belts, the airbag
pad or device, installed under or roof-rail airbags, see Different
sensing and diagnostic module,
on top of the seat fabric, could Size Tires and Wheels on
steering wheel, instrument
also interfere with the operation page 1071 for additional
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
of the passenger sensing important information.
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
system. This could either
trim, front sensors, rollover
prevent proper deployment of
sensor module, or airbag wiring
the passenger airbag(s) or
can affect the operation of the
prevent the passenger sensing
airbag system.
system from properly turning off
the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 335.
Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System

I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash
whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance
airbag system? or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
{ WARNING
A: If you have questions, call See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the
Customer Assistance. The page 517 for more information. airbag systems in the vehicle.
phone numbers and addresses A damaged airbag system may
for Customer Assistance are in Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the not work properly and may
Step Two of the Customer
airbag may not work properly. not protect you and your
Satisfaction Procedure in
Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death.
Canada) on page 132 or opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure the airbag
Customer Satisfaction have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
Procedure (Mexico) on airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
page 134. location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary
see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon
In addition, your dealer and the Inflate? on page 330. as possible.
service manual have information See your dealer for service.
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
If an airbag inflates, you will need Child Restraints Use a booster seat with a
to replace airbag system parts. lap-shoulder belt until the child
See your dealer for service. passes the fit test below:
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on . Sit all the way back on the seat.
after the vehicle is started or comes Do the knees bend at the seat
on when you are driving, the airbag edge? If yes, continue. If no,
system may not work properly. return to the booster seat.
Have the vehicle serviced right . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
away. See Airbag Readiness Light Does the shoulder belt rest on
on page 517 for more information. the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
Older children who have outgrown
to the booster seat.
booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts. . Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
The manufacturer's instructions
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
that come with the booster seat
return to the booster seat.
state the weight and height
limitations for that booster. . Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
wear safety belts? Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on { WARNING
A: An older child should wear a page 318.
Never do this.
lap-shoulder belt and get the According to accident statistics,
additional restraint a shoulder children and infants are safer Never allow two children to wear
belt can provide. The shoulder when properly restrained in a child the same safety belt. The safety
belt should not cross the face or restraint system or infant restraint belt cannot properly spread the
neck. The lap belt should fit system secured in a rear seating impact forces. In a crash, the
snugly below the hips, just position. two children can be crushed
touching the top of the thighs. together and seriously injured.
In a crash, children who are
This applies belt force to the A safety belt must be used by
not buckled up can strike other
child's pelvic bones in a crash. people who are buckled up, or only one person at a time.
It should never be worn over the can be thrown out of the vehicle.
abdomen, which could cause Older children need to use safety
severe or even fatal internal belts properly.
injuries in a crash.
WARNING (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
The child might also slide under Everyone in a vehicle needs
the lap belt. The belt force would protection! This includes infants and
then be applied right on the all other children. Neither the
abdomen. That could cause distance traveled nor the age and
serious or fatal injuries. The size of the traveler changes the
shoulder belt should go over the need, for everyone, to use safety
shoulder and across restraints. In fact, the law in every
the chest. state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
{ WARNING restrained while in a vehicle.
Never do this. { WARNING

Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt Children can be seriously injured
behind their back. A child can be or strangled if a shoulder belt is
seriously injured by not wearing wrapped around their neck and
the lap-shoulder belt properly. the safety belt continues to
In a crash, the child would not be tighten. Never leave children
restrained by the shoulder belt. unattended in a vehicle and never
The child could move too far allow children to play with the
forward increasing the chance of safety belts.
head and neck injury.
(Continued)
Airbags plus lapshoulder belts

offer protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only Never do this.
safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) Children who are up against,
system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a or very close to, any airbag when
time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a it inflates can be seriously injured
in vehicles, they should have the person's arms. An infant should or killed. Never put a rear-facing
protection provided by appropriate be secured in an appropriate child restraint in the right front
child restraints. restraint. seat. Secure a rear-facing child
Children who are not restrained restraint in a rear seat. It is also
properly can strike other people, better to secure a forward-facing
or can be thrown out of the vehicle. child restraint in a rear seat.
(Continued)
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of The restraint manufacturer's

WARNING (Continued) add-on child restraints? instructions that come with the
A: Add-on child restraints, which restraint state the weight and
If you must secure a height limitations for a particular
are purchased by the vehicle
forward-facing child restraint in child restraint. In addition, there
owner, are available in four basic
the right front seat, always move types. Selection of a particular are many kinds of restraints
the front passenger seat as far restraint should take into available for children with
back as it will go. consideration not only the child's special needs.
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will { WARNING
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
For most basic types of child
need complete support. This is
restraints, there are many
because an infant's neck is not
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be fully developed and its head
sure it is designed to be used in weighs so much compared with
a motor vehicle. If it is, the the rest of its body. In a crash, an
restraint will have a label saying infant in a rear-facing child
that it meets federal motor restraint settles into the restraint,
vehicle safety standards. so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a (A) RearFacing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B)
crash, young children should provides restraint for the child's
A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness.
always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured that come with the restraint which
or killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
(C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
child to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle even when no child
in the vehicle. Child restraint is in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or Passenger Safety Technicians
by the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly
(LATCH System) on page 352 for use and install child restraints.
more information.
In the U.S., refer to the National Where to Put the Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off
Highway Traffic Safety Switch) on page 364 for more
Administration (NHTSA) website to
Restraint information, including important
locate the nearest child safety seat According to accident statistics, safety information.
inspection station. For CPST children and infants are safer A label on the sun visor says,
availability in Canada, check with when properly restrained in a child Never put a rear-facing child seat in
Transport Canada or the Provincial restraint system or infant restraint the front. This is because the risk to
Ministry of Transportation office. system secured in a rear seating the rear-facing child is so great,
position. if the airbag deploys.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
{ WARNING
{ WARNING riding in a rear-facing child restraint; A child in a rear-facing child
A child can be seriously injured or a child riding in a forward-facing restraint can be seriously
killed in a crash if the child is not child seat; an older child riding in a injured or killed if the right front
booster seat; and children, who are passenger airbag inflates.
properly secured in the child
large enough, using safety belts. This is because the back of the
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions If a child restraint is secured in the rear-facing child restraint would
that came with that child restraint. right front passenger seat, and there be very close to the inflating
is a switch on the instrument panel airbag. A child in a forward-facing
to manually turn off the right front child restraint can be seriously
passenger airbag. See Airbag injured or killed if the right front
On-Off Switch on page 332 and passenger airbag inflates and
Securing Child Restraints (Rear the passenger seat is in a
Seat Position) on page 358 or forward position.
Securing Child Restraints (Front
(Continued)
Seat-Passenger Sensing System)
on page 360 or Securing Child
When securing a child restraint in If the vehicle does not have a

WARNING (Continued) a rear seating position, study the rear seat that will accommodate
instructions that came with the a rear-facing child restraint, a
Even if the passenger sensing child restraint to make sure it is rear-facing child restraint should not
system or airbag switch has compatible with this vehicle. be installed in the vehicle, even if
turned off the right front the airbag is off.
passenger frontal airbag, no Child restraints and booster seats
system is fail-safe. No one can vary considerably in size, and some Wherever a child restraint is
guarantee that an airbag will not may fit in certain seating positions installed, be sure to secure the
better than others. Always make child restraint properly.
deploy under some unusual
sure the child restraint is properly Keep in mind that an unsecured
circumstance, even though it is
secured. child restraint can move around in a
turned off.
Depending on where you place the collision or sudden stop and injure
Secure rear-facing child child restraint and the size of the people in the vehicle. Be sure to
restraints in a rear seat, even if child restraint, you may not be able properly secure any child restraint in
the airbag is off. If you secure a to access adjacent safety belt the vehicle even when no child
forward-facing child restraint in assemblies or LATCH anchors for is in it.
the right front seat, always move additional passengers or child
the front passenger seat as far restraints. Adjacent seating
back as it will go. It is better to positions should not be used if the
secure the child restraint in a child restraint prevents access to or
rear seat. interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Lower Anchors and either the lower anchors or the Lower Anchors
safety belts to properly secure the
Tethers for Children child restraint. A child restraint must
(LATCH System) never be installed using only the
The LATCH system holds a child top tether strap and anchor.
restraint during driving or in a crash. In order to use the LATCH system
This system is designed to make in your vehicle, you need a child
installation of a child restraint easier. restraint that has LATCH
The LATCH system uses anchors in attachments. The child restraint
the vehicle and attachments on the manufacturer will provide you with
child restraint that are made for use instructions on how to use the
with the LATCH system. child restraint and its attachments. Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
The following explains how to attach built into the vehicle. There are
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
a child restraint with these two lower anchors for each
child restraint is properly installed
attachments in your vehicle. LATCH seating position that will
using the anchors, or use the
accommodate a child restraint with
vehicle's safety belts to secure the Not all vehicle seating positions or lower attachments (B).
restraint, following the instructions child restraints have lower anchors
that came with that restraint, and and attachments or top tether
also the instructions in this manual. anchors and attachments.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the
top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have
a top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the
top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built be attached. Be sure to read and
into the vehicle. The top tether follow the instructions for your
attachment (B) on the child restraint Second, Third, and Fourth Row
child restraint.
connects to the top tether anchor in with Three-Passenger Seat
the vehicle in order to reduce the i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
forward movement and rotation of positions with top tether anchors.
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash. j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
See the information following for
installing a child restraint with a
top tether in the second, third, and
fourth row center positions.
Do not install three child restraints in To install a child restraint in the

the same row at the same time and rear center seating positions, use
never install two top tethers using anchor point (B). Never install
the same top tether anchor. two top tethers using the same
top tether anchor.
If the vehicle is equipped with a
four-passenger fourth or fifth-row
seat, it does not have upper or
lower anchors. If a child restraint
is placed in the four-passenger
fourth or fifth-row seat, it must be
secured using the vehicle safety
Second, Third, and Fourth Row belts. See Rear Seat Position
with Three-Passenger under Securing Child Restraints
Seat Passenger Van (Rear Seat Position) on page 358
or Securing Child Restraints (Front
There are two top tether anchors in
Front Passenger Position Seat-Passenger Sensing System)
the second, third, and fourth-row
on page 360 or Securing Child
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating three-passenger seats. To install a
Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off
positions with top tether anchors. child restraint in the rear driver-side
Switch) on page 364 for more
seating positions, use anchor
The second, third, and fourth row information.
point (A). To install a child restraint
with three-passenger seats have in the rear passenger-side seating
exposed metal lower anchors positions, use anchor point (B).
located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
Do not secure a child restraint in a

position without a top tether anchor WARNING (Continued)
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if In a crash, the child could be
the instructions that come with the seriously injured or killed.
child restraint say that the top tether Install a LATCH-type child
must be attached. restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
According to accident statistics, belts to secure the restraint,
children and infants are safer when
following the instructions that
properly restrained in a child
came with the child restraint and
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating the instructions in this manual.
Front Passenger Position position. See Where to Put the
There is a top tether anchor for Restraint on page 350 for
the front passenger position with a additional information. { WARNING
front passenger seat. The anchor is Securing a Child Restraint
located at the rear of the seat Do not attach more than one child
Designed for the LATCH restraint to a single anchor.
cushion on the right front
System Attaching more than one child
passenger seat.
restraint to a single anchor could
{ WARNING cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
during a crash. A child or others
not attached to anchors, the child
could be injured. To reduce the
restraint will not be able to protect
risk of serious or fatal injuries
the child correctly.
during a crash, attach only
(Continued) one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower 2. If the child restraint manufacturer

{ WARNING attachments to the lower recommends that the top tether
anchors. If the child restraint be attached, attach and tighten
Children can be seriously injured does not have lower the top tether to the top tether
or strangled if a shoulder belt is attachments or the desired anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
wrapped around their neck and seating position does not have child restraint instructions and
the safety belt continues to lower anchors, secure the child the following steps:
tighten. Buckle any unused safety restraint with the top tether and
belts behind the child restraint so 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
the safety belts. Refer to your
children cannot reach them. Pull child restraint manufacturer 2.2. For the second, third, and
the shoulder belt all the way out instructions and the instructions fourth row with
of the retractor to set the lock, in this manual. three-passenger seats only,
if the vehicle has one, after the in the rear driver-side
1.1. Find the lower anchors for seating positions, use
child restraint has been installed. the desired seating anchor point (A). For the
position. rear passenger-side seating
Notice: Do not let the LATCH 1.2. Put the child restraint on positions, use anchor
attachments rub against the the seat. point (B). For the center
vehicles safety belts. This may seating positions, use
damage these parts. If necessary, 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child anchor point (B). Never
move buckled safety belts to install two top tethers using
avoid rubbing the LATCH restraint to the lower
anchors. the same top tether anchor.
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
2.3. Route and tighten the

top tether according to your
child restraint instructions
and the following
instructions:
If the position you are using

does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether, If the position you are using
route the tether over has an integrated headrest
the seatback. or head restraint and you
If the position you are using are using a dual tether,
does not have a headrest route the tether around the
or head restraint and you headrest or head restraint.
are using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints

Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat Position)
When securing a child restraint
{ WARNING in a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
A crash can damage the LATCH child restraint to make sure it is
system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle.
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH
resulting in serious injury or even system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
death in a crash. To help make
System) on page 352 for how and
sure the LATCH system is
If the position you are using where to install the child restraint
working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
has an integrated headrest
see your dealer to have the secured in the vehicle using a
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether, system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
route the tether over the necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
headrest or head restraint. soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on
page 352 for top tether anchor
3. Before placing a child in the
If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations.
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check, and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a
grasp the child restraint at the crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
LATCH path and attempt to may be needed. if a national or local law requires
move it side to side and back New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if
and forth. There should be no necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
movement for proper installation. time of the crash. must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints
have a top tether, and that the
tether be attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
the Restraint on page 350. the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat. necessary.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Front Seat-Passenger
regarding the use of the top Sensing System)
tether. See Lower Anchors and This vehicle has airbags.
Tethers for Children (LATCH A rear seat is a safer place to
System) on page 352 for more secure a forward-facing child
information. restraint. See Where to Put the
7. Before placing a child in Restraint on page 350.
the child restraint, make sure On vehicles with a passenger
it is securely held in place. To sensing system, the system is
check, grasp the child restraint designed to turn off the right front
5. To tighten the belt, push down at the safety belt path and passenger frontal airbag under
on the child restraint, pull the attempt to move it sidetoside certain conditions. See Passenger
shoulder portion of the belt to and backandforth. When the Sensing System on page 335 and
tighten the lap portion of the belt, child restraint is properly Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
and feed the shoulder belt back installed, there should be on page 519 for more information,
into the retractor. When installing no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) including important safety
a forward-facing child restraint, of movement. information.
it may be helpful to use your To remove the child restraint,
knee to push down on the child A label on the sun visor says,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and Never put a rear-facing child seat in
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position. the front. This is because the risk to
Try to pull the belt out of the If the top tether is attached to a the rear-facing child is so great,
retractor to make sure the top tether anchor, disconnect it. if the airbag deploys.
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
If the vehicle does not have a

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint, a
A child in a rear-facing child No one can guarantee that an rear-facing child restraint should not
restraint can be seriously airbag will not deploy under some be installed in the vehicle, even if
injured or killed if the right front unusual circumstance, even the airbag is off.
passenger airbag inflates. though it is turned off.
This is because the back of the If the child restraint has the
rear-facing child restraint would Secure rear-facing child restraints LATCH system, see Lower Anchors
in a rear seat, even if the and Tethers for Children (LATCH
be very close to the inflating
airbag is off. If you secure a System) on page 352 for how and
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
forward-facing child restraint in where to install the child restraint
child restraint can be seriously using LATCH. If a child restraint is
injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far secured using a safety belt and it
passenger airbag inflates and uses a top tether, see Lower
the passenger seat is in a back as it will go. It is better to
Anchors and Tethers for Children
forward position. secure the child restraint in a
(LATCH System) on page 352 for
rear seat.
Even if the passenger sensing top tether anchor locations.
system has turned off the right See Passenger Sensing System Do not secure a child seat in a
front passenger frontal airbag, no on page 335 for additional position without a top tether anchor
system is fail-safe. information. if a national or local law requires
(Continued) that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
forward-facing child restraints have the lap and shoulder portions of
a top tether, and that the tether be the vehicle's safety belt through
attached. or around the restraint. The child
You will be using the lap-shoulder restraint instructions will show
belt to secure the child restraint in you how.
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the
system has turned off the right way out of the retractor to set
front passenger frontal airbag, the lock. When the retractor lock
the off indicator on the is set, the belt can be tightened
passenger airbag status but not pulled out of the
indicator should light and stay retractor.
lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status 4. Push the latch plate into the
Indicator on page 519. buckle until it clicks.
2. Put the child restraint on Position the release button on
the seat. the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the airbag is off, the off indicator
retractor to make sure the in the passenger airbag status
retractor is locked. If the indicator will come on and stay on
retractor is not locked, repeat when the vehicle is started.
Steps 5 and 6. If the child restraint has been
7. If the vehicle does not have a installed and the on indicator is lit,
rear seat and the child restraint see If the On Indicator is Lit for a
has a top tether, follow the Child Restraint under Passenger
child restraint manufacturer's Sensing System on page 335 for
instructions regarding the use more information.
of the top tether. See Lower To remove the child restraint,
Anchors and Tethers for unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
6. To tighten the belt, push down Children (LATCH System) on let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the page 352 for more information.
shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a
8. Before placing a child in the top tether anchor, disconnect it.
tighten the lap portion of the belt, child restraint, make sure it is
and feed the shoulder belt back securely held in place. To check,
into the retractor. When installing grasp the child restraint at the
a forward-facing child restraint, safety belt path and attempt to
it may be helpful to use your move it side to side and back
knee to push down on the child and forth. When the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
Securing Child Restraints

(Front Seat-Airbag On/Off
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Switch) A child in a rear-facing child No one can guarantee that an

restraint can be seriously airbag will not deploy under some
This vehicle has airbags. A rear injured or killed if the right front
seat is a safer place to secure a unusual circumstance, even
passenger airbag inflates. though it is turned off.
forward-facing child restraint. This is because the back of the
See Where to Put the Restraint on Secure rear-facing child restraints
rear-facing child restraint would
page 350. in a rear seat, even if the
be very close to the inflating
On vehicles with an airbag on/off airbag. A child in a forward-facing airbag is off. If you secure a
switch, you can use this feature to child restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in
turn off the right front passenger injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move
frontal airbag. The switch is located passenger airbag inflates and the the front passenger seat as far
on the instrument panel. See Airbag passenger seat is in a forward back as it will go. It is better to
On-Off Switch on page 332 for position. secure the child restraint in a
more information, including rear seat.
important safety information. Even if the airbag switch
has turned off the right front
A label on the sun visor says,
Never put a rear-facing child seat in passenger frontal airbag, no
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe.
the rear-facing child is so great, (Continued)
if the airbag deploys.
If the vehicle does not have a Do not secure a child seat in a

{ WARNING rear seat that will accommodate position without a top tether anchor
a rear-facing child restraint, a if a national or local law requires
If the airbag readiness light rear-facing child restraint should not that the top tether be anchored, or if
ever comes on and stays on, it be installed in the vehicle, even if the instructions that come with the
means that something may be the airbag is off. child restraint say that the top strap
wrong with the airbag system. must be anchored.
For example, the right front If the child restraint has the
passenger airbag could inflate LATCH system, see Lower Anchors In Canada, the law requires that
and Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraints have
even though the airbag on-off
System) on page 352 for how and a top tether, and that the tether
switch is turned off.
where to install the child restraint be attached.
To help avoid injury to yourself or using LATCH. If a child restraint is
others, have the vehicle serviced secured using a safety belt and it
right away. See Airbag Readiness uses a top tether, see Lower
Light on page 517 for more Anchors and Tethers for Children
information, including important (LATCH System) on page 352 for
safety information. top tether anchor locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and
belt to secure the child restraint in run the lap and shoulder
this position. Follow the instructions portions of the vehicle safety belt
that came with the child restraint. through or around the restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as The child restraint instructions
it will go before securing the will show you how.
forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice but
to install a rear-facing child
restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child
restraint has been installed.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
When the airbag off switch out of the retractor to set the
has turned off the right front lock. When the retractor lock is
passenger frontal airbag, the off set, the belt can be tightened but
indicator in the airbag off light not pulled out of the retractor.
should light and stay lit when the
vehicle is started. See Airbag
On-Off Light on page 518. 4. Push the latch plate into the
2. Put the child restraint on buckle until it clicks.
the seat. Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
7. If the vehicle does not have a To remove the child restraint,

rear seat and the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
has a top tether, follow the let it return to the stowed position.
child restraint manufacturer's If the top tether is attached to a
instructions regarding the use top tether anchor, disconnect it.
of the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for If you turned the airbag off with
Children (LATCH System) on the switch, turn on the right front
page 352 for more information. passenger airbag when you remove
the child restraint from the vehicle
8. Before placing a child in the unless the person who will be sitting
child restraint, make sure it is there is a member of a passenger
securely held in place. To check, airbag risk group. See Airbag
6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the On-Off Switch on page 332 for
on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to more information, including
shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back important safety information.
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child
and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 5 and 6.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Front Storage
This vehicle may have a front
storage compartment. It is located at
the center of the instrument panel
extension, by the floor. To open the
compartment, pull up on the latch.
The compartment will open
automatically.
Storage compartments may also
be included on the inside of each
front door.
4-2 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33
Controls Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Passenger Airbag Status Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Cooling System
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Malfunction Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Brake System Warning Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Ride Control System
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak Indicator Light . . . 5-25 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38
Indicators Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Anti-theft Alarm System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-39
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-41
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Vehicle Reminder
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Information Displays Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Driver Information
Engine Oil Pressure Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Vehicle Personalization
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-42
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel w or c / x (Next/Previous):

while driving. Press to select preset or favorite
Steering Wheel radio stations, select tracks on a
Steering Wheel Controls CD, or navigate an iPod or
Adjustment USB device.
Radio
To select preset or favorite radio
stations:
Press and release w or c / x to
go to the next or previous radio
station stored as a preset or
favorite.
CD
To select tracks on a CD:
If available, some audio controls Press and release w or c / x to

For vehicles with a tilt steering can be adjusted at the steering go to the next or previous track.
wheel, the lever is located on the wheel.
left side of the steering column.
See Cruise Control on page 937 for
To adjust the steering wheel: more information on other steering
1. Pull the lever to move the wheel control.
steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
2. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or 3. Press and release w or c / x SRCE (Source/Voice

USB Device to scroll up or down the list. Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio and CD, and
1. Press and hold w or c / x . To select a folder, press for equipped vehicles, the
while listening to a song until the and hold w, or press front auxiliary.
contents of the current folder when the folder is
display on the radio display. (Seek): Press to go to the
highlighted. next radio station while in
2. Press and release w or c / x . To go back further in AM, FM, or XM.
to scroll up or down the list, then the folder list, press and For vehicles with a CD Player or
press and hold w, or press to hold c / x. USB port:
play the highlighted track. b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to go to the next track or
Navigating Folders on an iPod or Press to silence the vehicle chapter while sourced to the CD.
USB Device speakers only. Press again to
turn the sound on. Press to select a track or a folder
1. Press and hold w or c / x when navigating folders on an
while listening to a song until the For vehicles with Bluetooth or
OnStar systems, press and hold iPod or USB device.
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display. for longer than two seconds to While listening to a CD, press and
interact with those systems. See hold to quickly move forward
2. Press and hold c / x to go Bluetooth on page 724 and the through the tracks. Release to stop
back to the previous folder list. OnStar Owner's Guide for more on the desired track.
information.
c / x (End): Press to reject an + e e (Volume): Press to
incoming call, or end a current call. increase or to decrease the volume.
Horn 8 (Mist): Use for a single wipe. Windshield Washer

Press the horn symbol in the middle Hold the band on z, then release. The windshield wiper paddle is
of the steering wheel to sound For several wipes, hold the band located on top of the multifunction
the horn. on z longer. lever.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): L (Washer Fluid): Push the
Windshield Wiper/Washer Use to adjust the delay time paddle to spray washer fluid on the
between wipes. Turn the band up windshield. The wipers will clear the
for more frequent wipes or down for window and then either stop or
less frequent wipes. return to the preset speed.
d (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
{ WARNING
a (High Speed): Fast wipes.
In freezing weather, do not use
9 (Off): Use to turn the the washer until the windshield
The windshield wiper control is wipers off.
located on the multifunction lever on is warmed. Otherwise the
When driving during the day and washer fluid can form ice on the
the left side of the steering wheel. the wipers are activated, the head windshield, blocking your vision.
Turn the band with N on it to select lamps automatically turn on after
the wiper speed. completing eight wipe cycles.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged blades should
be replaced.
Compass To adjust for compass variance, use 2. Find the vehicle's current
the following procedure: location and variance zone
This vehicle may have a compass in number on the map.
the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure Zones 1 through 15 are
Compass Zone available.
1. Do not set the compass zone
Your dealer will set the correct zone when the vehicle is moving. 3. Press V to scroll through and
for your location. Only set it when the vehicle is select the appropriate
Under certain circumstances, in P (Park). variance zone.
such as during a long distance
Press T until PRESS V TO 4. Press 3 until the vehicle
cross-country trip or moving to a
new state or province, it will be CHANGE COMPASS ZONE heading, for example, N for
necessary to compensate for displays. North, is displayed in the DIC.
compass variance by resetting the 5. If calibration is necessary,
zone through the DIC if the zone is calibrate the compass.
not set correctly. See Compass Calibration
Compass variance is the difference Procedure following.
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone
where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
Compass Calibration Turn off the vehicle, move the 3. Press V to start the compass
The compass can be manually magnetic item, then turn on the calibration.
calibrated. Only calibrate the vehicle and calibrate the compass.
4. The DIC will display
compass in a magnetically clean To calibrate the compass, use the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
and safe location, such as an following procedure: CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle
open parking lot, where driving the in tight circles at less than
vehicle in circles is not a danger. Compass Calibration Procedure
8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the
It is suggested to calibrate away 1. Before calibrating the compass, calibration. The DIC will display
from tall buildings, utility wires, make sure the compass zone CALIBRATION COMPLETE for
manhole covers, or other industrial is set to the variance zone in a few seconds when the
structures, if possible. which the vehicle is located. calibration is complete.
If CAL should ever appear in the See Compass Variance (Zone) The DIC display will then return
Procedure earlier in this
DIC display, the compass should to PRESS V TO CALIBRATE
be calibrated. section.
COMPASS.
If the DIC display does not show a Do not operate any switches
heading, for example, N for North, such as window, sunroof,
or the heading does not change climate controls, seats, etc.
after making turns, there may be a during the calibration procedure.
strong magnetic field interfering with 2. Press T until PRESS V TO
the compass. Such interference CALIBRATE COMPASS
may be caused by a magnetic CB or displays.
cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic
note pad holder, or any other
magnetic item.
Clock 2. While either the hour or the MP3 Radio with a Single CD
minutes are flashing, turn the Player
AM/FM Radio with Optional CD f knob, located on the upper
Player right side of the radio, clockwise If the vehicle has a radio with a
or counterclockwise to increase single CD (MP3) player, the radio
If the vehicle has an AM/FM radio has a H button for setting the time
or decrease the time. While the
with an optional CD player, it has a and date.
12HR or 24HR time format is
H button for setting the time. With
these types of radios, the clock can flashing, turn the f knob To set the time and date, follow the
be set with either the radio turned clockwise or counterclockwise to instructions:
on or off. select the default time settings.
1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
Set the time by following these 3. Press H again until the clock DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
steps: display stops flashing to set day, and year) displays.
the currently displayed time;
1. Press H until the hour begins otherwise, the flashing stops
2. Press the softkey located under
flashing on display. Press this any one of the tabs that you
after five seconds and the
button a second time and the want to change. Every time the
current time displayed is
minutes begin flashing on softkey is pressed again, the
automatically set.
display. time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
Press H a third time and the
12HR or 24HR time format Another way to increase the time
begins flashing. or date, is to press SEEK or
\ FWD (forward).
3. To decrease, press SEEK or
s REV. You can also turn the
f knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio, to adjust
the selected setting.
Changing the Time and Date MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD 3. To decrease, press SEEK or
Default Settings Player s REV, or turn the f knob,
You can change the time default If the vehicle has a radio with a located on the upper right side of
setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or six-disc CD player, the radio has a the radio, to adjust the selected
change the date default setting from setting.
MENU button instead of H to set
month/day/year to day/month/year.
the time and date. Changing the Time and Date
To change the time or date default Default Settings
To set the time and date, follow
settings, follow these instructions:
these instructions: To change the time default setting
1. Press H and then the softkey 1. Press the MENU button. Once from 12 hours to 24 hours or change
located under the forward arrow the date default setting from month/
the H option displays, press the
that is currently displayed on day/year to day/month/year.
softkey located under that tab.
the radio screen until the time To change the time or date default
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and settings, follow these instructions:
(hour, minute, month, day, and
the date MM/DD (month and
year) displays. 1. Press the MENU button.
day) and DD/MM (day and
month) are displayed. 2. Press the softkey located under Once the H option displays,
any one of the tabs to change. press the softkey located
2. Press the softkey located under
Every time the softkey is under the forward arrow that
the desired option.
pressed again, the time or the is currently displayed on the
3. Press H again to apply the date if selected, increases radio screen until the 12H (hour)
selected default, or let the by one. and 24H (hour), and the date
screen time out. Another way to increase the time MM/DD (month and day) and
DD/MM (day and month)
or date, is to press SEEK or
displays.
\ FWD (forward).
2. Press the softkey located under Notice: Hanging heavy

the desired option. { WARNING equipment from the power outlet
3. Press the MENU button again to can cause damage not covered
Power is always supplied to the by the vehicle warranty. The
apply the selected default, or let outlets. Do not leave electrical
the screen time out. power outlets are designed for
equipment plugged in when the accessory power plugs only, such
vehicle is not in use because the as cell phone charge cords.
Power Outlets vehicle could catch fire and cause
The accessory power outlets can be injury or death. Cigarette Lighter
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or an MP3 To use the cigarette lighter, if the
Notice: Leaving electrical vehicle has one, push it in all the
player. equipment plugged in for an way, and let go. When it is ready for
The vehicle may have two extended period of time while use, it will pop back out by itself.
accessory power outlets located on the vehicle is off will drain the
the instrument panel. battery. Always unplug electrical Do not use the lighter to plug in
equipment when not in use and accessory devices. Use the
Remove the cover to access and do not plug in equipment that power outlets provided.
replace when not in use. exceeds the maximum 20 ampere Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
Certain power accessory plugs may rating. in while it is heating does not let
not be compatible to the accessory When adding electrical equipment, the lighter back away from the
power outlet and could overload be sure to follow the proper heating element when it is hot.
vehicle or adapter fuses. If a installation instructions included with Damage from overheating can
problem is experienced, see the equipment. See Add-On occur to the lighter or heating
your dealer. Electrical Equipment on page 956. element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
For vehicles with an ashtray it is Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
located in the center console or on lights work together to indicate a
the instrument panel. Pull up on the Indicators problem with the vehicle.
ashtray door to open it if it is in the Warning lights and gauges can
console or pull the door open it if it When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
is on the instrument panel. before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
Notice: If papers, pins, or other to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
flammable items are put in the replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
smoking materials could ignite prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
them and possibly damage the Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
vehicle. Never put flammable could be a problem with a vehicle
items in the ashtray. function. Some warning lights come
To remove the ashtray, pull it out on briefly when the engine is started
from the console or from the slide to indicate they are working.
out door. To reinstall the ashtray,
slide it back to the original position.
Instrument Cluster
English 4Speed Version Shown, 6Speed and Metric Similar

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, Odometer Trip Odometer

see the Duramax diesel supplement
for more information. The odometer shows how far the The trip odometer can show how far
vehicle has been driven, in either the vehicle has been driven since
Speedometer miles or kilometers. the trip odometer was last set
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant to zero.
The speedometer shows the
vehicle speed in both kilometers per
odometer. The digital odometer will Press the 3 on the Driver
read 999,999 if it is turned back. Information Center (DIC) switch to
hour (km/h) and miles per
hour (mph). If the vehicle needs a new odometer display the trip odometer and the
installed, it must be set to the regular odometer information.
mileage total of the old odometer. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
If that is not possible, then it must on page 528 for more information
be set at zero and a label must be on resetting the trip odometer.
put on the driver door to show the
old mileage reading when the new To display the odometer reading
odometer was installed. with the ignition off, press the 3
on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) switch.
Fuel Gauge Listed are four situations customers

might experience with the fuel
gauge. None of these indicate a
problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
English
took a little more or less than
Metric The fuel gauge, when the ignition is half the tank's capacity to fill
on, indicates how much fuel is left in the tank.
the vehicle fuel tank. . The gauge moves a little while
An arrow on the fuel gauge turning a corner or speeding up.
indicates the side of the vehicle the . The gauge does not go back to
fuel door is on.
empty when the ignition is
The gauge first indicates empty turned off.
before the vehicle is out of fuel, and
If the vehicle has a diesel engine ,
the fuel tank should be
refueled soon.
for more information.
Engine Oil Pressure A reading in the low pressure zone

may be caused by a dangerously
Gauge low oil level or other problem
causing low oil pressure.
Check the oil as soon as possible.
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
English the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
The oil pressure gauge shows the
engine oil pressure in psi (pounds
Metric
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals) Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
when the engine is running. maintenance can damage the
Oil pressure may vary with engine engine. The repairs would not be
speed, outside temperature and oil covered by the vehicle warranty.
viscosity, but readings above the Always follow the maintenance
low pressure zone indicate the schedule for changing engine oil.
normal operating range.
Engine Coolant If the vehicle is pulling a load or

going up hills, it is normal for the
Temperature Gauge temperature to fluctuate and
approach the
122C (250F) mark. If the gauge
reaches the 125C (260F) mark, it
indicates that the cooling system is
working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on
page 1024.
English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature.
Metric
It also provides an indicator of how
hard the vehicle is working. During a
majority of the operation, the gauge
wil read 100C (210F) or less.
Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone Safety Belt Reminders
may occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating Driver Safety Belt Reminder
in the vehicle and the engine is left Light
at an idle for an extended period.
There is a driver safety belt
This condition is normal since the
reminder light on the instrument
charging system is not able to
panel cluster.
provide full power at engine idle.
As engine speeds are increased,
this condition should correct itself as
higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum
power.
The vehicle can be only driven for a
short time with the reading in either When the vehicle is started, this
When the engine is not running, but
warning zone. If it must be driven, light flashes and a chime may come
the ignition is on, this gauge shows
turn off all unnecessary on to remind the driver to fasten
the battery's state of charge in
accessories. their safety belt. Then the light stays
DC volts.
Readings in either warning zone on solid until the belt is buckled.
When the engine is running, the
indicate a possible problem in the This cycle may continue several
gauge shows the condition of the
electrical system. Have the vehicle times if the driver remains or
charging system. Readings between
serviced as soon as possible. becomes unbuckled while the
the low and high warning zones
vehicle is moving.
indicate the normal operating range.
If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the light nor the chime
comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt If the passenger safety belt is

Reminder Light buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The passenger safety belt reminder
light and chime may turn on if an
object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, The airbag readiness light flashes
laptop, or other electronic device. for a few seconds when the engine
To turn off the reminder light and/or is started. If the light does not come
For vehicles equipped with the chime, remove the object from the on then, have it fixed immediately.
passenger safety belt reminder light, seat or buckle the safety belt.
several seconds after the engine is { WARNING
started, a chime sounds for several Airbag Readiness Light
seconds to remind the front If the airbag readiness light stays
The system checks the airbag's on after the vehicle is started or
passenger to buckle their safety
electrical system for possible
belt. The passenger safety belt light comes on while driving, it means
malfunctions. If the light stays on
flashes and then stays on solid until the airbag system might not be
it indicates there is an electrical
the belt is buckled. This cycle working properly. The airbags in
problem. The system check
continues several times if the the vehicle might not inflate in a
includes the airbag sensor, the
passenger remains or becomes crash, or they could even inflate
pretensioners, the airbag modules,
unbuckled while the vehicle is without a crash. To help avoid
the wiring and the crash sensing
moving. injury, have the vehicle serviced
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, right away.
see Airbag System on page 325.
For vehicles with a remote start, the

airbag readiness light will stay on { WARNING
until the driver places the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position. If the right front passenger airbag
is turned off for a person who is
If there is a problem with the airbag not in a risk group identified by
system, an airbag Driver Information the national government, that
Center (DIC) message can also person will not have the extra
come on. See Airbag System protection of an airbag. In a
Messages on page 538 for more
crash, the airbag will not be able
information.
to inflate and help protect the
person sitting there.
Airbag On-Off Light
United States Do not turn off the passenger
When the right front passenger
airbag unless the person sitting
airbag is manually turned off using
there is in a risk group identified
the airbag on-off switch on the
instrument panel, if equipped, the by the national government.
indicator light OFF or the off symbol See Airbag On-Off Switch on
will come on and stay on as a page 332 for more on this,
reminder that the airbag has been including important safety
turned off. This light will go off when information.
the airbag has been turned on.
See Airbag On-Off Switch on
page 332 for more information,
including important safety
information.
Canada and Mexico
Passenger Airbag Status

{ WARNING Indicator
If the airbag readiness light ever If the vehicle has a passenger
comes on and stays on, it means sensing system, the instrument
that something may be wrong panel will have a passenger airbag
with the airbag system. status indicator. See Passenger
For example, the right front Canada and Mexico
Sensing System on page 335 for
passenger airbag could inflate important safety information. When the vehicle is started, the
even though the airbag on-off passenger airbag status indicator
switch is turned off. will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
To help avoid injury to yourself or as a system check. If you are using
others, have the vehicle serviced remote start, if equipped, to start the
right away. See Airbag Readiness vehicle from a distance, you may
Light on page 517 for more not see the system check. Then,
information, including important United States after several more seconds, the
safety information. status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off
If the word ON or the on symbol symbol to let you know the status
is lit, it means that the right front of the right front passenger frontal
passenger frontal airbag is enabled, airbag.
and may inflate. See Airbag On-Off
Switch on page 332 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is The light should go out once the
lit on the passenger airbag status WARNING (Continued) engine starts. If it stays on,
indicator, it means that the right or comes on while driving, there
front passenger frontal airbag is To help avoid injury to yourself or could be a problem with the
enabled, and may inflate. others, have the vehicle serviced charging system. A charging system
If the word OFF or the off symbol is right away. See Airbag Readiness message in the Driver Information
lit on the airbag status indicator, it Light on page 517 for more Center (DIC) can also appear.
means that the passenger sensing information, including important See Battery Voltage and Charging
system has turned off the right front safety information. Messages on page 533 for more
passenger frontal airbag. information. This light could indicate
that there are problems with a
If, after several seconds, both status Charging System Light generator drive belt, or that there is
indicator lights remain on, or if there an electrical problem. Have it
are no lights at all, there may be a checked right away. If the vehicle
problem with the lights or the must be driven a short distance with
passenger sensing system. the light on, turn off accessories,
See your dealer for service. such as the radio and air
conditioner.
{ WARNING
This light comes on briefly when the
If the airbag readiness light ever ignition key is turned to START, but
comes on and stays on, it means the engine is not running, as a
that something may be wrong check to show it is working.
with the airbag system.
If it does not, have the vehicle
(Continued) serviced by your dealer.
Malfunction If the malfunction indicator lamp Notice: Modifications made to

comes on and stays on while the the engine, transmission,
Indicator Lamp engine is running, this indicates that exhaust, intake, or fuel system
A computer system called there is an OBD II problem and of the vehicle or the replacement
OBD II (On-Board service is required. of the original tires with other
Diagnostics-Second Generation) Malfunctions often are indicated by than those of the same Tire
monitors operation of the fuel, the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC) can
ignition, and emission control apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission
systems. It ensures that emissions can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this light
are at acceptable levels for the life to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to
of the vehicle, helping to produce a the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to
cleaner environment. diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This could
Notice: If the vehicle is also result in a failure to pass a
continually driven with this light required Emission Inspection/
on, the emission controls might Maintenance test. See
not work as well, the vehicle fuel Accessories and Modifications on
economy might not be as good, page 103.
and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to This light comes on during a
This light should come on when the costly repairs that might not be malfunction in one of two ways:
ignition is on, but the engine is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Light Flashing: A misfire condition
running, as a check to show it is has been detected. A misfire
working. If it does not, have the increases vehicle emissions and
vehicle serviced by your dealer. could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to Light On Steady: An emission

. Make sure the electrical system
the vehicle: control system malfunction has is not wet. The system could be
been detected on the vehicle. wet if the vehicle was driven
. Reduce vehicle speed. through a deep puddle of water.
Diagnosis and service might be
. Avoid hard accelerations. required. The condition is usually
. corrected when the electrical
Avoid steep uphill grades. The following may correct an system dries out. A few driving
. If towing a trailer, reduce the emissions system malfunction: trips should turn the light off.
amount of cargo being hauled as . Make sure the fuel cap is fully . Make sure to fuel the vehicle
soon as it is possible. installed. See Filling the Tank on with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
If the light continues to flash, when page 943. The diagnostic causes the engine not to run as
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. system can determine if the efficiently as designed and can
Find a safe place to park the fuel cap has been left off or cause: stalling after start-up,
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at improperly installed. A loose or stalling when the vehicle is
least 10 seconds, and restart the missing fuel cap allows fuel to changed into gear, misfiring,
engine. If the light is still flashing, evaporate into the atmosphere. hesitation on acceleration,
follow the previous steps and see A few driving trips with the cap or stumbling on acceleration.
your dealer for service as soon properly installed should turn These conditions might go away
as possible. the light off. once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass
occurs, change the fuel brand used. Maintenance Programs inspection if:
It will require at least one full tank of . The malfunction indicator lamp
the proper fuel to turn the light off. Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs is on with the engine running,
See Recommended Fuel on to inspect the on-vehicle emission or if the light does not come on
page 940. control equipment. For the when the ignition is turned to
If none of the above have made the inspection, the emission system ON/RUN while the engine is off.
light turn off, your dealer can check test equipment is connected to . The critical emission control
the vehicle. The dealer has the the vehicles Data Link systems have not been
proper test equipment and Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed by the
diagnostic tools to fix any system. This can happen if
mechanical or electrical problems the battery has recently been
that might have developed. replaced or if the battery has
run down. The diagnostic system
evaluates critical emission
control systems during
normal driving. This can take
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the
wheel. See your dealer if vehicle still does not pass the
assistance is needed. inspection, your dealer can
prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
Brake System Warning If the light comes on while driving,

pull off the road and stop carefully.
Light The pedal might be harder to push,
The vehicle brake system or the pedal might go closer to the
consists of two hydraulic circuits. floor. It could take longer to stop.
If one circuit is not working, the If the light is still on, have the
remaining circuit can still work to Metric English vehicle towed for service. See
stop the vehicle. For normal braking Towing the Vehicle on page 1093.
performance, both circuits need to This light should come on briefly
be working. when ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN. If it does not come on,
{ WARNING
If the warning light comes on, there
have it fixed so it will be ready to The brake system might not be
could be a brake problem. Have the
warn if there is a problem. working properly if the brake
brake system inspected right away.
When the ignition is on, the system warning light is on.
brake system warning light also Driving with the brake system
comes on when the parking brake warning light on can lead to a
is set. See Parking Brake on crash. If the light is still on after
page 934 for more information. the vehicle has been pulled off
The light stays on if the parking the road and carefully stopped,
brake does not fully release. If it have the vehicle towed for
stays on after the parking brake is service.
fully released, it means the vehicle
has a brake problem.
Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning StabiliTrak Indicator
light is not on, the vehicle still has
(ABS) Warning Light brakes, but not antilock brakes.
Light
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 524.
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake Tow/Haul Mode Light For vehicles with the StabiliTrak
System (ABS), this light comes on system, this light comes on or
briefly when the engine is started. flashes.
If it does not, have the vehicle For more information, see
serviced by your dealer. If the StabiliTrak System on page 934.
system is working normally the Three chimes sound if the light turns
indicator light then goes off. on and one chime if the light
If the ABS light stays on, turn the turns off.
ignition off. If the light comes on For vehicles with the Tow/Haul
Mode feature, this light comes on If this light remains on steady, the
while driving, stop as soon as it is vehicle needs to be taken in for
safely possible and turn the ignition when the Tow/Haul Mode has been
activated. service.
off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light For more information, see Tow/Haul
stays on, or comes on again while Mode on page 931.
driving, the vehicle needs service.
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and

WARNING (Continued)
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be a Someone could be burned. Check
problem with the TPMS. The light the oil as soon as possible and
flashes for about a minute and stays have the vehicle serviced.
on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
See Tire Pressure Monitor maintenance can damage the
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Operation on page 1063 for engine. The repairs would not be
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
more information. covered by the vehicle warranty.
comes on briefly when the engine is
Always follow the maintenance
started. It provides information
Engine Oil Pressure Light schedule for changing engine oil.
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
This light comes on briefly while
When the Light is On Steady starting the engine. If it does not,
This indicates that one or more have the vehicle serviced by your
of the tires are significantly dealer. If the system is working
underinflated. normally, the indicator light then
A tire pressure message can goes off.
accompany the light. See Tire If the light comes on and stays on, it
Messages on page 540 for more means that oil is not flowing through
information. Stop as soon as
{ WARNING the engine properly. The vehicle
possible, and inflate the tires to Do not keep driving if the oil could be low on oil and it might
the pressure value shown on the pressure is low. The engine can have some other system problem.
Tire and Loading Information label. become so hot that it catches fire.
See Tire Pressure on page 1060
for more information. (Continued)
Security Light High-Beam On Light Cruise Control Light
This light should could come on This light comes on when the The cruise control light comes on
briefly when the vehicle is started high-beam headlamps are in use. whenever the cruise control is set.
and then it goes out. If it does not, See Headlamp High/Low-Beam The light goes out when the cruise
see your dealer for service. Changer on page 63 for more control is turned off. See Cruise
For information regarding this light information. Control on page 937 for more
and the vehicle's security system, information.
see Immobilizer Operation on
page 213.
Information Displays If the vehicle has these features, DIC Operation and Displays
the DIC also displays the compass
The DIC has different displays
direction and the outside air
Driver Information temperature when viewing the
which can be accessed by pressing
Center (DIC) the DIC buttons located on the
trip and fuel information. The
instrument panel, next to the
compass direction appears on the
This vehicle has a Driver instrument panel cluster.
top right corner of the DIC display.
Information Center (DIC).
The outside air temperature DIC Buttons
All messages will appear in the automatically appears in the bottom
DIC display located at the bottom right corner of the DIC display.
of the instrument panel cluster. If there is a problem with the system
The DIC buttons are located on that controls the temperature
the instrument panel, next to the display, the numbers will be
instrument panel cluster. replaced with dashes. If this occurs,
The DIC comes on when the ignition have the vehicle serviced by your
is on. After a short delay, the DIC dealer.
will display the information that was If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
last displayed before the engine see the Duramax diesel
was turned off. supplement for more information.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system The buttons are the trip/fuel,
problem is detected. vehicle information, customization,
and set/reset buttons. The button
functions are detailed in the
following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature
button to display the odometer, called the retro-active reset. This
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this
can be used to set the trip odometer
trip odometers, fuel range, average button to scroll through the following
economy, fuel used, timer, average to the number of kilometers (miles)
menu items:
speed, and digital tachometer. driven since the ignition was last
Odometer turned on. This can be used if the
T (Vehicle Information): trip odometer is not reset at the
Press this button to display the Press 3 until XX km (mi) beginning of the trip.
oil life, units, tire pressure readings displays. This display shows the
for vehicles with the Tire Pressure distance the vehicle has been To use the retro-active reset feature,
Monitor System (TPMS), engine driven in either kilometers (km) or press and hold V for at least
hours, Tire Pressure Monitor miles (mi). four seconds. The trip odometer
System (TPMS) programming for will display the number of
vehicles with the TPMS and without Trip Odometers kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press 3 until A or B displays. since the ignition was last turned on
transmitter, and compass zone and and the vehicle was moving. Once
This display shows the current
compass calibration on vehicles the vehicle begins moving, the trip
distance traveled in either
with this feature. kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since odometer will accumulate mileage.
U (Customization): Press this the last reset for each trip odometer. For example, if the vehicle was
button to customize the feature Both trip odometers can be used at driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is
settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle the same time. started again, and then the
Personalization on page 542 for retro-active reset feature is
Each trip odometer can be reset to activated, the display will show
more information.
zero separately by pressing V while 8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to the desired trip odometer is begins moving, the display will
set or reset certain functions and to displayed. then increase to 8.1 km (5.1 miles),
turn off or acknowledge messages 8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.
on the DIC.
If the retro-active reset feature is number may change even though Fuel Used
activated after the vehicle is started, the same amount of fuel is in the
but before it begins moving, the fuel tank. This is because different Press 3 until FUEL USED
display will show the number of driving conditions produce different displays. This display shows the
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) that fuel economies. Generally, freeway number of liters (L) or gallons (gal)
were driven during the last ignition driving produces better fuel of fuel used since the last reset of
cycle. economy than city driving. this menu item. To reset the fuel
used information, press and hold V
Fuel Range If the vehicle is low on fuel, the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be while FUEL USED is displayed.
Press 3 until FUEL RANGE displayed. See FUEL LEVEL LOW Timer
displays. This display shows the under Fuel System Messages on
approximate number of remaining page 536 for more information. Press 3 until TIMER displays.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) the This display can be used as a timer.
vehicle can be driven without Average Economy
refueling. The display will show To start the timer, press V while
Press 3 until AVG ECONOMY TIMER is displayed. The display will
LOW if the fuel level is low. displays. This display shows the show the amount of time that has
The fuel range estimate is based on approximate average liters per passed since the timer was last
an average of the fuel economy 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles reset, not including time the ignition
over recent driving history and the per gallon (mpg). This number is is off. Time will continue to be
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel calculated based on the number of counted as long as the ignition is
tank. This estimate will change if L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the on, even if another display is being
driving conditions change. For last time this menu item was reset. shown on the DIC. The timer will
example, if driving in traffic and To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
making frequent stops, this display hold V. The display will return and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
may read one number, but if the to zero. which the display will return to zero.
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
To stop the timer, press V briefly
while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and Vehicle Information Menu See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
hold V while TIMER is displayed. Items under Engine Oil Messages on
page 535. You should change the
Average Speed T (Vehicle Information): oil as soon as possible. See Engine
Press this button to scroll through Oil on page 107. In addition to the
Press 3 until AVERAGE SPEED the following menu items: engine oil life system monitoring the
displays. This display shows the oil life, additional maintenance is
average speed of the vehicle in Oil Life
recommended in the Maintenance
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles Press T until OIL LIFE Schedule in this manual. See
per hour (mph). This average is REMAINING displays. This display Scheduled Maintenance on
calculated based on the various shows an estimate of the oil's page 113 for more information.
vehicle speeds recorded since the remaining useful life. If you see
last reset of this value. To reset Remember, you must reset the
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
the value, press and hold V. OIL LIFE yourself after each oil
display, that means 99% of the
change. It will not reset itself. Also,
The display will return to zero. current oil life remains. The engine
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
oil life system will alert you to
Digital Tachometer accidentally at any time other than
change the oil on a schedule
when the oil has just been changed.
Press 3 until consistent with your driving
It cannot be reset accurately until
Tachometer ##00 RPM displays. conditions.
the next oil change. To reset the
This display shows the engine When the remaining oil life is low, engine oil life system, see Engine
speed in revolutions per the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Oil Life System on page 1010.
minute (RPM). message will appear on the display.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Units See Tire Pressure on page 1060 Rotation on page 540 and Tire
and Tire Messages on page 540 for Messages on page 540 for more
Press T until UNITS displays. more information. information.
This display allows you to select
between metric or English units of If the tire pressure display shows Change Compass Zone
measurement. Once in this display, dashes instead of a value, there
may be a problem with the vehicle. The vehicle may have this feature.
press V to select between METRIC To change the compass zone
If this consistently occurs, see your
or ENGLISH units. dealer for service. through the DIC, see Compass on
page 55.
Tire Pressure Engine Hours
Calibrate Compass
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the Press T until ENGINE HOURS The vehicle may have this feature.
pressure for each tire can be viewed displays. This display shows the The compass can be manually
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be total number of hours the engine calibrated. To calibrate the compass
shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or has run. through the DIC, see Compass on
pounds per square inch (psi). Relearn Tire Positions page 55.
Press T until the DIC displays Blank Display
The vehicle may have this display.
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## To access this display, the vehicle This display shows no information.
RIGHT ##. Press T again until must be in P (Park). If the vehicle
the DIC displays REAR TIRES has the Tire Pressure Monitor
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. System (TPMS), after rotating the
If a low tire pressure condition is tires or after replacing a tire or
detected by the system while sensor, the system must re-learn the
driving, a message advising you to tire positions. To re-learn the tire
check the pressure in a specific tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
will appear in the display. System on page 1062. See Tire
Inspection on page 1066, Tire
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and If this message appears, stop as

soon as possible and turn off the
Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
indicate the status of the vehicle or SERVICE BATTERY check for the message on the
some action may be needed to CHARGING SYSTEM DIC display. If the message is still
correct a condition. Multiple displayed or appears again when
messages may appear one after On some vehicles, this message you begin driving, the brake system
another. displays if there is a problem needs service as soon as possible.
with the battery charging system. See your dealer.
The messages that do not require
Under certain conditions, the
immediate action can be
charging system light may also turn Compass Messages
acknowledged and cleared by
on in the instrument panel cluster.
pressing V (Set/Reset). See Charging System Light on CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
The messages that require page 520. Driving with this problem CIRCLES
immediate action cannot be cleared could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Have the This message displays when
until that action is performed. calibrating the compass. Drive the
electrical system checked as soon
All messages should be taken as possible. See your dealer. vehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h
seriously and clearing the message (5 mph) to complete the calibration.
does not correct the problem. See Compass on page 55 for
Brake System Messages more information.
The following are the possible
messages and some information SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM CALIBRATION COMPLETE
about them. This message displays along with This message displays when the
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, the brake system warning light if compass calibration is complete.
see the Duramax diesel there is a problem with the brake See Compass on page 55 for
supplement for more information. system. See Brake System Warning more information.
Light on page 524.
Door Ajar Messages Stop and turn off the vehicle, check Engine Cooling System
the door for obstructions, and close
CARGO DOOR OPEN the door again. Check to see if the
Messages
This message displays and a chime message still appears on the DIC. ENGINE HOT A/C
sounds if the cargo door is open PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (Air Conditioning) OFF
while the ignition is in ON/RUN. This message displays when the
Turn off the vehicle and check the This message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger door is not engine coolant becomes hotter than
cargo door. Restart the vehicle the normal operating temperature.
and check for the message on the fully closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear. Stop and turn off the See Engine Coolant Temperature
DIC display. Gauge on page 515. To avoid
vehicle, check the door for
DRIVER DOOR OPEN obstructions, and close the door added strain on a hot engine,
again. Check to see if the message the air conditioning compressor
This message displays and a chime automatically turns off. When the
sounds if the driver door is not fully still appears on the DIC.
coolant temperature returns to
closed and the vehicle is in a drive RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN normal, the air conditioning
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, compressor turns back on. You can
check the door for obstructions, and On some vehicles, this message
displays and a chime sounds if the continue to drive the vehicle.
close the door again. Check to see
if the message still appears on passenger side rear door is not fully If this message continues to appear,
the DIC. closed and the vehicle is in a drive have the system repaired by your
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, dealer as soon as possible to avoid
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN check the door for obstructions, and damage to the engine.
On some vehicles, this message close the door again. Check to see
displays and a chime sounds if the if the message still appears on
driver side rear door is not fully the DIC.
closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear.
ENGINE OVERHEATED ENGINE OVERHEATED Engine Oil Messages

IDLE ENGINE STOP ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Notice: If you drive the vehicle Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating, while the engine is overheating, This message displays when the
severe engine damage may severe engine damage may engine oil needs to be changed.
occur. If an overheat warning occur. If an overheat warning When you change the engine oil, be
appears on the instrument panel appears on the instrument panel sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE
cluster and/or DIC, stop the cluster and/or DIC, stop the OIL SOON message. See Engine
vehicle as soon as possible. vehicle as soon as possible. Oil Life System on page 1010 for
See Engine Overheating on See Engine Overheating on information on how to reset the
page 1024 for more information. page 1024 for more information. message. See Engine Oil on
page 107 and Scheduled
This message displays when the This message displays and a chime Maintenance on page 113 for more
engine coolant temperature is too sounds if the engine cooling system information.
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to reaches unsafe temperatures for
idle until it cools down. See Engine operation. Stop and turn off the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
Coolant Temperature Gauge on vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,
page 515. to avoid severe damage. This this message displays if the oil level
message clears when the engine in the vehicle is low. Check the oil
has cooled to a safe operating level and correct it as necessary.
temperature. You may need to let the vehicle cool
or warm up and cycle the ignition to
be sure this message clears.
See Engine Oil on page 107 for
additional information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages

STOP ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine oil pressure is This message displays and a chime This message displays and a
low, severe engine damage may sounds when the cooling system chime sounds if the fuel level is low.
occur. If a low oil pressure temperature gets too hot and the Refuel as soon as possible. See
warning appears on the Driver engine further enters the engine Fuel Gauge on page 513 and Fuel
Information Center (DIC), stop coolant protection mode. See on page 939 for more information.
the vehicle as soon as possible. Engine Overheating on page 1024
for further information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP
Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is This message also displays when This message may display along
corrected. See Engine Oil on the engine power is reduced. with the check engine light on the
page 107 for more information. Reduced engine power can affect instrument panel cluster if the fuel
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. cap is not tightened properly. See
This message displays if low oil Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
pressure levels occur. Stop the If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed page 521. Reinstall the fuel cap
vehicle as soon as safely possible fully. See Filling the Tank on
and do not operate it until the cause to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the page 943. The diagnostic system
of the low oil pressure has been can determine if the fuel cap has
corrected. Check the oil as soon as next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced been left off or improperly installed.
possible and have the vehicle A loose or missing fuel cap allows
serviced by your dealer. speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be fuel to evaporate into the
See Engine Oil on page 107. atmosphere. A few driving trips
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be with the cap properly installed
taken to your dealer for service as should turn this light and
soon as possible. message off.
Key and Lock Messages TURN SIGNAL ON SERVICE TRACTION

This message displays and a CONTROL
REPLACE BATTERY IN
chime sounds if a turn signal is If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
REMOTE KEY left on for 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). message displays when there is a
This message displays if a Remote Move the turn signal/multifunction problem with the Traction Control
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lever to the off position. System (TCS). When this message
battery is low. The battery needs to displays, the system will not limit
be replaced in the transmitter. Ride Control System wheel spin. Adjust your driving
See Battery Replacement under accordingly. See your dealer for
Messages
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) service. See StabiliTrak System on
System Operation on page 23. SERVICE STABILITRAK page 934 for more information.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and STABILITRAK NOT READY
Lamp Messages this message displays, it means
there may be a problem with the If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
AUTOMATIC LIGHT message may display and the
CONTROL OFF StabiliTrak system. If you see this
message, try to reset the system. StabiliTrak indicator light on the
This message displays when the Stop; turn off the engine for at least instrument panel cluster may be on
automatic headlamps are turned off. 15 seconds; then start the engine after first driving the vehicle and
See Exterior Lamp Controls on again. If this message still comes exceeding 32 km/h (20 mph) for
page 61 for more information. on, it means there is a problem. 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system
You should see your dealer for is not functional until the light has
AUTOMATIC LIGHT turned off. See StabiliTrak System
service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
CONTROL ON on page 934 for more information.
however, you do not have the
This message displays when the benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
automatic headlamps are turned on. your speed and drive accordingly.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
STABILITRAK OFF There are several conditions that TRACTION CONTROL OFF
can cause this message to appear.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
message displays when you turn off . One condition is overheating, message displays when the Traction
StabiliTrak, or when the stability which could occur if StabiliTrak Control System (TCS) is turned off.
control has been automatically activates continuously for an Adjust your driving accordingly.
disabled. To limit wheel spin and extended period of time. See StabiliTrak System on
realize the full benefits of the . The message also displays if the page 934 for more information.
stability enhancement system, you brake system warning light is on.
should normally leave StabiliTrak See Brake System Warning Airbag System Messages
on. However, you should turn Light on page 524.
StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets SERVICE AIR BAG
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
. The message could display if
the stability system takes longer This message displays if there is a
and you want to rock the vehicle problem with the airbag system.
to attempt to free it, or if you are than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to Have your dealer inspect the
driving in extreme off-road system for problems. See Airbag
conditions and require more wheel driving conditions.
Readiness Light on page 517 and
spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on . The message displays if an Airbag System on page 325 for
page 911. To turn the StabiliTrak engine or vehicle related more information.
system on or off, see StabiliTrak problem has been detected and
System on page 934. the vehicle needs service.
See your dealer.
The message turns off as soon as
the conditions that caused the
message to be displayed are no
longer present.
Anti-theft Alarm System Service Vehicle Messages STARTING DISABLED

Messages SERVICE THROTTLE
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message displays if the starting
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT This message displays when the of the engine is disabled due to the
SYSTEM electronic sensors that control the electronic throttle control system.
This message displays when there air conditioning and heating Have the vehicle serviced by
is a problem with the theft-deterrent systems are no longer working. your dealer immediately.
system. The vehicle may or may not Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you notice This message only appears while
restart so you may want to take the the ignition is in ON/RUN, and
vehicle to your dealer before turning a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency. will not disappear until the problem
off the engine. See Immobilizer is resolved.
Operation on page 213 for SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
more information. This message cannot be
This message displays when a acknowledged.
WAIT TO START non-emissions related malfunction
This message displays briefly when occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
the theft-deterrent system has by your dealer as soon as possible.
initially found incorrect conditions
within the vehicle and is making a
double check. If your vehicle does
not start soon after, try to start it
again. If it still does not start,
have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
Tire Messages The DIC also shows the tire TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
pressure values. See Driver
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
Information Center (DIC) on
Monitor System (TPMS), this
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE page 528.
message displays when the system
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure SERVICE TIRE MONITOR is re-learning the tire positions on
Monitor System (TPMS), this SYSTEM the vehicle. See Driver Information
message displays when the Center (DIC) on page 528 for more
pressure in one or more of the tires If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure information. The tire positions must
is low. The low tire pressure warning Monitor System (TPMS), this be re-learned after rotating the tires
light will also come on. See Tire message displays if a part on the or after replacing a tire or sensor.
Pressure Light on page 526. system is not working properly. See Tire Inspection on page 1066,
This message will also indicate The tire pressure light also flashes Tire Rotation on page 1066, Tire
which tire needs to be checked. and then remains on during the Pressure Monitor Operation on
You can receive more than one tire same ignition cycle. See Tire page 1063, and Tire Pressure on
pressure message at a time. To Pressure Light on page 526. page 1060 for more information.
read the other messages that may Several conditions may cause this
have been sent at the same time, message to appear. See Tire
press the set/reset button. If a tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
pressure message appears on the page 1063 for more information.
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have If the warning comes on and stays
the tire pressures checked and set on, there may be a problem with the
to those shown on the Tire Loading TPMS. See your dealer.
Information label. See Tires on
page 1052, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 912, and Tire Pressure on
page 1060.
Transmission Messages Do not drive the vehicle with Vehicle Reminder

overheated transmission fluid
SERVICE TRANSMISSION or while the transmission
Messages
This message displays when there temperature warning is displayed. ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
is a problem with the transmission. This message displays along with a WITH CARE
See your dealer for service. chime if the transmission fluid in the This message displays when
vehicle gets hot. Driving with the the outside air temperature is
TRANSMISSION HOT transmission fluid temperature high
IDLE ENGINE cold enough to create icy road
can cause damage to the vehicle. conditions. Adjust your driving
Notice: If you drive the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to accordingly.
while the transmission fluid is allow the transmission to cool.
overheating and the transmission This message clears and the
temperature warning is displayed chime stops when the fluid
on the instrument panel cluster temperature reaches a safe level.
and/or DIC, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Vehicle To change customization Feature Settings Menu Items

preferences, use the following
Personalization The following are customization
procedure.
features that allow you to program
This vehicle may have Entering the Feature settings to the vehicle:
customization capabilities that allow Settings Menu
you to program certain features to DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
one preferred setting. Customization 1. Turn the ignition on and place This feature will only display if a
features can only be programmed to the vehicle in P (Park). language other than English has
one setting on the vehicle and To avoid excessive drain on the been set. This feature allows you to
cannot be programmed to a battery, it is recommended that change the language in which the
preferred setting for two different the headlamps are turned off. DIC messages appear to English.
drivers.
2. Press U to enter the feature Press U until the PRESS V TO
All of the customization options may DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen
settings menu.
not be available on your vehicle. appears on the DIC display. Press
Only the options available will be If the menu is not available,
the set/reset button once to display
displayed on the DIC. FEATURE SETTINGS
all DIC messages in English.
AVAILABLE IN PARK will
The default settings for the display. Before entering the
customization features were set menu, make sure the vehicle is
when the vehicle left the factory, but in P (Park).
may have been changed from their
default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select the This feature allows you to select This feature allows you to select
language in which the DIC when the doors will whether or not to turn off the
messages will appear. automatically lock. automatic door unlocking feature.
It also allows you to select which
Press U until the LANGUAGE Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCK doors and when the doors will
screen appears on the DIC display. appears on the DIC display. automatically unlock.
Press V once to access the settings Press V once to access the settings
Press U until AUTO DOOR
for this feature. Then press U to for this feature. Then press U to
UNLOCK appears on the
scroll through the following settings: scroll through the following settings:
DIC display. Press V once to
ENGLISH (default): All messages SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): access the settings for this feature.
will appear in English. The doors will automatically lock
Then press U to scroll through the
FRANCAIS: All messages will when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park). following settings:
appear in French.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors OFF: None of the doors will
ESPANOL: All messages will automatically unlock.
appear in Spanish. will automatically lock when the
vehicle speed is above 13 km/h DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
ARABIC: All messages will appear (8 mph) for three seconds. driver door will unlock when the key
in Arabic. is taken out of the ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver
made to this feature. The current setting will remain. door will unlock when the vehicle is
setting will remain. shifted into P (Park) .
To select a setting, press V while
To select a setting, press V while the desired setting is displayed on ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. will unlock when the key is taken
the DIC. A beep will sound once a out of the ignition.
language has been selected.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the Press U until REMOTE DOOR NO CHANGE: No change will be
doors will unlock when the vehicle is LOCK appears on the DIC display. made to this feature. The current
shifted into P (Park). setting will remain.
Press V once to access the settings
NO CHANGE: No change will be for this feature. Then press U to To select a setting, press V while
made to this feature. The current the desired setting is displayed on
scroll through the following settings:
setting will remain. the DIC.
OFF: There will be no feedback
To select a setting, press V while REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
when you press Q on the
the desired setting is displayed on
RKE transmitter. This feature allows you to select the
the DIC.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps type of feedback you will receive
REMOTE DOOR LOCK when unlocking the vehicle with the
will flash when you press Q on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This feature allows you to select the RKE transmitter.
type of feedback you will receive transmitter. You will not receive
when locking the vehicle with the HORN ONLY: The horn will sound feedback when unlocking the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on the second press of Q on the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
transmitter. You will not receive RKE transmitter. the doors are open. See Remote
feedback when locking the vehicle Keyless Entry (RKE) System
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The Operation on page 23 for more
with the RKE transmitter if the doors exterior lamps will flash when you
are open. See Remote Keyless information.
Entry (RKE) System Operation on press Q on the RKE transmitter, and
page 23 for more information. the horn will sound when Q is
pressed again within five seconds of
the previous command.
Press U until REMOTE DOOR feature will delay locking the doors To select a setting, press V while
UNLOCK appears on the DIC until five seconds after the last door the desired setting is displayed on
is closed. You will hear three chimes
display. Press V once to access the the DIC.
to signal that the delayed locking
settings for this feature. Then press feature is in use. The key must be EXIT LIGHTING
U to scroll through the following out of the ignition for this feature to
settings: This feature allows you to select
work. You can temporarily override the amount of time you want
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps delayed locking by pressing the the exterior lamps to remain on
will not flash when you press K on power door lock switch twice or when it is dark enough outside.
the RKE transmitter. Q on the RKE transmitter twice. This happens after the key is turned
See Delayed Locking on page 28 from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior for more information.
lamps will flash when you press K Press U until EXIT LIGHTING
on the RKE transmitter. Press U until DELAY DOOR appears on the DIC display. Press
LOCK appears on the DIC display. V once to access the settings for
Press V once to access the settings this feature. Then press U to scroll
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain. for this feature. Then press U to through the following settings:
scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lamps will not
OFF: There will be no delayed turn on.
locking of the vehicle's doors. 10 SECONDS (default):
the DIC.
ON (default): The doors will not The exterior lamps will stay on for
DELAY DOOR LOCK lock until five seconds after the last 10 seconds.
This feature allows you to select door is closed. 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
whether or not the locking of the NO CHANGE: No change will be stay on for one minute.
doors will be delayed. When locking made to this feature. The current
the doors with the power door lock 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
setting will remain. stay on for two minutes.
switch and a door is open, this
NO CHANGE: No change will be ON (default): If it is dark enough CHIME VOLUME

made to this feature. The current outside, the exterior lamps will turn This feature allows you to select the
setting will remain. on briefly when you unlock the volume level of the chime.
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press V while The lamps will remain on for Press U until CHIME VOLUME
20 seconds or until Q on the appears on the DIC display. Press
the DIC. V once to access the settings for
RKE transmitter is pressed, or the
APPROACH LIGHTING vehicle is no longer off. See Remote this feature. Then press U to scroll
This feature allows you to select Keyless Entry (RKE) System through the following settings:
whether or not to have the exterior Operation on page 23 for more
information. NORMAL: The chime volume will
lamps turn on briefly during low light be set to a normal level.
periods after unlocking the vehicle NO CHANGE: No change will be
using the Remote Keyless made to this feature. The current LOUD: The chime volume will be
Entry (RKE) transmitter. setting will remain. set to a loud level.
Press U until APPROACH To select a setting, press V while made to this feature. The current
LIGHTING appears on the the desired setting is displayed on setting will remain.
DIC display. Press V once to the DIC.
There is no default for chime
access the settings for this feature. volume. The volume will stay at the
Then press U to scroll through the last known setting.
following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not the desired setting is displayed on
turn on when you unlock the vehicle the DIC.
with the RKE transmitter.
FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS Exiting the Feature

This feature allows you to set all of This feature allows you to exit the Settings Menu
the customization features back to feature settings menu. The feature settings menu will
their factory default settings. be exited when any of the
Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS
Press U until FACTORY SETTINGS following occurs:
PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the
appears on the DIC display. . The vehicle is no longer
DIC display. Press V once to in ON/RUN.
Press V once to access the settings exit the menu.
for this feature. Then press U to . The 3 or T DIC buttons
scroll through the following settings: If you do not exit, pressing U will are pressed.
return you to the beginning of the
RESTORE ALL (default): feature settings menu.
. The end of the feature settings
The customization features will be menu is reached and exited.
set to their factory default settings. . A 40 second time period has
DO NOT RESTORE: elapsed with no selection made.
The customization features will
not be set to their factory default
settings.
the DIC.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting The exterior lamps control has

four positions:
Exterior Lamp Controls O (Off): Briefly turn the control to
Exterior Lighting this position to turn the automatic
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 headlamps and Daytime Running
Exterior Lamps Off Lamps (DRL) off or back on.
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 For vehicles first sold in Canada,
Headlamp High/Low-Beam the off position only works for
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 vehicles that are shifted into the
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 P (Park) position.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 AUTO (Automatic): Turns on the
Automatic Headlamp headlamps automatically at normal
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 brightness, together with the
The exterior lamps control is located following:
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
on the instrument panel to the left of
Turn and Lane-Change . Parking Lamps
the steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
. Instrument Panel Lights
It controls the following systems:
Interior Lighting
. Headlamps
. Taillamps
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 . Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
. Parking Lamps
parking lamps together with the
. License Plate Lamps following:
Lighting Features
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 . Instrument Panel Lights . Instrument Panel Lights
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
. Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
6-2 Lighting
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the To prevent the battery from being Exterior Lamps Off
headlamps together with the drained, turn the control to
Reminder
following lamps listed below. the O position.
If a door is open, a reminder chime
. Parking Lamps A warning chime sounds if the sounds when the headlamps or
. Instrument Panel Lights driver door is opened while the parking lamps are manually turned
ignition switch is off and the on and the key is out of the ignition.
. Taillamps headlamps are on. To turn off the chime, turn the
. License Plate Lamps To change the headlamps from headlamp switch to O or AUTO and
If the headlamps are turned on low beam to high beam, push the then back on, or close and reopen
while the vehicle is on, the turn signal/multifunction lever the door. In the auto mode, the
headlamps turn off automatically toward the instrument panel. headlamps turn off once the ignition
10 minutes after the ignition is is in LOCK/OFF or may remain on
turned off. If the headlamps are until the headlamp delay ends,
turned on while the vehicle is off, if enabled in the Driver Information
the headlamps will continue to Center (DIC). See Exit Lighting
stay on. under Vehicle Personalization on
page 542.
Lighting 6-3
Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass The DRL system comes on in

daylight when the following
Low-Beam Changer This feature is used to signal to the conditions are met:
2 3 (Headlamp High/LowBeam vehicle ahead that you want
to pass.
. The ignition is on.
Changer): Pull the turn signal lever
. The exterior lamps control is in
all the way toward you to change If the headlamps are off or in the
the headlamps from low to high lowbeam position, pull the turn the AUTO position.
beam. Then release it. signal lever toward you to . The shift lever is not in P (Park).
momentarily switch to highbeams. . The light sensor determines it
Release the lever to turn the is daytime.
high-beam headlamps off.
When the DRL are on, the taillamps,
sidemarker, instrument panel and
Daytime Running other lamps will not be on.
Lamps (DRL) The automatic headlamp system
This instrument panel cluster light Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can automatically switches from DRL to
comes on when the high beam make it easier for others to see the the headlamps depending on the
headlamps are on. front of the vehicle during the day. darkness of the surroundings.
Fully functional daytime running To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada. lamp control to O and then release
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the transmission must be in the
P (Park) position, before the DRL
can be turned off.
6-4 Lighting
Automatic Headlamp street lights does not affect the

system. The DRL and automatic
System headlamp system is only affected
When it is dark enough outside and when the light sensor sees a
the headlamp switch is in AUTO, change in lighting lasting longer
the automatic headlamp system than the delay.
turns on the headlamps, along with If the vehicle is started in a dark
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking garage, the automatic headlamp
lamps, roof marker lamps, and the system comes on immediately.
instrument panel lights. The radio The vehicle has a light sensor Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
lights will also be dim. located on the top of the instrument it takes approximately 30 seconds
To turn off the automatic headlamp panel. Do not cover the sensor or for the automatic headlamp system
system, turn the exterior lamps the system will come on whenever to change to DRL if it is light
switch to the off position and then the ignition is on. outside. During that delay, the
release. For vehicles first sold in The system may also turn on the instrument panel cluster may not be
Canada, the transmission must be headlamps when driving through a as bright as usual. Make sure the
in the P (Park) position, before the parking garage or tunnel. instrument panel brightness control
automatic headlamp system can is in the full bright position. See
be turned off. There is a delay in the transition Instrument Panel Illumination
between the daytime and nighttime Control on page 66.
operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving
under bridges or bright overhead
Lighting 6-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting
position when released.
Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 1045.
G : An arrow on the instrument Turn Signal On Chime
panel cluster flashes in the direction
of the turn or lane change. If the turn signal is left on for more
than 1.2 km (3/4 mi), a chime
To signal a turn, move the lever all
sounds at each flash of the turn
| (Hazard Warning Flashers): the way up or down.
signal and the message TURN
Press this button located on top of To signal a lane change, raise or SIGNAL ON also appears in the
the steering column, to make the lower the lever until the arrow Driver Information Center (DIC).
front and rear turn signal lamps starts to flash. The turn signal See Lamp Messages on page 537.
flash on and off. This warns others automatically flashes three times To turn off the chime and message,
that you are having trouble. Press and if the towhaul mode is active move the turn signal lever to the
again to turn the flashers off. it flashes six times. Holding the off position.
When the hazard warning flashers turn signal lever for more than
are on, the vehicle's turn signals will one second causes the turn signals
not work. to flash continually until the lever
is released.
6-6 Lighting
Interior Lighting Dome Lamps Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamps come on when any The DOME OFF E button is
Instrument Panel door is opened. They turn off after located above the instrument panel
Illumination Control all the doors are closed. brightness knob.
The knob for this feature is located The instrument panel brightness
to the left of the steering column. knob extends when D is pressed.
To manually turn on the dome
lamps, press D then turn the knob
clockwise to the farthest position.
In this position, the dome lamps
remain on whether a door is
opened or closed.
The dome lamp override sets the

dome lamps to remain off or
come on automatically when a
D (Instrument Panel Lights): door is opened.
Push the knob to extend and then
turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to brighten or dim the instrument
panel lights and the radio display.
This only works if the headlamps or
parking lamps are on.
Lighting 6-7
E DOME OFF: Press this button Lighting Features When the battery's state of charge
in and the dome lamps remain off is low, the voltage is raised slightly
when a door is opened. Press the to quickly bring the charge back up.
button again to return it to the
Entry/Exit Lighting When the state of charge is high,
extended position so that the dome The vehicle has an illuminated the voltage is lowered slightly to
lamps come on when a door is entry/exit feature. prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
opened. has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
The dome lamps come on if the display on the Driver Information
E button is in the out position, Center (DIC), you may see the
Reading Lamps when a door is opened or the key is voltage move up or down. This is
For vehicles with reading lamps, removed from the ignition. normal. If there is a problem, an
press the button located next to alert will be displayed.
each lamp to turn it on or off. Battery Load
The battery can be discharged at
The vehicle may also have reading Management idle if the electrical loads are very
lamps in other locations. The lamps The vehicle may have Electric high. This is true for all vehicles.
cannot be adjusted. Power Management (EPM) that This is because the generator
estimates the battery's temperature (alternator) may not be spinning fast
and state of charge. It then adjusts enough at idle to produce all the
the voltage for best performance power that is needed for very high
and extended life of the battery. electrical loads.
6-8 Lighting
A high electrical load occurs when Normally, these actions occur in Battery Power Protection
several of the following are on, such steps or levels, without being
as: headlamps, high beams, fog noticeable. In rare cases at the This feature shuts off the dome
lamps, rear window defogger, highest levels of corrective action, lamps if they are left on for more
climate control fan at high speed, this action may be noticeable to the than 10 minutes when the ignition is
heated seats, engine cooling fans, driver. If so, a Driver Information in LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent
trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) message might be the battery from running down.
accessory power outlets. displayed, such as SERVICE
EPM works to prevent excessive BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.
discharge of the battery. It does this If this messages displays, it is
by balancing the generator's output recommended that the driver reduce
and the vehicle's electrical needs. the electrical loads as much as
It can increase engine idle speed to possible. See Battery Voltage and
generate more power, whenever Charging Messages on page 533.
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Introduction
System Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Infotainment
Phone If the vehicle came without a radio,
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 the wiring provisions for a radio and
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 an antenna were installed at the
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 assembly plant, so that if you want,
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 a radio can be installed at the
dealer.
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Determine which radio the vehicle
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 has and read the following pages to
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 become familiar with its features.
Fixed Mast Antenna
(Multi-Band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 { WARNING
Fixed Mast
Antenna (Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death
to you or others. Do not give
extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to

many audio and non audio listings.
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: The chime signals related Theft-Deterrent Feature
road while driving, do the following to safety belts, parking brake, and
while the vehicle is parked: other functions of the vehicle TheftLock is designed to
operate through the radio/ discourage theft of the radio.
. Become familiar with the The feature works automatically by
operation and controls of the entertainment system. If that
equipment is replaced or learning a portion of the Vehicle
audio system. Identification Number (VIN). If the
additional equipment is added to
. Set up the tone, speaker the vehicle, the chimes may not radio is moved to a different vehicle,
adjustments, and preset radio work. Make sure that replacement it does not operate and either LOC
stations. or additional equipment is or LOCKED displays.
For more information, see Defensive compatible with the vehicle When the radio and vehicle are
Driving on page 92. before installing it. See turned off, there may be a blinking
Accessories and Modifications on red light to indicate TheftLock is
Notice: Contact your dealer page 103. armed.
before adding any equipment.
The vehicle has Retained With TheftLock activated, the radio
Adding audio or communication Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, does not operate if stolen.
equipment could interfere with the audio system can be played
the operation of the engine, radio, even after the ignition is turned off.
or other systems, and could See Retained Accessory Power
damage them. Follow federal (RAP) on page 921 for more
rules covering mobile radio and information.
telephone equipment.
Operation
AM-FM Radio
4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and

AM-FM Radio with CD): Press to
switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time.
While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time. Press to
display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS
station or MP3 song. A choice of
additional information such as:
Channel, Song, Artist, and
CAT (category) can display.
Continue pressing to highlight the
desired tab, or press the softkey
located under any one of the tabs
and the information about that
tab displays.
Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3) and Radio
with CD Similar
The vehicle has one of these radios Using the Radio

as its audio system.
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Setting the Tone

Volume (SCV): Radios with (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) Radio with CD) (All Except AM-FM Radio and
automatically adjust the radio Radio with CD)
volume to compensate for road and To adjust the bass or treble:
wind noise as the vehicles speed BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
1. Press the f knob until Bass or or Treble): To adjust the bass,
changes while driving, so that the
Treble displays. midrange, or treble:
volume level stays consistent.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
To activate SCV:
the following: 1. Press the f knob until the
1. Set the radio volume to the tone control tabs display.
desired level.
. Turn the f knob. 2. Highlight the desired tone
2. Press the MENU button to . Press either SEEK, control tab by doing one of
display the radio setup menu. the following:
or SEEK.
3. Press the softkey under the . Press the f knob.
AUTO VOLUM (automatic
. Press either \ FWD,
or s REV.
. Press the softkey under
volume) tab on the radio display. the desired tab.
4. Press the softkey under the EQ (Equalization): Press this
desired Speed Compensated button to choose bass and treble
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, equalization settings designed for
or High) to select the level of different types of music. Selecting
radio volume compensation. MANUAL, or changing bass or
The display times out after treble, returns the EQ to the manual
approximately 10 seconds. Each bass and treble settings.
higher setting allows for more Unique EQ settings can be saved
radio volume compensation at for each source.
faster vehicle speeds.
3. Adjust the setting by doing To quickly adjust all tone and Adjusting the Speakers
one of the following: speaker controls to the middle (Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio
. Turn the f knob clockwise position, press the f knob for and AM-FM Radio with CD)
or counterclockwise. more than two seconds until a To adjust the balance or fade:
beep sounds.
. Press the SEEK, EQ (Equalization): Press this 1. Press ` or press the f knob
or SEEK. button to choose bass and treble until the speaker control tab
equalization settings designed for displays.
. Press the \ FWD, different types of music. Selecting 2. To adjust the setting, do one of
or s REV. MANUAL, or changing bass or the following:
treble, returns the EQ to the manual
If a station's frequency is weak or if . Turn the f knob.
bass and treble settings.
there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
Unique EQ settings can be saved . Press either SEEK,
for each source. or SEEK.
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey positioned under If the radio has a Bose audio
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for system, the EQ settings are
. Press either \ FWD,
more than two seconds. A beep either MANUAL or TALK. or s REV.
sounds and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
Adjusting the Speakers 3. Adjust the setting by doing Radio Messages

(Balance/Fade) (All Except one of the following:
Calibration Error: The audio
AM-FM Radio and Radio . Turn the f knob clockwise system has been calibrated for
with CD) or counterclockwise. the vehicle from the factory.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): If Calibration Error displays, it
To adjust the balance or fade:
. Press the SEEK, means that the radio has not been
or SEEK. configured properly for the vehicle
1. Press the f knob until the and it must be returned to your
speaker control tabs display. . Press the \ FWD, dealer for service.
2. Highlight the desired speaker or s REV. Locked or Loc: One of these
control tab by doing one of To quickly adjust all speaker and messages will display when the
the following: tone controls to the middle position, TheftLock system has locked up
the radio. Take the vehicle to your
. Press the f knob. press the f knob for more than
dealer for service.
two seconds.
. Press the softkey under the If any error occurs repeatedly or if
desired tab. If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is an error cannot be corrected,
turned on, the radio disables FADE
contact your dealer.
and mutes the rear speakers.
Radio Finding a Station For AM-FM Radio and Radio with

CD (Base), scan presets within the
BAND: Press to switch between
current selected band by pressing
AM-FM Radio FM1, FM2, AM and XM. The
and holding either SEEK arrow for
selection displays.
Radio Data System (RDS) four seconds until a double beep
f (Tune): Turn clockwise or sounds. The radio goes to a stored
The Radio may have a Radio Data counterclockwise to increase or preset, plays for a few seconds if a
System (RDS). The RDS feature is decrease the station frequency. strong signal is present, then goes
available for use only on FM to the next stored preset. The
stations that broadcast RDS SEEK : Press the arrows to go
to the previous or to the next station station frequency flashes while the
information. This system relies upon radio is in the scan mode.
receiving specific information from and stay there.
these stations and only works when To scan stations, press and hold Setting Preset Stations
the information is available. While either arrow for two seconds until a If the radio does not have a
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS beep sounds. The radio goes to a FAV button, up to 18 stations
station, the station name or call station, plays for a few seconds, (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
letters displays. In rare cases, a then goes to the next station. can be programmed on the
radio station could broadcast For AM-FM Radio and Radio with six numbered softkeys, by
incorrect information that causes the CD (Base), the station frequency performing the following steps:
radio features to work improperly. flashes while the radio is in the scan
If this happens, contact the mode. Press either arrow again to 1. Turn the radio on.
radio station. stop scanning. 2. Press BAND to select FM1,
The radio seeks and scans stations FM2, or AM.
only with a strong signal that are in 3. Tune in the desired station.
the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the Press the FAV button to go through The number of favorites pages can
six numbered softkeys for up to six pages of favorites, each be setup using the MENU button.
three seconds until a beep having six favorite stations available To setup the number of favorites
sounds. When that softkey is per page. Each page of favorites pages:
pressed and released, the can contain any combination of 1. Press the MENU button to
station that was set, returns. AM and FM stations. display the radio setup menu.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for The balance/fade and tone settings 2. Press the softkey located below
each softkey. that were previously adjusted, are the FAV 1-6 tab.
stored with the favorite stations.
Storing a Radio Station as a 3. Select the desired number of
Favorite To store a station as a favorite: favorites pages by pressing the
Drivers are encouraged to set up 1. Tune to the desired radio station. softkey located below the
their radio station favorites while the 2. Press the FAV button to display displayed page numbers.
vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite the page where the station is to 4. Press the FAV button, or let the
stations using the presets, favorites be stored. menu time out, to return to the
button, and steering wheel controls, original main radio screen
3. Press and hold one of the
if the vehicle has this feature. showing the radio station
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
See Defensive Driving on page 92. frequency tabs and to begin the
When that softkey is pressed
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle and released, the station that process of programming your
has a FAV button, a maximum of was set, returns. favorites for the chosen amount
36 stations can be programmed as of numbered pages.
4. Repeat the steps for each
favorites using the six softkeys
softkey radio station you want
positioned below the radio station
stored as a favorite.
frequency tabs and by using
the radio favorites page button
(FAV button).
Satellite Radio To scan stations, press and hold Setting Preset Stations
either arrow for two seconds until a
Finding a Category (CAT) If the radio does not have a
beep sounds. The radio goes to a
FAV button, up to 18 stations
Station station, plays for a few seconds,
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
then goes to the next station.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is can be programmed on the
For AM-FM Radio and Radio with
used to find XM stations while the six numbered softkeys, by
CD (Base), the station frequency
radio is in the XM mode. performing the following steps:
flashes while the radio is in the scan
XM is a satellite radio service that mode. Press either arrow again to 1. Turn the radio on.
is based in the United States and stop scanning. 2. Press BAND to select FM1,
Canada only.
The radio seeks and scans stations FM2, or AM.
Finding a Station only with a strong signal that are in 3. Tune in the desired station.
the selected band.
BAND: Press to switch between 4. Press and hold one of the
FM1, FM2, AM, and XM. For AM-FM Radio and Radio with six numbered softkeys for
The selection displays. CD (Base), scan presets within the three seconds until a beep
current selected band by pressing
f (Tune): Turn clockwise or and holding either SEEK arrow for
sounds. When that softkey is
counterclockwise to increase or pressed and released, the
four seconds until a double beep station that was set, returns.
decrease the station frequency. sounds. The radio goes to a stored
SEEK : Press the arrows to go preset, plays for a few seconds if a 5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for
to the previous or to the next station strong signal is present, then goes each softkey.
and stay there. to the next stored preset. The
station frequency flashes while the
radio is in the scan mode.
Storing a Radio Station as a Press the FAV button to go through The number of favorites pages can
Favorite up to six pages of favorites, each be setup using the MENU button.
having six favorite stations available To setup the number of favorites
Drivers are encouraged to set up per page. Each page of favorites pages:
their radio station favorites while the can contain any combination of
vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite 1. Press the MENU button to
AM and FM stations. display the radio setup menu.
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, The balance/fade and tone settings 2. Press the softkey located below
if the vehicle has this feature. that were previously adjusted, are the FAV 1-6 tab.
See Defensive Driving on page 92. stored with the favorite stations.
3. Select the desired number of
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle To store a station as a favorite: favorites pages by pressing the
has a FAV button, a maximum of 1. Tune to the desired radio station. softkey located below the
36 stations can be programmed as displayed page numbers.
favorites using the six softkeys 2. Press the FAV button to display
positioned below the radio station the page where the station is to 4. Press the FAV button, or let the
frequency tabs and by using be stored. menu time out, to return to the
the radio favorites page button 3. Press and hold one of the original main radio screen
(FAV button). six softkeys until a beep sounds. showing the radio station
When that softkey is pressed frequency tabs and to begin the
and released, the station that process of programming your
was set, returns. favorites for the chosen amount
of numbered pages.
4. Repeat the steps for each
softkey radio station you want
stored as a favorite.
Radio Reception FM Stereo if the vehicle has these features.

Keep the antenna clear of
Frequency interference and static FM stereo gives the best sound,
obstructions for clear reception.
can occur during normal radio but FM signals reach only about
Make sure there is sufficient
reception if items such as cell phone 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Tall
clearance when entering garages or
chargers, vehicle convenience buildings or hills can interfere with
parking structures.
accessories, and external electronic FM signals, causing the sound to
devices are plugged into the fade in and out.
accessory power outlet. If there is
Fixed Mast
Cellular Phone Usage Antenna (Care)
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power Cellular phone usage may The fixed mast antenna can
outlet. cause interference with the radio. withstand most car washes without
This interference may occur when being damaged as long as it is
AM making or receiving phone calls, securely attached to the base.
The range for most AM stations is charging the phone's battery, If the mast becomes slightly bent,
greater than for FM, especially at or simply having the phone on. This straighten it out by hand. If the mast
night. The longer range can cause interference causes an increased is badly bent, replace it.
station frequencies to interfere with level of static while listening to the
each other. For better radio radio. If static is received while Make sure there is sufficient
reception, most AM radio stations listening to the radio, unplug the clearance when entering garages or
boost the power levels during the cellular phone and turn it off. parking structures.
day, and then reduce these levels Occasionally check to make sure
during the night. Static can also Fixed Mast Antenna the antenna is tightened to its base.
occur when things like storms and (Multi-Band) If tightening is required, tighten
power lines interfere with radio by hand.
reception. When this happens, try The multi-band antenna is located
reducing the treble on the radio. on the roof of the vehicle. The
antenna is used for OnStar and the
XM Satellite Radio Service System
Audio Players While using the CD player, use side of a CD while handling it; this
only CDs in good condition could damage the surface. Pick up
without any label, load one CD at CDs by grasping the outer edges or
CD Player a time, and keep the CD player the edge of the hole and the
Care of the CD Player and the loading slot free of outer edge.
foreign materials, liquids, If the surface of a CD is soiled,
Do not add any label to a CD. and debris.
It could get caught in the CD. If a clean it with a soft, lintfree cloth or
CD is recorded on a personal If an error displays, see CD Player dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
computer and a description label is Messages later in this section. neutral detergent solution mixed
needed, try labeling the top of the with water. Make sure the wiping
Care of CDs process starts from the center to
recorded CD with a marking pen.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality the edge.
The use of CD lens cleaners can be reduced due to CD-R or
is not advised, due to the risk of CD-RW quality, the method of Inserting a CD
contaminating the lens of the recording, the quality of the music (Single CD Player)
CD optics with lubricants internal that has been recorded, and the Insert a CD partway into the slot,
to the CD player mechanism. way the CD-R or CD-RW has been label side up. The player pulls it in
Notice: If a label is added to a handled. Handle them carefully. and the CD should begin playing.
CD, more than one CD is inserted Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their
into the slot at a time, or an original cases or other protective Ejecting a CD
attempt is made to play scratched cases and away from direct sunlight (Single CD Player)
or damaged CDs, the CD player and dust. The CD player scans the Z EJECT: Press and release to
could be damaged. bottom surface of the disc. If the eject the disc. Remove the CD
surface of a CD is damaged, such when Remove Disc displays. If the
as cracked, broken, or scratched, disc is not removed, after several
the CD does not play properly or seconds the disc is automatically
not at all. Do not touch the bottom pulled back into the player.
Playing a CD CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on

cycle between CD or Auxiliary when the CD that is currently playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
listening to the radio. The CD icon
with a CD in the player, it stays in
and a message showing the disc SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the player. When the ignition or the current track if more than
and/or track number will display
radio is turned on, the CD starts 10 seconds on the CD have played.
when a CD is in the player. Press
playing where it stopped, if it was
again and the system automatically Press to go to the previous track
the last selected audio source.
searches for an auxiliary input if less than 10 seconds on the
When a CD is inserted, the device; see Auxiliary Devices on CD have played.
CD symbol displays on the left side page 719 for more information.
Press and hold, or press multiple
of the radio display. As each new If a portable audio player is not
track starts to play, the track number times, to continue moving backward
connected, No Input Device Found
through the tracks on the CD.
displays. displays.
The CD player can play the 4 (Information): Press to display
SEEK: Press to go to the
smaller 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with next track.
additional text information related to
an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the current song. If information is Press and hold, or press multiple
the smaller CDs are loaded in the available, the song title information times, to continue moving forward
same manner. displays on the top line of the through the tracks on the CD.
display and artist information s REV (Fast Reverse):
displays on the bottom line. Press and hold to reverse playback
When information is not available, quickly within a track.
NO INFO displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track.
RDM (Random): Press to listen MP3Supported Files CDR or CDRWSupported File

to tracks in random, rather than and Folder Structure
The Radio with CD (MP3) and
sequential order. To use random, do The radio supports:
Radio with USB and CD (MP3)
one of the following:
have the capability of playing an . Up to 50 folders.
For the AM-FM Radio with CD: MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
. Up to 8 folders in depth.
1. Press the RDM button until the Format
random icon displays. . Up to 50 playlists.
Radios that have the capability of
2. Press the RDM button again playing MP3s can play .mp3 or
. Up to 255 files.
until the random icon disappears .wma files that were recorded onto . Playlists with an .m3u or
from the display. a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files .wpl extension.
For the Radio with CD (MP3) and can be recorded with the following . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or
Radio with USB and CD (MP3): fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
.cda file extension.
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
1. Press the softkey positioned 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, Root Directory
under the RDM tab until Random 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
Current Disc displays. The root directory is treated as a
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. folder. Files are stored in the root
2. Press the softkey again to turn directory when the disc or storage
Compressed Audio or
off random play. device does not contain folders.
Mixed Mode Discs
Files accessed from the root
The radio can play discs that
directory of a CD display as
contain both uncompressed
F1 ROOT.
CD audio and MP3 files. If both
formats are on the disc, the radio
reads all MP3 files first, then the
uncompressed CD audio files.
Empty Folder When the last track of the last These playlists are treated as
Folders that do not contain files are folder has played, play continues special folders containing
skipped, and the player advances to from the first track of the compressed audio song files.
the next folder that contains files. first folder. Playlists that have an .m3u or
File System and Naming .pls file extension and are stored
Order of Play on a USB device may be supported
Compressed audio files are The song name that displays is the by the radio with a USB port.
accessed in the following order: song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not Playlists can be changed by using
. Playlists (Px). present in the ID3 tag, then the the softkeys below the S c and
. Files stored in the root directory. radio displays the file name without c T tabs, the f knob, the
. Files stored in folders in the
the extension (such as .mp3) as SEEK button, or the SEEK
the track name. button. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
root directory.
Track names longer than that has been recorded without
Tracks are played in the following 32 characters or four pages are using file folders can be played.
order: shortened. The display does not If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more
. Play begins from the first track in show parts of words on the last than the maximum of 50 folders,
the first playlist and continues page of text and the extension of 15 playlists, and 512 folders and
sequentially through all tracks in the file name is not displayed. files, the player allows access and
each playlist. When the last navigates up to the maximum, but
Preprogrammed Playlists all items over the maximum are
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the CDs that have preprogrammed not accessible.
first track of the first playlist. playlists reated using WinAmp,
MusicMatch, or Real Jukebox
. Play begins from the first track in software can be accessed; however,
the first folder and continues there is no playlistediting capability
sequentially through all tracks in using the radio.
each folder.
Playing an MP3 \ FWD (Fast Forward): h (Music Navigator): Press the

4 (Information): Press to display Press and hold to advance playback softkey below the h tab to play
additional text information related to quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced the files in order by artist or album.
the current song. If information is volume and the elapsed time of the
The player scans the disc to sort the
available, the song title information file displays. Release \ FWD to
files by artist and album ID3 tag
displays on the top line of the resume playing. The elapsed time information. It can take several
display and artist information of the file displays. minutes to scan the disc depending
displays on the bottom line. S c (Previous Folder): on the number of files on the disc.
When information is not available, Press the softkey below the The radio may begin playing while it
NO INFO displays. S c tab to go to the first track in is scanning in the background.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3's on the previous folder. When the scan is finished, the disc
the CD currently playing. c T (Next Folder): Press the begins playing files in order by
SEEK: Press to go to the start of softkey below the c T tab to go to artist. The current artist playing is
the track, if more than 10 seconds the first track in the next folder. shown on the second line of the
have played. Press and hold or display. Once all songs by that artist
press multiple times to continue RDM (Random): Press to listen to are played, the player moves to the
moving backward through tracks. tracks in random, rather than next artist in alphabetical order and
sequential order. To use random, do begins playing files by that artist.
SEEK: Press to go to the one of the following:
next track. Press and hold or press To listen to files by another artist,
multiple times to continue moving For the Radio with CD (MP3) and press the softkey located below
forward through tracks. Radio with USB and CD (MP3): either arrow tab. The disc goes to
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold 1. Press the softkey positioned the next or previous artist in
to reverse playback quickly. Sound under the RDM tab until Random alphabetical order. Continue
is heard at a reduced volume and Current Disc displays. pressing either softkey below the
the elapsed time of the file displays. arrow tab until the desired artist
2. Press the softkey again to turn displays.
Release s REV to resume playing. off random play.
To change from playback by artist to CD Player Messages

. There was a problem while
playback by album: burning the CD.
CHECK DISC: If this message .
1. Press the softkey located below displays and/or the CD ejects, it The label is caught in the
the Sort By tab. could be for one of the following CD player.
2. Press one of the softkeys below reasons: If the CD is not playing correctly, for
the Album tab from the sort . It is very hot. When the any other reason, try a known
screen. temperature returns to normal, good CD.
3. Press the softkey below the the CD should play. If any error occurs repeatedly or
Back tab to return to the main . The road is very rough. When if an error cannot be corrected,
music navigator screen. the road becomes smoother, the contact your dealer. If the radio
CD should play. displays an error message, write it
The album name displays on the down and provide it to your dealer
second line between the arrows, . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, when reporting the problem.
and songs from the current album or upside down.
begin to play. Once all songs from . The air is very humid. If so, wait
that album have played, the player
about an hour and try again.
moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing MP3's from that
album.
To exit music navigator mode, press
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback.
Auxiliary Devices To use a portable audio player, BAND: Press to listen to the radio
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to when a portable audio device is
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack the radio's front auxiliary input jack. playing. The portable audio device
Radios with an auxiliary input jack When a device is connected, press continues playing.
located on the lower right side of the the radio CD/AUX button to begin CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
faceplate can connect to an external playing audio from the device over play a CD when a portable audio
audio device such as an iPod, the vehicle speakers. device is playing. Press again and
MP3 player, or CD player, for use as For optimal sound quality, increase the system begins playing audio
another source for audio listening. the portable audio device's volume from the connected portable audio
This input jack is not an audio to the loudest level. player. If a portable audio player is
output; do not plug headphones into not connected, No Input Device
It is always best to power the
the front auxiliary input jack. Found displays.
portable audio device through its
Drivers are encouraged to set up own battery while playing.
any auxiliary device while the O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise
vehicle is in P (Park). See
or counterclockwise to increase or
Defensive Driving on page 92 for
decrease the volume of the
more information on driver portable player. Additional volume
distraction.
adjustments might have to be made
from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
Using the USB Port USBSupported Devices USBSupported File and Folder
. USB flash drive Structure
Radios with a USB port can control
a USB storage device or an iPod . Portable USB hard drive The radio supports:
using the radio buttons and knobs. . Up to 700 folders
See Playing an MP3 in CD Player
. Fifth generation or later iPod
on page 713 for information about . iPod nano
. Up to 8 folders in depth
how to connect and control a . Up to 65,535 files.
USB storage device or an iPod.
. iPod touch
. iPod classic
. Folder and file names up to
USB Support 64 bytes
Not all iPods and USB drives are
compatible with the USB port.
. Files with an .mp3 or
.wma file extension
Make sure the iPod has the latest
firmware from Apple for proper
. AAC files stored on an iPod
operation. iPod firmware can . FAT16
be updated using the latest . FAT32
iTunes application.
See www.apple.com/itunes. Connecting a USB Storage
For help with identifying the iPod, go Device or iPod
to www.apple.com/support. The USB port can be used to
Radios that have a USB port can control an iPod or a USB storage
play .mp3 and .wma files that are device.
The USB connector is located on stored on a USB storage device as To connect a USB storage device,
the instrument panel and uses the well as AAC files that are stored on connect the device to the USB port
USB 2.0 standard. an iPod. located in the center console or on
the instrument panel.
To connect an iPod, connect one Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward):
end of the USB cable that came USB Storage Device or iPod Press and hold to advance playback
with the iPod to the iPods dock quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
connector and connect the other The radio can control a USB
storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to
end to the USB port located in the
radio buttons and knobs, and resume playing. The elapsed time
center console or on the instrument
display song information on the of the file displays.
panel. If the vehicle is on and the
USB connection works, OK to radios display. 4 (Information): Press to display
disconnect and a GM logo may f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the
appear on the iPod, and iPod selected track.
appears on the radio display.
SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than 10 seconds Using Softkeys to Control a
The iPod music appears on the
have played. Press and hold or USB Storage Device or iPod
radios display and begins playing.
press multiple times to continue
The iPod charges while it is moving backward through tracks. The five softkeys below the radio
connected to the vehicle if the display are used to control the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
SEEK: Press to go to the next functions listed below.
track. Press and hold or press
or ON/RUN position. When the To use the softkeys:
multiple times to continue moving
vehicle is turned off, the iPod
forward through tracks. 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
automatically powers off and will
not charge or draw power from the s REV (Reverse): Press and below the radio display to
vehicle's battery. hold to reverse playback quickly. display the functions listed
Sound is heard at a reduced below, or press the softkey
If you have an older iPod model below the function if it is
that is not supported, it can still volume. Release s REV to currently displayed.
be used by connecting it to the resume playing. The elapsed time
auxiliary input jack using a standard of the file displays. 2. Press the softkey below the
3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. See tab with the function on it to
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack use that function.
earlier for more information.
j (Pause): Press the softkey 3. Press f to select the desired h (Music Navigator): Press the
below j to pause the track. folder. If there is more then one softkey below h to view and
The tab appears raised when pause folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until select a file on an iPod, using
is being used. Press the softkey the desired folder is reached. the iPod's menu system.
below j again to resume playback. 4. Turn f to scroll through the files Files are sorted by:
. Playlists
Back: Press the softkey below the in the selected folder.
back tab to go back to the main 5. Press f to select the desired file
. Artists
display screen on an iPod, or the
to be played. . Albums
root directory on a USB storage
device. To skip through large lists, the . Genres
five softkeys can be used to
c (Folder View): Press the navigate in the following order:
. Songs
softkey below c to view the . Composers
contents of the current folder on
. First softkey, first item in the list.
To select files:
the USB drive. To browse and . Second softkey, 1% through
select files: the list each time the softkey is 1. Press the softkey below h.
pressed.
1. Press the softkey below c. 2. Turn f to scroll through the
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
2. Turn f to scroll through the list list of menus.
each time the softkey is pressed.
of folders. . Fourth softkey, 10% through the 3. Press f to select the
list each time the softkey is desired menu.
pressed.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4. Turn f to scroll through the Repeat Functionality > (Shuffle Off): Press the
folders or files in the To use Repeat: softkey below 2 to turn shuffle
selected menu. off. This is the default mode when
Press the softkey below " or ' a USB storage device or iPod is
5. Press f to select the desired file to select between Repeat All and first connected.
to be played. Repeat Track.
2 (Shuffle All Songs/
To skip through large lists, the " (Repeat All): Press the softkey Shuffle Songs): Press the softkey
five softkeys can be used to below " to repeat all tracks. The
navigate in the following order: below = or < to shuffle all
tab appears lowered when Repeat songs on the USB storage device
. First softkey, first item in the list. All is being used. This is the default or iPod.
. Second softkey, 1% through mode when a USB storage device
or iPod is first connected. < (Shuffle Album): Press the
the list each time the softkey is
pressed. ' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current album on
. Third softkey, 5% through the list softkey below ' to repeat one
an iPod.
each time the softkey is pressed. track. The tab appears raised when
Repeat Track is being used. = (Shuffle Folder): Press the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
softkey below > to shuffle all
list each time the softkey is Shuffle Functionality
songs in the current folder on a
pressed. To use Shuffle: USB storage device.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Press the softkey below >, 2,
<, or = to select between
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetoothcapable cell phone with a
all cell phones. See Pairing in HandsFree Profile to make and
Bluetooth this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: address book or contact list. system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
See Voice Pass-Thru in this Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls in and not all phones are guaranteed
a hands-free mode. section for more information.
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
. Sharing of the cell phones
. See Storing and Deleting Phone system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
address book or contact list with Numbers in this section for for more information on compatible
the vehicle. more information. phones.
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the
{ WARNING Voice Recognition
vehicle parked: The Bluetooth system uses voice
When using a cell phone, it can recognition to interpret voice
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or commands to dial phone numbers
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the and name tags.
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your For additional information, say
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or too Help while you are in a voice
If possible, program speed dial recognition menu.
often could cause a crash
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
. Review the controls and Focus your attention on driving. a minimum. The system may not
operation of the infotainment and recognize voice commands if there
navigation system. is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information

sounds after the system responds . Up to five cell phones can be
Use the buttons located on the
indicating when it is waiting for a paired to the Bluetooth system.
steering wheel to operate the
voice command. Wait until the tone
invehicle Bluetooth system. . The pairing process is disabled
and then speak.
See Steering Wheel Controls on when the vehicle is moving.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a page 52 for more information.
calm and natural voice. . Pairing only needs to be
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to completed once, unless the
Audio System answer incoming calls, confirm pairing information on the cell
system information, and start phone changes or the cell phone
When using the invehicle Bluetooth speech recognition.
system, sound comes through the is deleted from the system.
vehicle's front audio system c / x (Phone On Hook): . Only one paired cell phone can
speakers and overrides the audio Press to end a call, reject a call, be connected to the Bluetooth
system. Use the audio system or cancel an operation. system at a time.
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
Pairing . If multiple paired cell phones are
adjusted volume level remains in A Bluetooth cell phone must be within range of the system, the
memory for later calls. To prevent paired to the Bluetooth system and system connects to the first
missed calls, a minimum volume then connected to the vehicle before available paired cell phone in the
level is used if the volume is turned it can be used. See the cell phone order that they were first paired
down too low. manufacturer's user guide for to the system. To connect to a
Bluetooth functions before pairing different paired phone, see
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone Connecting to a Different
is not connected, calls will be made Phone later in this section.
using OnStar HandsFree Calling,
if equipped. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
Pairing a Phone 5. Locate the device named Listing All Paired and Connected
Your Vehicle in the list on Phones
1. Press and hold b / g for the cell phone. Follow the
two seconds. The system can list all cell phones
instructions on the cell phone to paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
2. Say Bluetooth. enter the PIN that was provided also connected to the vehicle, the
in Step 3. After the PIN is system responds with is connected
3. Say Pair. The system successfully entered, the system
responds with instructions and after that phone name.
prompts you to provide a name
a fourdigit Personal
Identification Number (PIN).
for the paired cell phone. This 1. Press and hold b / g for
name will be used to indicate two seconds.
The PIN is used in Step 5. which phones are paired and
4. Start the pairing process on the connected to the vehicle. 2. Say Bluetooth.
cell phone that you want to pair. See Listing All Paired and 3. Say List.
For help with this process, see Connected Phones later in this
the cell phone manufacturer's section for more information.
user guide. 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
Deleting a Paired Phone Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone
If the phone name you want to To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers
delete is unknown, see Listing All the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to
Paired and Connected Phones. next available cell phone in the 30 phone numbers as name tags in
order in which all the available the HandsFree Directory that is
1. Press and hold b / g for cell phones were paired. Depending shared between the Bluetooth and
two seconds. on which cell phone you want to OnStar systems, if equipped.
2. Say Bluetooth. connect to, you may have to use
this command several times. The following commands are used
3. Say Delete. The system asks to delete and store phone numbers.
which phone to delete. 1. Press and hold b / g for Store: This command will store a
4. Say the name of the phone you two seconds. phone number, or a group of
want to delete. 2. Say Bluetooth. numbers as a name tag.
3. Say Change phone. Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
. If another cell phone is
name tag by entering the digits
found, the response will be
one at a time.
<Phone name> is now
connected. Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
. If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags:
remains connected. This command deletes all stored
name tags in the HandsFree
Calling Directory and the OnStar
TurnbyTurn Destinations Directory,
if equipped.
Using the Store Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time, To delete all name tags:
that you want to store. After
1. Press and hold b / g for each digit is entered, the system 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard two seconds.
2. Say Store. followed by a tone. After the 2. Say Delete all name tags.
last digit has been entered, say
3. Say the phone number or group Store, and then follow the Listing Stored Numbers
of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
at once with no pauses, then The list command will list all stored
save a name tag for this number. numbers and name tags.
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for Using the Delete Command Using the List Command
this number.
1. Press and hold b / g for 1. Press and hold b / g for
Using the Digit Store Command two seconds. two seconds.
If an unwanted number is 2. Say Delete. 2. Say Directory.
recognized by the system, say
Clear at any time to clear the 3. Say the name tag you want 3. Say HandsFree Calling.
last number. to delete.
4. Say List.
To hear all of the numbers Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command Making a Call
recognized by the system, say
Verify at any time. This command deletes all stored Calls can be made using the
name tags in the HandsFree following commands.
1. Press and hold b / g for Calling Directory and the OnStar
two seconds. Dial or Call: The dial or call
TurnbyTurn Destinations Directory, command can be used
2. Say Digit Store. if equipped. interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
Digit Dial: This command allows a If an unwanted number is Using the Redial Command
phone number to be dialed by recognized by the system, say
entering the digits one at a time. Clear at any time to clear the 1. Press and hold b / g for
last number. two seconds.
Redial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the To hear all of the numbers 2. After the tone, say Redial.
cell phone. recognized by the system, say Once connected, the person called
Verify at any time. will be heard through the audio
Using the Dial or
speakers.
Call Command 1. Press and hold b / g for
1. Press and hold b / g for two seconds. Receiving a Call
two seconds. 2. Say Digit Dial. When an incoming call is received,
3. Say each digit, one at a time, the audio system mutes and a ring
2. Say Dial or Call.
that you want to dial. After each tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
pausing, or say the name tag.
. Press b / g to answer the call.
repeats back the digit it heard
Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the . Press c / x to ignore a call.
will be heard through the audio last digit has been entered,
speakers. say Dial.
Using the Digit Dial Command Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
The digit dial command allows a
speakers.
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to Transferring a Call

dial the number of the third party
Call waiting must be supported on Audio can be transferred between
to be called.
the cell phone and enabled by the the Bluetooth system and the
wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected, cell phone.
press b / g to link all callers The cell phone must be paired
. Press b / g to answer an
together. and connected with the Bluetooth
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is Ending a Call system before a call can be
placed on hold. transferred. The connection process
Press c / x to end a call. can take up to two minutes after the
. Press b / g again to return to ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
the original call. Muting a Call
Transferring Audio from the
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call, all sounds from inside Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call During a call with the audio in
. Press c / x to disconnect cannot hear them. the vehicle:
the current call and switch to 1. Press b / g.
the call on hold.
. To mute a call, press b / g, and
then say Mute call. 2. Say Transfer Call.
ThreeWay Calling
. To cancel mute, press b / g,
Threeway calling must be and then say Unmute call.
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press b / g.
2. Say Threeway call.
Transferring Audio to the 3. Say Voice. The system Clearing the System
Bluetooth System from a responds OK, accessing
Unless information is deleted out of
Cell Phone <phone name>.
the invehicle Bluetooth system, it
During a call with the audio on the The cell phone's normal prompt will be retained indefinitely. This
cell phone, press b / g. The audio messages will go through their cycle includes all saved name tags in the
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio according to the phone's operating phone book and phone pairing
does not transfer to the vehicle, use instructions. information. For information on how
the audio transfer feature on the to delete this information, see the
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency previous section Deleting a Paired
cell phone. See your cell phone
(DTMF) Tones Phone and the previous sections
manufacturer's user guide for
more information. The Bluetooth system can send on deleting name tags.
numbers and the numbers stored as
Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
Other Information
Voice passthru allows access to the use this feature when calling a The Bluetooth word mark and
voice recognition commands on the menudriven phone system. logos are owned by the Bluetooth
cell phone. See your cell phone Account numbers can also be SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
manufacturer's user guide to see if stored for use. by General Motors is under license.
the cell phone supports this feature. Other trademarks and trade names
Sending a Number or Name Tag are those of their respective owners.
To access contacts stored in the During a Call
cell phone:
1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press and hold b / g for responds Ready, followed by
two seconds. a tone.
2. Say Bluetooth. The system 2. Say Dial.
responds Bluetooth ready, 3. Say the number or name tag
followed by a tone. to send.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control 9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob

B. Temperature Control clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn the 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the 1 (Defrost): This mode clears
knob clockwise or counterclockwise floor outlets with some air directed the windshield of fog or frost more
to increase or decrease the to the windshield and side windows. quickly. Air is directed to the
temperature inside the vehicle. windshield, with some to the floor
- (Defog): This mode clears outlets and front side windows.
Air Delivery Mode Control: the windows of fog or moisture.
Turn the knob clockwise or Outside air is directed to the floor The air conditioning compressor
counterclockwise to change the and defroster outlets. Adjust the might turn on in this setting to
current airflow mode. temperature knob for warmer or dehumidify the air.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the cooler air. The air conditioning Do not drive the vehicle until all
instrument panel outlets. compressor might turn on in this the windows are clear.
setting to dehumidify the air.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets, with some air directed
toward the windshield.
On hot days, open the windows to

let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time
needed for the vehicle to cool down
and the system operates more
efficiently.
# (Air Conditioning): Cools and
dehumidifies the air inside of the
vehicle.
V (Maximum Air Conditioning):
Cools the air inside the vehicle
faster, by recirculating the inside air.
Vehicles With Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control

B. Temperature Control D. Rear Window Defogger
Rear Window Defogger < (Rear Window Defogger): Notice: Do not use a razor blade
Press to turn the rear window or sharp object to clear the inside
For vehicles with a rear window
defogger on or off. rear window. Do not adhere
defogger, a warming grid is used to
anything to the defogger grid
remove fog or frost from the rear The rear window defogger turns off lines in the rear glass. These
window. several minutes after the button is actions may damage the rear
It only works when the ignition is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger. Repairs would not be
in ON/RUN. defogger will run for several more covered by your warranty.
minutes before turning off. The
defogger can also be turned off by
turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Rear Heating System Q (High): This position supplies

the most amount of heat to the
For vehicles with a rear heating
rear-seating area.
system, it lets you adjust the
amount of air flowing into the rear of c (Medium): This position
the vehicle, from the front-seating supplies half the amount of heat to
area. This feature works with the the rearseating area.
main climate-control system in R (Low): This position supplies the
the vehicle. least amount of heat to the
rear-seating area.
9 (Off): Turns the rear heating
system off.
AUX: The thumbwheel for this

system is located in the instrument
panel switchbank below the
audio system.
9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up
or down to increase or decrease the
amount of heated air sent to the
rear-seating area.
Rear Climate Control System

For vehicles with a rear heating and air-conditioning system, it maintains the
temperature, fan speed and air delivery for the rear-seat passengers only.
It also works with the main climate-control system in the vehicle.
Front Climate Control Panel
A. Fan Control Use this control panel to maintain a

B. Air Delivery Mode Control separate temperature setting. Adjust
the direction of the airflow or adjust
C. Temperature Control the fan speed for the rear seat
passenger(s).
AUX (Auxiliary): Turn the fan knob

on the front climate control panel to
AUX to let rear seat passengers use
the control panel in the rear seating
area. This disables the front control
panel. To return control to the front
panel, move the fan knob out
of AUX.
9 : Turns the system off.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed in the
Rear Climate Control Panel rear-seating area.
A. Fan Control If the vehicle has a 343 cm (135 in) Temperature Control:
wheelbase, a rear control panel for Turn clockwise or
B. Air Delivery Mode Control counterclockwise to increase
this system is located in the second
C. Temperature Control row behind the driver in the rear of or decrease the temperature in
the vehicle. The temperature, air the rearseating area.
delivery mode, and the fan speed The air-conditioning system on the
can be adjusted for the rear seating main climate control panel must be
area by a rear seat passenger. turned on to direct cooled air to the
rear of the vehicle. If it is not on,
then the temperature in the rear of
the vehicle remains at cabin
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Be sure to keep the area under the Air Vents
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise front seats clear of any objects so
to change the direction of the airflow that the air inside of the vehicle can Use the outlets located near the
in the rear seating area. circulate effectively. center and on the sides of the
instrument panel to change the
To change the current mode, select For information on how to use
direction of airflow.
one of the following: the main climate control system,
H (Vent): Air is directed to the see Climate Control Systems on Operation Tips
upper outlets, with some directed to page 81. For information on
ventilation, see Air Vents on
. Clear away any ice, snow or
the floor outlets. leaves from the air inlets at
page 88.
2 (Floor): Air is directed to the the base of the windshield that
floor outlets. may block the flow of air into
the vehicle.
. Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors may adversely affect
the performance of the system.
. Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Operating Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Engine Exhaust Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Driving Information Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Gasoline Specifications
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Running the Vehicle While (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-40
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 California Fuel
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-40
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 (Six Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-42
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 (Four Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Filling a Portable Fuel
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Towing
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Drive Systems General Towing
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Brakes Driving Characteristics and
Starting and Operating Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16 Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Ride Control Systems Conversions and Add-Ons
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Add-On Electrical
Retained Accessory Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information WARNING (Continued)

Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that
Defensive driving means always anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
expect the unexpected. The first possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination,
step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
page 38. Police records show that almost
40 percent of all motor
Drunk Driving vehicle-related deaths involve
{ WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these
Assume that other road users { WARNING deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is In recent years, more than
drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with
what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by even the use of alcohol, with about
In addition: a small amount of alcohol. You 250,000 people injured.
. Allow enough following can have a serious or even For persons under 21, it is against
distance between you and fatal collision if you drive after the law in every U.S. state to drink
the driver in front of you. drinking. alcohol. There are good medical,
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with psychological, and developmental
(Continued) a driver who has been drinking. reasons for these laws.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are The obvious way to eliminate the
with a group, designate a driver leading highway safety problem is
who will not drink. for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping

alcohol in a person's system can distances vary greatly with the
make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on surface of the road, whether it is
especially injuries to the brain, page 524. pavement or gravel; the condition
spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
drinking driver or passenger is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force
being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied.
is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy
been drinking. Average reaction time is about
threefourths of a second. But that is braking. Some people drive
only an average. It might be less in spurts heavy acceleration
Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as followed by heavy braking rather
The following three systems help two or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This
to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not
driving brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard
accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. much faster with a lot of heavy
ask more of those control systems But even in threefourths of a braking. Keeping pace with the
than the tires and road can provide. second, a vehicle moving at traffic and allowing realistic following
Meaning, you can lose control of 100 km/h (60 mph) travels distances eliminates a lot of
the vehicle. 20 m (66 ft). That could be a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
distance in an emergency, so better braking and longer brake life.
Adding nondealer accessories
keeping enough space between the
can affect vehicle performance.
vehicle and others is important.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 103.
If the engine ever stops while Steering Steering in Emergencies

the vehicle is being driven, brake
Power Steering There are times when steering can
normally but do not pump the
be more effective than braking. For
brakes. If the brakes are pumped, If power steering assist is lost example, you come over a hill and
the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or the find a truck stopped in your lane,
down. If the engine stops, there will power steering system is not or a car suddenly pulls out from
still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be nowhere, or a child darts out from
it will be used when the brake is steered but it will take more effort. between parked cars and stops right
applied. Once the power assist is
in front of you. These problems can
used up, it can take longer to stop Steering Tips be avoided by braking if you can
and the brake pedal will be harder
It is important to take curves at a stop in time. But sometimes you
to push.
reasonable speed. cannot stop in time because there is
Adding nondealer accessories no room. That is the time for
Traction in a curve depends on the
can affect vehicle performance. evasive action steering around
condition of the tires and the road
See Accessories and Modifications the problem.
surface, the angle at which the
on page 103.
curve is banked, and vehicle speed. The vehicle can perform very well in
While in a curve, speed is the one emergencies like these. First apply
factor that can be controlled. the brakes. See Braking on
If there is a need to reduce speed, page 93. It is better to remove as
do it before entering the curve, while much speed as possible from a
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
collision. Then steer around the The fact that such emergency Ease off the accelerator and then,
problem, to the left or right situations are always possible is a if there is nothing in the way, steer
depending on the space available. good reason to practice defensive so that the vehicle straddles the
driving at all times and wear safety edge of the pavement. Turn the
belts properly. steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in),
about one-eighth turn, until the right
Off-Road Recovery front tire contacts the pavement
edge. Then turn the steering wheel
The vehicle's right wheels can drop to go straight down the roadway.
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems brakes,
steering, and acceleration do not
have enough friction where the tires
An emergency like this requires meet the road to do what the driver
close attention and a quick decision. has asked.
If holding the steering wheel at the In any emergency, do not give up.
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock Keep trying to steer and constantly
positions, it can be turned a full seek an escape route or area of
180 degrees very quickly without less danger.
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once If the level of the shoulder is only
you have avoided the object. slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when Driving on Wet Roads

water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
In a skid, a driver can lose control of Rain and wet roads can reduce
material is on the road. For safety,
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid vehicle traction and affect your
slow down and adjust your driving to
most skids by taking reasonable ability to stop and accelerate.
these conditions. It is important to
care suited to existing conditions, Always drive slower in these types
slow down on slippery surfaces
and by not overdriving those of driving conditions and avoid
because stopping distance is longer
conditions. But skids are always driving through large puddles and
and vehicle control more limited.
possible. deepstanding or flowing water.
While driving on a surface with
The three types of skids correspond
reduced traction, try to avoid
to the vehicle's three control
sudden steering, acceleration, { WARNING
systems. In the braking skid, the
or braking, including reducing Wet brakes can cause crashes.
wheels are not rolling. In the
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
steering or cornering skid, too much They might not work as well in a
gear. Any sudden changes could
speed or steering in a curve causes quick stop and could cause
cause the tires to slide. You might
tires to slip and lose cornering force. pulling to one side. You could
not realize the surface is slippery
And in the acceleration skid, too lose control of the vehicle.
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
much throttle causes the driving
recognize warning clues such as After driving through a large
wheels to spin.
enough water, ice, or packed snow puddle of water or a car/vehicle
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored wash, lightly apply the brake
your foot off the accelerator pedal surface and slow down when you pedal until the brakes work
and quickly steer the way you have any doubt. normally.
want the vehicle to go. If you start
Remember: Antilock brakes help Flowing or rushing water creates
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
avoid only the braking skid. strong forces. Driving through
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs. flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to
If this happens, you and other weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving.
vehicle occupants could drown. . Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
Do not ignore police warnings safe place to park the vehicle
and be very cautious about trying
. Pass with caution. and rest.
to drive through flowing water. . Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include:
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Hydroplaning . Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
. Keep interior temperature cool.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's . Have good tires with proper
. Keep your eyes moving scan
tires so they actually ride on the tread depth. See Tires on the road ahead and to the sides.
water. This can happen if the road is page 1052. . Check the rearview mirror and
wet enough and you are going fast . Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often.
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving If you do not shift down, the You could crash. Always have the
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for brakes could get so hot that they engine running and the vehicle in
driving in these conditions include: would not work well. You would gear when going downhill.
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in then have poor braking or even
good shape. none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
. Stay in your own lane.
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, assist the brakes on a steep Do not swing wide or cut across
tires, cooling system, and downhill slope. the center of the road. Drive at
transmission. speeds that let you stay in your
. own lane.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills. . Top of hills:
{ WARNING Be alert something could
be in your lane (stalled car,
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) accident).
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
. Pay attention to special road
to do all the work of slowing down signs (falling rocks area, winding
and they could get so hot that roads, long grades, passing or
they would not work well. You no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill.
(Continued)
Winter Driving Try not to break the fragile traction. Blizzard Conditions
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
Driving on Snow or Ice Being stuck in snow can be a
wheels will spin and polish the
serious situation. Stay with the
Drive carefully when there is snow surface under the tires even more.
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
or ice between the tires and the The Antilock Brake System (ABS) If possible, use the Roadside
road, creating less traction or grip. on page 933 improves vehicle Assistance Program (U.S. and
Wet ice can occur at about 0C stability during hard stops on a Canada) on page 138 or Roadside
(32F) when freezing rain begins to slippery roads, but apply the brakes Assistance Program (Mexico) on
fall, resulting in even less traction. sooner than when on dry pavement. page 1310. To get help and keep
Avoid driving on wet ice or in Allow greater following distance on everyone in the vehicle safe:
freezing rain until roads can be
any slippery road and watch for . Turn on the hazard warning
treated with salt or sand.
slippery spots. Icy patches can flashers.
Drive with caution, whatever the occur on otherwise clear roads in
condition. Accelerate gently so
. Tie a red cloth to an
shaded areas. The surface of a
traction is not lost. Accelerating too outside mirror.
curve or an overpass can remain icy
quickly causes the wheels to spin when the surrounding roads are
and makes the surface under the clear. Avoid sudden steering
tires slick, so there is even less maneuvers and braking while
traction. on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Snow can trap engine exhaust Snow can trap exhaust gases
under the vehicle. This may
. Check again from time to under the vehicle. This can cause
cause exhaust gases to get time to be sure snow does deadly CO (carbon monoxide)
inside. Engine exhaust contains not collect there. gas to get inside. CO could
carbon monoxide (CO) which . Open a window about overcome you and kill you.
cannot be seen or smelled. 5 cm (2 in) on the side of the You cannot see it or smell it, so
It can cause unconsciousness vehicle that is away from the you might not know it is in the
and even death. wind to bring in fresh air. vehicle. Clear away snow from
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: . Fully open the air outlets on around the base of the vehicle,
or under the instrument especially any that is blocking
. Clear away snow from around panel. the exhaust.
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking . Adjust the Climate Control
the exhaust pipe and/or the system to a setting that Run the engine for short periods
fuel operated heater exhaust circulates the air inside the only as needed to keep warm,
system, if equipped. If the vehicle and set the fan speed but be careful.
vehicle has a diesel engine to the highest setting. To save fuel, run the engine for only
and a fuel operated heater, See Climate Control System short periods as needed to warm
see Fuel Operated Heater in the Index. the vehicle and then shut the engine
(FOH) in the diesel engine For more information about off and close the window most of
supplement. carbon monoxide, see Engine the way to save heat. Repeat this
(Continued) Exhaust on page 924. until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
(Continued) cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to Rocking the Vehicle to Get

arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING it Out
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high Turn the steering wheel left and
faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you right to clear the area around the
keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The front wheels. Turn off any traction or
the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an stability system. Shift back and forth
with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other between R (Reverse) and a forward
as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little gear, spinning the wheels as little as
as possible and avoid going possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
If the Vehicle Is Stuck above 55 km/h (35 mph).
spinning before shifting gears.
Slowly and cautiously spin the Release the accelerator pedal while
wheels to free the vehicle when For information about using tire shifting, and press lightly on the
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. chains on the vehicle, see Tire accelerator pedal when the
Chains on page 1075. transmission is in gear. Slowly
If the vehicle has a traction system,
it can often help to free a stuck spinning the wheels in the forward
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's and reverse directions causes a
traction system in the Index. If stuck rocking motion that could free the
too severely for the traction system vehicle. If that does not get the
to free the vehicle, turn the traction vehicle out after a few tries, it might
system off and use the rocking need to be towed out. If the vehicle
method. does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 1093.
Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

(B-pillar). With the driver door
open, you will find the label
It is very important to know how attached below the door lock
much weight the vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a post (striker). The tire and
carry. This weight is called the loading information label shows
vehicle capacity weight and crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. the number of occupant seating
includes the weight of all positions (A), and the maximum
occupants, cargo, and all vehicle capacity weight (B) in
nonfactory-installed options. Tire and Loading Information kilograms and pounds.
Two labels on the vehicle Label
show how much weight it was The Tire and Loading
designed to carry, the Tire and Information label also shows the
Loading Information label and size of the original equipment
the Certification/Tire label. tires (C) and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (D).
{ WARNING For more information on tires
and inflation see Tires on
Do not load the vehicle any page 1052 and Tire Pressure
heavier than the Gross on page 1060.
Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading
(GVWR), or either the information on the vehicle
maximum front or rear Gross Certification/Tire label. It tells
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example
you the Gross Vehicle Weight
This can cause systems to A vehicle specific Tire and Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
break and change the way the Loading Information label is Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
(Continued) attached to the center pillar
the front and rear axle. See there will be five 150 lb
Certification/Tire Label later in passengers in your vehicle,
this section. the amount of available cargo
Steps for Determining Correct
and luggage load capacity is
Load Limit 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
1. Locate the statement
The combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
XXX lbs on your vehicle's That weight may not safely
placard. exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity Example 1
2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
weight of the driver and Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
passengers that will be 6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
riding in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to 68 kg (150 lbs) 2 =
3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this 136 kg (300 lbs)
weight of the driver and manual to determine how this C. Available Occupant and Cargo
passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle. See Trailer
the available amount of cargo Towing on page 948 for
and luggage load capacity. important information on
For example, if the XXX towing a trailer, towing safety
amount equals 1400 lbs and rules and trailering tips.
Refer to the vehicle tire and

loading information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle capacity weight.
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity
Example 2 = Weight for Example 3 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs) 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) 5 = 91 kg (200 lbs) 5 =
136 kg (750 lbs) 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs) 0 kg (0 lbs)
Certification/Tire Label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includes { WARNING
the weight of the vehicle, all Do not load the vehicle any
occupants, fuel, and cargo. heavier than the Gross
The Certification/Tire label also Vehicle Weight Rating
tells you the maximum weights (GVWR), or either the
for the front and rear axles, maximum front or rear Gross
called Gross Axle Weight Rating Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
(GAWR). To find out the actual This can cause systems to
loads on the front and rear break and change the way the
axles, you need to go to a weigh vehicle handles. This could
station and weigh the vehicle. cause loss of control and a
Your dealer can help you with crash. Overloading can also
A vehicle specific Certification/ this. Be sure to spread out the shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire label is found on the rear load equally on both sides of the
edge of the driver door. The centerline.
label shows the size of the
vehicle's original tires and the Never exceed the GVWR for the
inflation pressures needed to vehicle, or the GAWR for either
obtain the gross weight capacity the front or rear axle.
of the vehicle. This is called If there is a heavy load, it should
be spread out.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) Starting and

Operating
Things you put inside the . When you carry something
vehicle can strike and injure inside the vehicle, secure New Vehicle Break-In
people in a sudden stop or it whenever you can.
turn, or in a crash. Notice: The vehicle does not
. Do not leave a seat folded need an elaborate break-in. But it
. Put things in the cargo down unless you need to. will perform better in the long run
area of the vehicle. Try to if you follow these guidelines:
spread the weight evenly. . Keep the vehicle speed at
Add-On Equipment
. Never stack heavier 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for
things, like suitcases, When you carry removable the first 805 km (500 miles).
inside the vehicle so that items, you may need to put a . Do not drive at any one
some of them are above limit on how many people you constant speed, fast or
the tops of the seats. carry inside the vehicle. Be sure slow, for the first 805 km
to weigh the vehicle before you (500 miles). Do not make
. Do not leave an buy and install the new full-throttle starts. Avoid
unsecured child restraint equipment. downshifting to brake or
in the vehicle. slow the vehicle.
(Continued)

. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
Ignition Positions Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
so. During this time the Accessory Power (RAP) on
new brake linings are not yet page 921.
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean This position locks the ignition and
premature wear and transmission.
earlier replacement. Do not turn the engine off when the
Follow this breaking-in vehicle is moving. This will cause a
guideline every time you get loss of power assist in the brake
new brake linings. and steering systems and disable
. Do not tow a trailer during the airbags.
break-in. See Trailer Towing In an emergency, if the vehicle must
on page 948 for the trailer be shut off while driving:
towing capabilities of the
The ignition switch has four different 1. Brake using a firm and steady
vehicle and more
positions. pressure. Do not pump the
information.
brakes repeatedly. This may
Following breakin, engine speed To shift out of P (Park), the deplete power assist, requiring
and load can be gradually ignition must be in ON/RUN or increased brake pedal force.
increased. ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular
brake pedal applied. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ vehicle is moving. After shifting
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
stopped, turn the ignition switch to brakes and steer the vehicle to a
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift and turn it only with your hand. A warning tone will sound when the
to P (Park), and turn the ignition If the key cannot be turned by driver door is opened, the ignition is
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with hand, see your dealer. in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
an automatic transmission, the B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the and the key is in the ignition.
shift lever must be in P (Park) to position in which you can operate
turn the ignition switch to the things like the radio and the Starting the Engine
LOCK/OFF position. windshield wipers when the engine If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
4. Set the parking brake. See is off. see the Duramax diesel supplement
Parking Brake on page 934. C (ON/RUN): This position can for more information.
be used to operate the electrical To place the transmission in the
{ WARNING accessories and to display some proper gear:
instrument panel cluster warning
Turning off the vehicle while and indicator lights. The switch Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
moving may cause loss of power stays in this position when the N (Neutral). The engine will not start
assist in the brake and steering engine is running. in any other position. To restart the
systems and disable the airbags. engine when the vehicle is already
While driving, only shut the If you leave the key in the ACC/ moving, use N (Neutral) only.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
vehicle off in an emergency. Starting Procedure
with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to 1. With your foot off the accelerator
5. If the vehicle must be shut off start the vehicle if the battery is pedal, turn the ignition key to
while driving, turn the ignition to allowed to drain for an extended START. When the engine starts,
ACC/ACCESSORY. period of time. let go of the key. The idle speed
Notice: Using a tool to force the D (START): This is the position that will go down as your engine gets
key to turn in the ignition could starts the engine. When the engine warm. Do not race the engine
cause damage to the switch or starts, release the key. The ignition immediately after starting it.
break the key. Use the correct switch returns to ON/RUN for
key, make sure it is all the way in, driving.
Operate the engine and When the Low Fuel warning as you hold the key in START
transmission gently to allow the lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL for up to 15 seconds. Wait at
oil to warm up and lubricate all LOW message is displayed in least 15 seconds between each
moving parts. the Driver Information Center try, to allow the cranking motor
The vehicle has a (DIC), the ComputerControlled to cool down. When the engine
Computer-Controlled Cranking Cranking System is disabled starts, let go of the key and
System. This feature assists in to prevent possible vehicle accelerator. If the vehicle starts
starting the engine and protects component damage. When this briefly but then stops again, do
components. If the ignition key is happens, hold the ignition switch the same thing. This clears the
turned to the START position, in the START position to extra gasoline from the engine.
and then released when the continue engine cranking. Do not race the engine
engine begins cranking, the Notice: Cranking the engine for immediately after starting it.
engine will continue cranking long periods of time, by returning Operate the engine and
for a few seconds or until the the key to the START position transmission gently until the oil
vehicle starts. If the engine does immediately after cranking has warms up and lubricates all
not start and the key is held in ended, can overheat and damage moving parts.
START for many seconds, the cranking motor, and drain the Notice: The engine is designed to
cranking will be stopped after battery. Wait at least 15 seconds work with the electronics in the
15 seconds to prevent cranking between each try, to let the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
motor damage. To prevent gear cranking motor cool down. or accessories, you could change
damage, this system also 2. If the engine does not start after the way the engine operates.
prevents cranking if the engine 510 seconds, especially in very Before adding electrical
is already running. Engine cold weather (below 18C equipment, check with your
cranking can be stopped by or 0F), it could be flooded with dealer. If you do not, the engine
turning the ignition switch to too much gasoline. Try pushing might not perform properly. Any
the ACC/ACCESSORY or the accelerator pedal all the way resulting damage would not be
LOCK/OFF position. to the floor and holding it there covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fast Idle System When the fast idle is active the Engine Heater
Driver Information Center (DIC) will
If the vehicle has this feature it is display FAST IDLE ON. If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
available only with cruise control. see the Duramax diesel supplement
The manual fast idle switch is One of the following actions will for more information.
operated using the cruise control turn off the fast idle:
The engine coolant heater can
buttons located on the left hand side . Pressing the brake. provide easier starting and better
of the steering wheel. fuel economy during engine
. Selecting the Cruise Control
This system can be used to Cancel button. warmup in cold weather conditions
increase engine idle speed at or below 18C (0F). Vehicles
. Releasing the Parking Brake.
whenever the following conditions with an engine coolant heater
are met: . The transmission shifter is should be plugged in at least four
. The park brake is set. moved out of P (Park) or hours before starting. An internal
N (Neutral). thermostat in the plug-end of the
. The brake pedal is not pressed. cord may exist which will prevent
. Selecting the Cruise Control
. The vehicle must not be moving On/Off button when it was engine coolant heater operation at
and the accelerator must not previously on. temperatures above 18C (0F).
be pressed. . Pressing the Cruise Control Set
To control the fast idle: switch a second time.
. To enable the Fast Idle System, . Pressing the accelerator greater
press and release the Cruise than a quarter of the down.
Control On/Off button and . Turning the ignition switch to the
ensure that the switch LED is lit.
LOCK/OFF position.
. Press and release the Cruise
Control Set switch. Engine
speed will be held at
approximately 1200 RPM.
To Use the Engine Coolant

WARNING (Continued)
Retained Accessory
Heater Power (RAP)
1. Turn off the engine. Plug the cord into a properly These vehicle accessories can be
2. Open the hood and unwrap the grounded three-prong 110-volt used for up to 10 minutes after the
electrical cord. AC outlet. If the cord will not engine is turned off:
The cord for the engine coolant reach, use a heavy-duty . Audio System
heater is located on the driver three-prong extension cord rated
for at least 15 amps.
. Power Windows (if equipped)
side of the engine compartment
and is attached to the hose for These features will work when
the power steering reservoir. 4. Before starting the engine, be the ignition key is in ON/RUN or
sure to unplug and store the ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
110-volt AC outlet. cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts power to the radio and power
and prevent damage. windows will continue to work
{ WARNING 10 minutes or until the driver door
The length of time the heater should is opened.
Plugging the cord into an remain plugged in depends on
ungrounded outlet could cause an several factors. Ask a dealer in the
electrical shock. Also, the wrong area where you will be parking the
kind of extension cord could vehicle for the best advice on this.
overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
Shifting Into Park 3. Turn the ignition key to parking brake is firmly set before
LOCK/OFF. you leave it. After you move the shift
lever into P (Park), hold the regular
{ WARNING 4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle brake pedal down. Then, see if you
It can be dangerous to get out of with the ignition key in your can move the shift lever away from
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). P (Park) without first pulling it toward
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
you. If you can, it means that the
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
Leaving the Vehicle With the shift lever was not fully locked into
Engine Running P (Park).
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move Torque Lock
suddenly. You or others could be { WARNING If you are parking on a hill and you
injured. To be sure the vehicle will do not shift the vehicle into P (Park)
It can be dangerous to leave the
not move, even when you are on properly, the weight of the vehicle
vehicle with the engine running.
fairly level ground, use the steps may put too much force on the
The vehicle could move suddenly
that follow. If you are pulling a parking pawl in the transmission.
if the shift lever is not fully in
trailer, see Driving Characteristics You may find it difficult to pull the
P (Park) with the parking brake
and Towing Tips on page 945. shift lever out of P (Park). This is
firmly set. And, if you leave the
called torque lock. To prevent torque
vehicle with the engine running,
1. Hold the brake pedal down and lock, set the parking brake and then
it could overheat and even catch shift into P (Park) properly before
set the parking brake. See fire. You or others could be
Parking Brake on page 934. you leave the driver seat. To find out
injured. Do not leave the vehicle how, see Shifting Into Park
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) with the engine running. previously in this section.
by pulling the shift lever toward
you and moving it up as far as When you are ready to drive, move
If you have to leave the vehicle with the shift lever out of P (Park) before
it will go. the engine running, be sure the you release the parking brake.
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
If torque lock does occur, you may

. Prevent movement of the shift If you still are unable to shift out of
need to have another vehicle push lever out of P (Park), unless P (Park):
yours a little uphill to take some of the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the 1. Ease the pressure on the
the pressure from the parking pawl shift lever.
in the transmission, so you can pull regular brake pedal is applied.
the shift lever out of P (Park). The shift lock control system is 2. While holding down the brake
always functional except in the pedal, push the shift lever all
Shifting out of Park case of a dead battery or low the way into P (Park).
The vehicle has an automatic voltage (less than 9 V) battery. 3. Move the shift lever to the
transmission shift lock control If the vehicle has an uncharged desired position.
system. You have to fully apply the battery or a battery with low voltage, If you are still having a problem
brakes before you can shift from try charging or jump starting the shifting, have the vehicle serviced.
P (Park) when the ignition is in battery. See Jump Starting on
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. page 1088 for more information. Parking over Things
See Automatic Transmission
(Six Speed) on page 925 or
To shift out of P (Park) use That Burn
the following:
Automatic Transmission
(Four Speed) on page 928. 1. Apply the brake pedal. { WARNING
The shift lock control system is 2. Turn the ignition to ACC/ Things that can burn could touch
designed to do the following: ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
hot exhaust parts under the
. Prevent the ignition key from 3. Move the shift lever to the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
being removed unless the shift desired position. over papers, leaves, dry grass,
lever is in P (Park). or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or after market
to, here are some things to know.
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
{ WARNING
even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is
. Drive it only with the windows dangerous. Engine exhaust may
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
garages, tunnels, deep snow contains carbon monoxide (CO)
. Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled.
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area that
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a has no fresh air ventilation. For
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air more information, see Engine
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. Exhaust on page 924.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
{ WARNING Automatic especially when the vehicle has a

heavy load, you might notice an
It can be dangerous to get out of
Transmission increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See Torque Lock under
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
Automatic Transmission Shifting Into Park on page 922 for
more information.
in P (Park) with the parking brake (Six Speed)
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
Vehicles with a six speed automatic
transmission have a shift position
{ WARNING
engine is running unless you indicator within the instrument panel It is dangerous to get out of the
have to. If you have left the cluster. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
engine running, the vehicle can There are several different positions in P (Park) with the parking brake
move suddenly. You or others for the shift lever. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when Do not leave the vehicle when
you are on fairly level ground, the engine is running unless you
always set the parking brake and have to. If you have left the
move the shift lever to P (Park). engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
Follow the proper steps to be sure vehicle will not move, even when
the vehicle will not move. See See Range Selection Mode under you are on fairly level ground,
Shifting Into Park on page 922. Manual Mode on page 930. always set the parking brake and
If parking on a hill and pulling a P (Park): This position locks the move the shift lever to P (Park).
trailer, see Driving Characteristics rear wheels. It is the best position to See Shifting Into Park on
and Towing Tips on page 945. use when starting the engine page 922. If you are pulling a
because the vehicle cannot move trailer, see Driving Characteristics
easily. When parked on a hill, and Towing Tips on page 945.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
back up. WARNING (Continued) more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) Unless your foot is firmly on the
while the vehicle is moving By doing this, the vehicle shifts
brake pedal, the vehicle could
forward could damage the down to the next gear and has
move very rapidly. You could lose
transmission. The repairs would more power.
control and hit people or objects.
not be covered by the vehicle Do not shift into a drive gear D (Drive) can be used when towing
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only while the engine is running at a trailer, carrying a heavy load or
after the vehicle is stopped. driving on steep hills. You might
high speed.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to want to shift the transmission to a
get out of snow, ice, or sand without lower gear selection if the
damaging the transmission, see If Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or transmission shifts too often.
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 911. N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may Downshifting the transmission in
N (Neutral): In this position, the damage the transmission. The slippery road conditions could result
engine does not connect with the repairs would not be covered by in skidding. See Skidding under
wheels. To restart when you are the vehicle warranty. Be sure the Loss of Control on page 95.
already moving, use N (Neutral) engine is not running at high The vehicle has a shift stabilization
only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the speed when shifting the vehicle. feature that adjusts the transmission
vehicle is being towed. shifting to the current driving
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best conditions in order to reduce rapid
{ WARNING fuel economy. If you need more upshifts and downshifts. This shift
power for passing, and you are: stabilization feature is designed to
Shifting into a drive gear while the determine, before making an
. Going less than about 55 km/h
engine is running at high speed upshift, if the engine is able to
is dangerous. (35 mph), push the accelerator maintain vehicle speed by analyzing
pedal about halfway down. things such as vehicle speed,
(Continued)
throttle position, and vehicle load.
If the shift stabilization feature settings for a particular shift or going down a steep hill. See Range
determines that a current vehicle condition. Shift quality will improve Selection Mode under Manual
speed cannot be maintained, the with continued driving. Mode on page 930.
transmission does not upshift and When temperatures are very cold, 2 (Second): This position reduces
instead holds the current gear. the transmission's gear shifting vehicle speed even more than
In some cases, this could appear to could be delayed providing more 3 (Third) without using the brakes.
be a delayed shift, however the stable shifts until the engine warms You can use 2 (Second) on hills.
transmission is operating normally. up. Shifts could be more noticeable It can help control vehicle speed as
The transmission uses adaptive with a cold transmission. This you go down steep mountain roads,
shift controls. Adaptive shift controls difference in shifting is normal. but then you would also want to use
continually compares key shift M (Manual Mode): This position the brakes off and on. See Range
parameters to pre-programmed lets drivers select the range of Selection Mode under Manual
ideal shifts stored in the gears appropriate for current driving Mode on page 930.
transmissions computer. The conditions. If the vehicle has this If you manually select 2 (Second) in
transmission constantly makes feature, see Range Selection an automatic transmission, the
adjustments to improve vehicle Mode under Manual Mode on transmission will start in
performance according to how the page 930. second gear. You can use this
vehicle is being used, such as with feature for reducing the speed of the
a heavy load or when temperature 3 (Third): This position is also used
for normal driving. It reduces vehicle rear wheels when you are trying to
changes. During this adaptive shift start the vehicle from a stop on
control process, shifting might feel speed more than D (Drive) without
using the brakes. You might choose slippery road surfaces.
different as the transmission
determines the best settings. 3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when
driving on hilly, winding roads, when
The shift quality of a new vehicle towing a trailer, so there is less
may not be ideal because the shifting between gears and when
Adaptive Shift Control process may
not have determined the best
1 (First): This position reduces Automatic Transmission WARNING (Continued)

vehicle speed without using the
brakes. You can use it for major/
(Four Speed)
severe downgrades where the Do not leave the vehicle when
vehicle would otherwise accelerate the engine is running unless you
due to steepness of grade. When have to. If you have left the
you shift to 1 (First) it provides the engine running, the vehicle can
lowest gear appropriate to current move suddenly. You or others
road speed and continues to could be injured. To be sure the
downshift as the vehicle slows, vehicle will not move, even when
eventually downshifting to 1 (First) There are several different positions you are on fairly level ground,
gear. The transmission can be held for your shift lever. always set the parking brake and
in 1 (First) gear using Range move the shift lever to P (Park).
Selection Mode or the shift lever. P (Park): This position locks the See Shifting Into Park on
See Range Selection Mode under rear wheels. It is the best position to
page 922. If you are pulling a
Manual Mode on page 930. use when you start the engine
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
because the vehicle cannot move
Notice: Spinning the tires or easily. and Towing Tips on page 945.
holding the vehicle in one place
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage { WARNING Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
the transmission. The repair will It is dangerous to get out of the The vehicle has an automatic
not be covered by the vehicle vehicle if the shift lever is not fully transmission shift lock control
warranty. If you are stuck, do not system. You must first press the
in P (Park) with the parking brake
spin the tires. When stopping on brake pedal before you can shift
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
a hill, use the brakes to hold the from P (Park) with the ignition in
vehicle in place. (Continued)
ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), D (Drive): This position is for

ease pressure on the shift lever and { WARNING normal driving. It provides the best
push the shift lever all the way into fuel economy. If you need more
P (Park) as you maintain brake Shifting into a drive gear while the power for passing, and you are:
application. Then move the shift engine is running at high speed is
. Going less than about 55 km/h
lever into another gear. See Shifting dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the (35 mph), push the accelerator
out of Park on page 923. pedal about halfway down.
vehicle could move very rapidly.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to You could lose control and hit . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
back up. more, push the accelerator all
people or objects. Do not shift
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) into a drive gear while the engine the way down.
while the vehicle is moving is running at high speed. You will shift down to the next
forward could damage the gear and have more power.
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or Downshifting the transmission in
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only N (Neutral) with the engine slippery road conditions could result
after the vehicle is stopped. running at high speed may in skidding. See Skidding under
damage the transmission. The Loss of Control on page 95.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to repairs would not be covered by
get out of snow, ice or sand without the vehicle warranty. Be sure the 3 (Third): This position is also
damaging the transmission, see If engine is not running at high used for normal driving. However it
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 911. speed when shifting the vehicle. reduces vehicle speed more than
D (Drive) without using the brakes.
N (Neutral): In this position, You might choose 3 (Third) instead
the engine does not connect with of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,
the wheels. To restart the engine winding roads, when towing a trailer,
when the vehicle is already moving, so there is less shifting between
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use gears and when going down a
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is steep hill.
being towed.
You should use 3 (Third) (or a lower Notice: Spinning the tires To use this feature, do the following:
gear as needed) when towing a or holding the vehicle in one 1. Move the shift lever to
trailer to minimize heat build-up and place on a hill using only the M (Manual Mode).
extend the life of the transmission. accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. The repair will 2. Press the +/ buttons, located
2 (Second): This position reduces on the steering column shift
vehicle speed even more than not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. If you are stuck, do not lever, to select the desired range
3 (Third) without using the brakes. of gears for current driving
You can use 2 (Second) on hills. spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the conditions.
It can help control vehicle speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, vehicle in place. When M (Manual Mode) is selected
but then you would also want to use a number displays in the DIC next to
the brakes off and on. Manual Mode the M indicating the current gear.
You may use this feature for Range Selection Mode This number is the highest gear that
reducing torque to the rear wheels can be used. However, the vehicle
when you are trying to start the can automatically shift to lower
vehicle from a stop on slippery road gears as it adjusts to driving
surfaces. conditions. This means that all
gears below that number are
1 (First): This position reduces available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,
vehicle speed even more than 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
2 (Second) without using the brakes. automatically shifted by the vehicle,
You can use it on very steep hills, The vehicle may have a Range but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until
or in deep snow or mud. If the shift Selection Mode. The Range the +/ button located on the
lever is put in 1 (First) while the Selection Mode helps control the steering column lever is used to
vehicle is moving forward, the vehicle's transmission and vehicle change to the gear.
transmission will not shift into speed while driving down hill or
first gear until the vehicle is going towing a trailer by letting you select
slowly enough. a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is not available when Tow/Haul Mode Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off
Range Selection Mode is active. by pressing the button, located to
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 931. the right of the steering wheel on
While using Range Selection Mode, the instrument panel. When tow/
Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul haul is on, a light on the instrument
Mode can be used. panel cluster will come on.
Notice: Spinning the tires or See Tow/Haul Mode Light on

holding the vehicle in one place page 525 for more information.
on a hill using only the Also see Tow Haul Mode under
accelerator pedal may damage Towing Equipment on page 953 for
the transmission. The repair will more information.
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. If you are stuck, do not Grade Braking (Six Speed
spin the tires. When stopping on Automatic Transmission)
a hill, use the brakes to hold the Vehicles with an automatic The Grade Braking shift modes
vehicle in place. transmission have a Tow/Haul can be activated by pressing the
Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts TOW/HAUL button on the
Low Traction Mode the transmission shift pattern to instrument panel. While in Range
Low Traction Mode can assist in reduce shift cycling, providing Selection Mode, Grade Braking is
vehicle acceleration when road increased performance, vehicle deactivated allowing the driver to
conditions are slippery. While the control, and transmission cooling select a desired range of gears.
vehicle is at a stop, select the when towing or hauling heavy loads.
second gear range using Range
Selection Mode. This will limit
torque to the wheels after it detects
wheel slip, preventing the tires from
spinning.
Grade Braking is only active while Cruise Grade Braking Drive Systems
the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and (Six Speed Automatic
you are not in the Range Selection Transmission)
Mode. See Tow/Haul Mode listed All-Wheel Drive
previously and Manual Mode on Cruise Grade Braking operates only If the vehicle has this feature,
page 930 for more information on while Cruise Control is engaged in engine power is sent to all four
the Range Selection Mode. Grade Tow/Haul Mode. Cruise Grade wheels when extra traction is
Braking assists in maintaining Braking assists in maintaining needed. This is like four-wheel
desired vehicle speeds when driving desired vehicle speeds when driving drive, but there is no separate lever
on downhill grades by automatically on downhill grades in cruise control or switch to engage or disengage
shifting to lower gears when the by automatically shifting to lower the front axle. It is fully automatic,
driver desires to slow the vehicle by gears when the cruise set speed is and adjusts itself as needed for
applying the brake. This reduces exceeded. road conditions.
wear on the braking system and While in the Range Selection Mode,
increases control of the vehicle. Cruise Grade Braking is not
Also see Trailer Towing on available.
page 948 for more information. See Manual Mode on page 930.
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the let ABS work. You might hear the
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. ABS pump or motor operating and
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this
When the engine is started and the is normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
checks itself. A momentary motor or
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while ABS allows the driver to steer and
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might brake at the same time. In many
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this there will not be enough time to
warning light stays on. See Antilock apply the brakes if that vehicle
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 525.
Parking Brake To release the parking brake, Ride Control Systems

hold the regular brake pedal down.
Pull the handle, located just above
the parking brake pedal, with the StabiliTrak System
parking brake symbol, to release The vehicle may have a vehicle
the parking brake. stability enhancement system called
If the ignition is on when the parking StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
brake is released, the brake system computer controlled system that
warning light will go off. assists the driver with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
Notice: Driving with the parking driving conditions.
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature StabiliTrak activates when the
wear or damage to brake system computer senses a discrepancy
parts. Verify that the parking between the intended path and the
To set the parking brake, hold the brake is fully released and the direction the vehicle is actually
regular brake pedal, then push brake warning light is off before traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
down the parking brake pedal. driving. applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to assist the
If the ignition is on, the brake If you are towing a trailer and are driver with keeping the vehicle on
system warning light will come on. parking on a hill, see Driving the intended path.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 945. When the vehicle is started and
begins to move, the system
performs several diagnostic checks
to insure there are no problems.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal
and does not mean there is a
problem with the vehicle.
The system should initialize before To turn on the StabiliTrak system,

the vehicle reaches 32 km/h press the StabiliTrak button again.
(20 mph). In some cases, it may StabiliTrak will automatically turn
take approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of back on when the vehicle speed
driving before the system initializes. exceeds 32 km/h (20 mph). One
chime is heard and the StabiliTrak
The StabiliTrak light comes on the light will turn off.
instrument panel cluster when the When the StabiliTrak system has
system is turned off or requires been turned off, system noises may
service. still be heard as a result of the
When StabiliTrak activates, the brake-traction control coming on.
TCS/StabiliTrak light flashes on the It is recommended to leave the
Press the StabiliTrak button once instrument panel. This also occurs system on for normal driving
to turn off the Traction Control when TCS is activated. conditions, but it may be necessary
System (TCS). Press and hold the
For more information, see to turn the system off if the vehicle
StabiliTrak button located on the
StabiliTrak Indicator Light on is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
instrument panel for more than
page 525. and you want to rock the vehicle to
five seconds to turn off StabiliTrak
attempt to free it. See If the Vehicle
and TCS. For your safety, the system can only Is Stuck on page 911.
be disabled when the vehicle speed
is less than 32 km/h (20 mph).
Three chimes will be heard and
the StabiliTrak light comes on.
StabiliTrak System Operation The StabiliTrak system may also TCS may activate on dry or rough
turn off automatically if it determines roads or under conditions such as
The StabiliTrak system is normally
that a problem exists with the heavy acceleration while turning or
on, except when the system is
system. If the problem does not abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
initializing or has been disabled
clear itself after restarting the transmission. When this a reduction
with the StabiliTrak button. The
vehicle, see your dealer for service. in acceleration may be noticed, or a
StabiliTrak system will automatically
noise or vibration may be heard.
activate to assist the driver in Traction Control Operation This is normal.
maintaining vehicle directional
control in most driving conditions. TCS is part of the StabiliTrak Adding nondealer accessories can
When activated, the StabiliTrak system. TCS limits wheel spin by affect the vehicle's performance.
system may reduce engine power to reducing engine power to the See Accessories and Modifications
the wheels and apply braking to wheels and by applying brakes to on page 103 for more information.
individual wheels as necessary to each individual wheel as
necessary .
assist the driver with vehicle Locking Rear Axle
directional control. If cruise control If the brake-traction control system
activates constantly or if the brakes Vehicles with a locking rear axle can
is being used when StabiliTrak
have heated up due to high speed give more traction on snow, mud,
activates, the cruise control
ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a
automatically disengages. The braking, the brake-traction control
standard axle most of the time, but
cruise control can be re-engaged will be automatically disabled.
The system will come back on after when traction is low, this feature will
when road conditions allow.
allow the rear wheel with the most
See Cruise Control on page 937. the brakes have cooled. This can
traction to move the vehicle.
take up to two minutes or longer
depending on brake usage.
Cruise Control For vehicles with cruise control, a

speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or
more can be maintained without
{ WARNING keeping your foot on the
accelerator. Cruise control does
Cruise control can be dangerous not work at speeds below about
where you cannot drive safely at 40 km/h (25 mph).
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding When the brakes are applied, cruise
roads or in heavy traffic. control is turned off.
Cruise control can be dangerous If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the
system begins to limit wheel spin,
on slippery roads. On such roads,
cruise control will automatically
fast changes in tire traction can
disengage. See StabiliTrak System
cause excessive wheel slip, and on page 934. When road conditions
I (On/Off): Press to turn the
you could lose control. Do not use system on or off. The indicator light
allow the cruise control to be safely is on when cruise control is on and
cruise control on slippery roads. used again, it can be turned turns off when cruise control is off.
back on.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to make the vehicle
resume to a previously set speed,
or press and hold to accelerate.
SET (Set/Coast): Press to set the
speed and activate cruise control or
press and hold to decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using
If the cruise button is on when not in If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control
use, it could get bumped and go into desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is
cruise when not desired. Keep the are applied, the cruise control is already activated,
cruise control switch off when cruise disengaged without erasing the set . Press and hold the SET button
is not being used. speed from memory. on the steering wheel until the
The cruise control light on the Once the vehicle speed reaches desired lower speed is reached,
instrument panel cluster comes on about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, then release it.
after the cruise control has been set press the +RES button on the . To slow down in small amounts,
to the desired speed. steering wheel. The vehicle returns press the SET button on the
to the previous set speed and steering wheel briefly. Each time
1. Press the I button. stays there. this is done, the vehicle goes
2. Get up to the desired speed. Increasing Speed While Using about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
3. Press the SET button located Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While
on the steering wheel and If the cruise control system is Using Cruise Control
release it. already activated, Use the accelerator pedal to
4. Take your foot off the . Press and hold the +RES button increase the vehicle speed. When
accelerator. on the steering wheel until the you take your foot off the pedal, the
desired speed is reached, then vehicle will slow down to the
release it. previous set cruise speed.
. To increase vehicle speed in Using Cruise Control on Hills
small amounts, press the +RES
How well the cruise control will
button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h work on hills depends upon the
(1 mph) faster. vehicle speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you Fuel

might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the For diesel engine vehicles, see
vehicle speed. When going Fuel for Diesel Engines in the
downhill, you might have to brake or Duramax Diesel Supplement.
shift to a lower gear to keep the For Vehicles with gasoline engines,
vehicle speed down. When the please read this.
brakes are applied the cruise control
is disengaged. Gasoline
Ending Cruise Control Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
There are three ways to end cruise maintenance of this vehicle. To help
control: keep the engine clean and maintain Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
. To disengage cruise control, optimum vehicle performance, we and a yellow fuel cap can use either
step lightly on the brake pedal. recommend the use of gasoline unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
. Press the [ on the steering Gasoline. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
wheel. page 942. For all other vehicles,
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
. To turn off the cruise control, use only the unleaded gasoline
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
described under Recommended
press I on the steering wheel. enhanced detergency standards
Fuel on page 940.
developed by auto companies. A list
Erasing Speed Memory of marketers providing TOP TIER
The cruise control set speed is Detergent Gasoline can be found at
erased from memory if I is www.toptiergas.com.
pressed or if the vehicle is
turned off.
Recommended Fuel containing MMT. See Fuel Additives Fuels in Foreign

on page 940 for additional
Use regular unleaded gasoline with information.
Countries
a posted octane rating of 87 or Never use leaded gasoline or any
higher. If the octane rating is less California Fuel other fuel not recommended in the
than 87, an audible knocking noise, previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
commonly referred to as spark Requirements caused by use of improper fuel
knock, might be heard when driving. If the vehicle is certified to meet would not be covered by the
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated California Emissions Standards, it is vehicle warranty.
at 87 octane or higher as soon as designed to operate on fuels that
possible. If heavy knocking is heard To check the fuel availability, ask an
meet California specifications. See
when using gasoline rated at auto club, or contact a major oil
the underhood emission control
87 octane or higher, the engine company that does business in the
label. If this fuel is not available in
needs service. country where you will be driving.
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
Gasoline Specifications satisfactorily on fuels meeting Fuel Additives
(U.S. and Canada Only) federal specifications, but emission To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
control system performance might in the United States are now
At a minimum, gasoline should be affected. The malfunction required to contain additives that
meet ASTM specification indicator lamp could turn on and the help prevent engine and fuel system
D 4814 in the United States or vehicle might fail a smogcheck test. deposits from forming, allowing the
CAN/CGSB3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on emission control system to work
Some gasolines contain an page 521. If this occurs, return to properly. In most cases, nothing
octane-enhancing additive called your authorized dealer for diagnosis. should have to be added to the
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese If it is determined that the condition fuel. However, some gasolines
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend is caused by the type of fuel used, contain only the minimum amount
against the use of gasolines repairs might not be covered by the of additive required to meet
vehicle warranty. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency regulations. To help keep Gasolines containing oxygenates, Some gasolines that are
fuel injectors and intake valves such as ethers and ethanol, and not reformulated for low
clean and avoid problems due to reformulated gasolines might be emissions can contain an
dirty injectors or valves, look for available in your area. We octane-enhancing additive called
gasoline that is advertised as recommend that you use these methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. gasolines, if they comply with the tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
Look for the TOP TIER label on the specifications described earlier. where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets However, E85 (85% ethanol) and fuel contains MMT. We recommend
enhanced detergency standards other fuels containing more than against the use of such gasolines.
developed by the auto companies. 10% ethanol must not be used in Fuels containing MMT can reduce
A list of marketers providing vehicles that were not designed spark plug life and affect emission
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can for those fuels. control system performance. The
be found at www.toptiergas.com. Notice: This vehicle was not malfunction indicator lamp might
For customers who do not use designed for fuel that contains turn on. If this occurs, return to
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline methanol. Do not use fuel your dealer for service.
regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel containing methanol. It can
System Treatment PLUS, added to corrode metal parts in the fuel
the fuel tank at every engine oil system and also damage plastic
change, can help clean deposits and rubber parts. That damage
from fuel injectors and intake would not be covered under
valves. GM Fuel System Treatment the vehicle warranty.
PLUS is the only gasoline additive
recommended by General Motors.
It is available at your dealer.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) At a minimum, E85 should meet If you do switch fuels, it is
ASTM Specification D 5798. By recommended that you add as
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge definition, this means that fuel much fuel as possible do not
and a yellow fuel cap can use either labeled E85 will have an ethanol add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel content between 70% and 85%. refueling. You should drive the
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). Filling the fuel tank with fuel vehicle immediately after refueling
For all other vehicles, use only the mixtures that do not meet ASTM for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the
unleaded gasoline described under specifications can affect driveability vehicle to adapt to the change in
Recommended Fuel on page 940. and could cause the malfunction ethanol concentration.
We encourage the use of E85 in indicator lamp to come on. E85 has less energy per liter
vehicles that are designed to use it. To ensure quick starts in the (gallon) than gasoline, so you will
The ethanol in E85 is a renewable wintertime, the E85 fuel must be need to refill the fuel tank more
fuel, meaning it is made from formulated properly for your climate often when using E85 than when
renewable sources such as corn according to ASTM specification you are using gasoline. See Filling
and other crops. D 5798. If you have trouble starting the Tank on page 943.
Many service stations will not have on E85, it could be because the Notice: Some additives are not
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump E85 fuel is not properly formulated compatible with E85 fuel and can
available. The U.S. Department of for your climate. If this happens, harm the vehicle's fuel system.
Energy has an alternative fuels switching to gasoline or adding Do not add anything to E85.
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ gasoline to the fuel tank can Damage caused by additives
locator/stations/) that can help you improve starting. For good starting would not be covered by the
find E85 fuel. Those stations that do and heater efficiency below 0C vehicle warranty.
have E85 should have a label (32F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
indicating ethanol content. Do not should contain no more than
use the fuel if the ethanol content is 70% ethanol. It is best not to
greater than 85%. alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85.
Notice: This vehicle was not If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,
designed for fuel that contains WARNING (Continued) the fuel cap will be yellow and state
methanol. Do not use fuel that E85 or gasoline can be used.
containing methanol. It can Do not leave the fuel pump See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
corrode metal parts in the fuel unattended when refueling the page 942.
system and also damage plastic vehicle. This is against the law in To remove the fuel cap, turn it
and rubber parts. That damage some places. Do not re-enter the slowly counterclockwise.
would not be covered under the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep
vehicle warranty. children away from the fuel pump; While refueling, hang the tethered
never let children pump fuel. fuel cap from the hook on the
Filling the Tank fuel door.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a Fuel can spray out on you if you
fuel fire can cause bad injuries. open the fuel cap too quickly.
To help avoid injuries to you and If you spill fuel and then
others, read and follow all the something ignites it, you could be
instructions on the fuel pump badly burned. This spray can
island. Turn off the engine when happen if the tank is nearly full,
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel and is more likely in hot weather.
or when refueling the vehicle. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
Do not use cellular phones. for any hiss noise to stop. Then
Keep sparks, flames, and unscrew the cap all the way.
smoking materials away from fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located
(Continued) behind a hinged fuel door on the
driver side of the vehicle.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Notice: If you need a new fuel
top off or overfill the tank and wait a cap, be sure to get the right type. WARNING (Continued)
few seconds after you have finished Your dealer can get one for you.
pumping before removing the If you get the wrong type, it may To help avoid injury to you
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted not fit properly. This may cause and others:
surfaces as soon as possible. See the malfunction indicator lamp to . Dispense fuel only into
Exterior Care on page 1096. light and may damage the fuel approved containers.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp . Do not fill a container while it
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure is inside a vehicle, in a
the cap is fully installed. The on page 521.
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
diagnostic system can determine if or on any surface other than
the fuel cap has been left off or Filling a Portable Fuel
the ground.
improperly installed. This would Container .
allow fuel to evaporate into the Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 521.
{ WARNING opening before operating the
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be
{ WARNING while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is
complete.
electricity discharge from the
If a fire starts while you are container can ignite the fuel . Do not smoke while
refueling, do not remove the vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel and the vehicle damaged if . Do not use a cellular phone
by shutting off the pump or by this occurs. while pumping fuel.
notifying the station attendant.
(Continued)
Leave the area immediately.
vehicle such as a motor home, see

. Then, during the first 800 km
Towing Recreational Vehicle Towing on (500 mi) that a trailer is towed,
page 1093. do not drive over 80 km/h
General Towing (50 mph) and do not make
Information Driving Characteristics starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of
Only use towing equipment that and Towing Tips the vehicle wear in at the
has been designed for the vehicle. heavier loads.
Contact your dealer or trailering Pulling a Trailer
dealer for assistance with preparing Here are some important points:
. Vehicles with an automatic
the vehicle for towing a trailer. transmissions can tow in
. There are many different laws, D (Drive). Shift the transmission
See the following trailer towing including speed limit restrictions, to a lower gear if the
information in this section: having to do with trailering. transmission shifts too often
. For information on driving Make sure the rig will be legal, under heavy loads and/or
while towing a trailer, see not only where you live but hilly conditions.
Driving Characteristics and also where you will be driving.
A good source for this Three important considerations
Towing Tips. have to do with weight:
information can be state or
. For maximum vehicle and trailer provincial police. . The weight of the trailer.
weights, see Trailer Towing.
. Consider using a sway control. . The weight of the trailer tongue.
. For information on equipment See Hitches in Towing
to tow a trailer, see Towing
. The weight on the vehicle's tires.
Equipment on page 953.
Equipment. Also see Tow/Haul later in this
. Do not tow a trailer at all during section for information about the
For information on towing a disabled the first 800 km (500 mi) the new
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on Tow/Haul button and the Tow/Haul
vehicle is driven. The engine, indicator light.
page 1093. For information on axle or other parts could be
towing the vehicle behind another damaged.
Driving with a Trailer Before starting, check all trailer hitch

WARNING (Continued) parts and attachments, safety
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the
or under the instrument trailer has electric brakes, start the
When towing a trailer, exhaust panel.
gases may collect at the rear of vehicle and trailer moving and then
the vehicle and enter if the
. Adjust the Climate Control apply the trailer brake controller by
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most system to a setting that hand to be sure the brakes are
window is open. brings in only outside air and working. This checks the electrical
set the fan speed to the connection at the same time.
Engine exhaust contains carbon highest setting. See Climate During the trip, check occasionally
monoxide (CO) which cannot be Control System in the Index. to be sure that the load is secure,
seen or smelled. It can cause and that the lamps and any trailer
For more information about
unconsciousness and even death. brakes are still working.
carbon monoxide, see Engine
To maximize safety when towing Exhaust on page 924.
a trailer:
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
. Have the exhaust system Towing a trailer requires a certain
vehicle ahead as you would when
inspected for leaks and make amount of experience. Get to know
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
necessary repairs before the rig before setting out for the
This can help to avoid situations
starting a trip. open road. Get acquainted with the
that require heavy braking and
. Never drive with the liftgate, feel of handling and braking with the
sudden turns.
trunk/hatch, or rear-most added weight of the trailer. And
window open. always keep in mind that the vehicle
you are driving is now longer and
(Continued) not as responsive as the vehicle is
by itself.
Passing shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees the brakes might have to be used so
or other objects. Avoid jerky or much that they would get hot and no
More passing distance is needed
sudden maneuvers. Signal well longer work well.
when towing a trailer. Because the
in advance. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed Turn Signals When Towing a Shift the transmission to a lower
vehicle before returning to the lane. Trailer gear if the transmission shifts too
often under heavy loads and/or hilly
Backing Up The arrows on the instrument panel conditions.
Hold the bottom of the steering flash whenever signaling a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up, When towing at high altitude on
wheel with one hand. Then, to move steep uphill grades, consider the
the trailer to the left, move that hand the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning, following: Engine coolant will boil at
to the left. To move the trailer to the a lower temperature than at normal
right, move your hand to the right. changing lanes or stopping.
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
Always back up slowly and, When towing a trailer, the arrows on immediately after towing at high
if possible, have someone the instrument panel flash for turns altitude on steep uphill grades, the
guide you. even if the bulbs on the trailer are vehicle may show signs similar to
burned out. For this reason you may engine overheating. To avoid this,
Making Turns think other drivers are seeing the let the engine run while parked,
Notice: Making very sharp turns signal when they are not. It is preferably on level ground, with the
while trailering could cause the important to check occasionally automatic transmission in P (Park)
trailer to come in contact with the to be sure the trailer bulbs are for a few minutes before turning the
vehicle. The vehicle could be still working. engine off. If the overheat warning
damaged. Avoid making very comes on, see Engine Overheating
sharp turns while trailering.
Driving on Grades
on page 1024.
When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a
wider turns than normal. Do this lower gear before starting down a
so the trailer will not strike soft long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down,
Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
apply the parking brake and shift lubricant, belts, cooling system and
{ WARNING into P (Park). brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during
5. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trip.
the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all
dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
wrong, the rig could start to move. while you:
People can be injured, and both
1.1. Start the engine. Trailer Towing
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always 1.2. Shift into a gear. If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the Duramax diesel
park the rig on a flat surface. 1.3. Release the parking brake. supplement for more information.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
If parking the rig on a hill:
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is { WARNING
1. Press the brake pedal, but do clear of the chocks.
not shift the transmission into The driver can lose control when
P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels 4. Stop and have someone pick up pulling a trailer if the correct
into the curb if facing downhill or and store the chocks. equipment is not used or the
into traffic if facing uphill. Maintenance When Trailer vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
2. Have someone place chocks Towing
heavy, the brakes may not work
under the trailer wheels. The vehicle needs service more well or even at all. The driver
3. When the wheel chocks are in often when pulling a trailer. See this and passengers could be
place, release the brake pedal manual's Maintenance Schedule or seriously injured.
until the chocks absorb the load. Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in (Continued)
trailer operation are automatic
Trailering is different than just See Weight of the Trailer Tongue

WARNING (Continued) driving the vehicle by itself. later in this section for more
Trailering means changes in information.
The vehicle may also be handling, acceleration, braking, Maximum trailer weight is
damaged; the resulting repairs durability and fuel economy. calculated assuming only the driver
would not be covered by the Successful, safe trailering takes is in the tow vehicle and it has all
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer correct equipment, and it has to the required trailering equipment.
only if all the steps in this section be used properly. The weight of additional optional
have been followed. Ask your The following information has many equipment, passengers and cargo in
dealer for advice and information time-tested, important trailering tips the tow vehicle must be subtracted
about towing a trailer with the and safety rules. Many of these are from the maximum trailer weight.
vehicle. important for your safety and that of Use the following chart to determine
your passengers. So please read how much the vehicle can weigh,
Notice: Pulling a trailer this section carefully before pulling based upon the vehicle model
improperly can damage the a trailer. and options.
vehicle and result in costly Weight of the Trailer
repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be?
correctly, follow the advice in this It depends on how the rig is used.
section and see your dealer for For example, speed, altitude, road
important information about grades, outside temperature and
towing a trailer with the vehicle. how much the vehicle is used to
To identify the trailering capacity of pull a trailer are all important. It can
the vehicle, read the information in depend on any special equipment
Weight of the Trailer that appears on the vehicle, and the amount of
later in this section. tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G1500 Cargo Van 2WD
4.3L V6 3.42 1 950 kg (4,300 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
3.42
5.3L V8 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
3.73
H1500 Cargo Van AWD
5.3L V8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
G1500 Passenger Van 2WD
5.3L V8 3.73 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
H1500 Passenger Van AWD
5.3L V8 3.73 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
6.0L V8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
6.0L V8 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering See Vehicle Load Limits on Do not exceed the maximum
information or advice, or write us at page 912 for more information allowable tongue weight for the
our Customer Assistance Offices. about the vehicle's maximum load vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
See Customer Assistance Offices capacity. extension that will position the hitch
(U.S. and Canada) on page 135 or ball closest to the vehicle. This will
Customer Assistance Offices help reduce the effect of trailer
(Mexico) on page 136 for more tongue weight on the rear axle.
information. After loading the trailer, weigh the
Weight of the Trailer Tongue trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is proper. If they are not, adjustments
an important weight to measure might be made by moving some
because it affects the total gross items around in the trailer.
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the Trailering may be limited by the
curb weight of the vehicle, any vehicle's ability to carry tongue
cargo carried in it, and the people weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
who will be riding in the vehicle. the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
The trailer tongue weight (A) should (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
If there are a lot of options,
be 10 percent to 15 percent of the the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle
equipment, passengers or cargo in
total loaded trailer weight (B), up to Weight Rating). The effect of
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
a maximum of 181 kg (400 lbs) with additional weight may reduce the
weight the vehicle can carry, which
a weight carrying hitch. The trailer trailering capacity more than the
will also reduce the trailer weight the
tongue weight (A) should be total of the additional weight.
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
10 percent to 15 percent of the total
the tongue load must be added to
loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
the GVW because the vehicle will
maximum of 454 kg (1,000 lbs) with
be carrying that weight, too.
a weight distributing hitch.
It is important that the vehicle Towing Equipment When using a weight-distributing

does not exceed any of its hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so
ratings GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Hitches the distance (A) remains the same
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue It is important to have the correct both before and after coupling the
Weight. The only way to be sure it is hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trailer to the tow vehicle.
not exceeding any of these ratings trucks going by and rough roads are If a step-bumper hitch will be used,
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. a few reasons why the right hitch the bumper could be damaged in
Total Weight on the Vehicle's is needed. sharp turns. Make sure there
Tires is ample room when turning to avoid
WeightDistributing Hitches contact between the trailer and the
Be sure the vehicle tires are inflated and Weight Carrying Hitches bumper.
to the upper limit for cold tires.
These numbers can be found on the If the loaded trailer being pulled
Certification label at the rear edge of will weigh more than 2 270 kg
the driver door, or see Vehicle Load (5,000 lbs), be sure to use a
Limits on page 912. Make sure not properly mounted weight-distributing
to go over the GVW limit for the hitch and sway control of the proper
vehicle, or the GAWR, including the size. This equipment is very
weight of the trailer tongue. If using important for proper vehicle loading
a weight distributing hitch, make and good handling when driving.
sure not to go over the rear axle Always use a sway control if the
limit before applying the weight trailer will weigh more than these
distribution spring bars. limits. Ask a hitch dealer about
sway controls.
A. Body to Ground Distance
B. Front of Vehicle
Will any holes need to be made in Safety Chains Trailer Wiring Harness
the body of the vehicle when a
Always attach chains between the The optional heavy-duty trailer
trailer hitch is installed?
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the wiring package includes a wiring
If using the wiring provided with the safety chains under the tongue of harness, with a seven-pin connector
factory-installed trailering package, the trailer to help prevent the at the rear of the vehicle and a
no holes need to be made in the tongue from contacting the road if it four-wire harness assembly under
body of the vehicle. However, if an becomes separated from the hitch. the driver side of the instrument
aftermarket hitch is installed, holes Always leave just enough slack so panel. The four-wire harness
may need to be made in the body. the rig can turn. Never allow safety assembly comes without a
If holes are made in the body, then chains to drag on the ground. connector.
be sure to seal the holes later when Trailer Brakes If the vehicle does not have a trailer
the hitch is removed. If the holes are hitch, the seven-wire harness
not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide A loaded trailer that weighs more assembly with connector is taped
(CO) from the engine's exhaust can than 680 kg (1,500 lbs) needs to together and located in a frame
get into the vehicle as well as dirt have its own brake system that is pocket at the driver side rear left
and water. See Carbon Monoxide adequate for the weight of the corner of the frame.
under Engine Exhaust on trailer. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, the
page 924.
so they are installed, adjusted and seven-wire harness assembly with
maintained properly. connector is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform. In both cases,
the seven-wire harness has a
connector and includes a
30-amp feed wire.
The seven-wire harness connector The four-wire harness (without Tow/Haul Mode
contains the following trailer circuits: connector) contains the following
This button is on the instrument
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps circuits:
panel, to the right of the steering
(10A fuse)** . Black: Ground wheel.
. White: Ground . Red/White: Battery Feed Pressing this button turns on and off
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal the tow/haul mode.
. Dark Green: Right Rear Stop . Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp
and Turn Signal* Supply Voltage
. Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed * If the vehicle is a cutaway with
(30A Fuse) trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will
. Brown: Trailer Park Lamp be shared for both left/stop trailer
Supply Voltage (15A fuse)** turn and right/stop trailer turn
signals. However, the cutaway This indicator light on the instrument
. Yellow: Left Rear Stop and lighting connector will have a panel cluster comes on when the
Turn Signal * 10 amp fuse for each signal. tow/haul mode is on.
** If the vehicle is a cutaway with Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will when pulling a heavy trailer or a
be shared for trailer park lamps and large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul
cutaway rear lighting connector park Mode on page 931 for more
lamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will be information.
shared for trailer back-up lamps and
cutaway rear lighting connector
back-up lamps.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Conversions and

effective when the vehicle and when lightly loaded or with no trailer
trailer combined weight is at least at all will not cause damage. Add-Ons
75 percent of the vehicle Gross However, there is no benefit to the
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). selection of Tow/Haul when the Add-On Electrical
See Weight of the Trailer in Trailer vehicle is unloaded. Such a
Towing on page 948. Tow/Haul is selection when unloaded may
Equipment
most useful under the following result in unpleasant engine and Notice: Do not add anything
driving conditions: transmission driving characteristics electrical to the vehicle unless
. When pulling a heavy trailer or and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ you check with your dealer first.
a large or heavy load through Haul is recommended only when Some electrical equipment can
rolling terrain. pulling a heavy trailer or a large or damage the vehicle and the
heavy load. damage would not be covered by
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a the vehicle's warranty. Some
large or heavy load in stop and add-on electrical equipment can
go traffic. keep other components from
. When pulling a heavy trailer working as they should.
or a large or heavy load in busy Add-on equipment can drain the
parking lots where improved low vehicle's 12volt battery, even if the
speed control of the vehicle is vehicle is not operating.
desired.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 340 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 341.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Vehicle Care Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-26
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-42
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-42
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-43
General Information Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Electrical System
California Proposition All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
California Perchlorate Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Fuses and Circuit
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-33 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Accessories and Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-34 Engine Compartment Fuse
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Automatic Transmission Shift Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Lock Control Function Floor Console Fuse
Vehicle Checks Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Doing Your Own Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Ignition Transmission Lock Wheels and Tires
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Engine Compartment Park Brake and P (Park) Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-53
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Wiper Blade Tire Terminology and
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Automatic Transmission Fluid Bulb Replacement Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
(4-Speed Transmission) . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Tire Pressure Monitor
Automatic Transmission Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Fluid (6-Speed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Tire Pressure Monitor
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Front Turn Signal, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-18 Sidemarker, and Parking Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New Jump Starting General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 For service and parts needs, visit
Different Size Tires and Towing your dealer. You will receive
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-93 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Uniform Tire Quality Recreational Vehicle and supported service people.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Genuine GM parts have one of
Wheel Alignment and Tire Appearance Care these marks:
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-74
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-86
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-88
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to

complement and function with other
65 Warning Modifications systems on the vehicle. Your GM
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding nondealer accessories or dealer can accessorize the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals making modifications to the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories.
known to the State of California to can affect vehicle performance and When you go to your GM dealer and
cause cancer and birth defects or safety, including such things as ask for GM Accessories, you will
other reproductive harm. Engine airbags, braking, stability, ride and know that GM-trained and
exhaust, many parts and systems, handling, emissions systems, supported service technicians
many fluids, and some component aerodynamics, durability, and will perform the work using
wear by-products contain and/or electronic systems like antilock genuine GM Accessories.
emit these chemicals. brakes, traction control, and stability Also, see Adding Equipment to the
control. These accessories or Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
California Perchlorate modifications could even cause page 341.
malfunction or damage not covered
Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty.
Certain types of automotive
Damage to vehicle components
applications, such as airbag
resulting from modifications or the
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
installation or use of nonGM
and lithium batteries contained in
certified parts, including control
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
module or software modifications, is
may contain perchlorate materials.
not covered under the terms of the
Special handling may be necessary.
vehicle warranty and may affect
For additional information, see
remaining warranty coverage for
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
affected parts.
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Hood

work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more To open the hood:
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
Service Work than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 1315.
You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system.
vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own
try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Servicing the 1. Pull the handle with this
without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on symbol on it. It is located in
page 340. front of the driver side door
. Be sure you have sufficient frame near the floor.
knowledge, experience, Keep a record with all parts receipts
the proper replacement and list the mileage and the date
parts, and tools before of any service work performed.
attempting any vehicle See Maintenance Records on
maintenance task. page 1111.
. Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and
English fasteners can be
easily confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Vehicle Care 10-5
If the vehicle has an underhood

lamp, it will automatically come on
and stay on until the hood is closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
of the filler caps are on properly.
Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the hood and return the prop
to its retainer. Let the hood down
and close it firmly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle 3. Lift the hood, release the hood
and lift up the secondary hood prop from its retainer and put
release, which is located the hood prop into the slot in
underneath the middle of the hood.
the hood.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
4.3 L V6 Engine Shown (4.8 L V8 Engine, 5.3 L V8 Engine and 6.0 L V8 Engine Similar)
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Battery on page 1030. F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil

B. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Checking Engine Oil under
Engine Oil on page 107. For diesel engine vehicles, see
Cooling System on page 1019. Engine Oil in the Duramax Diesel
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Supplement.
Cooling System on page 1019. page 1018.
To ensure proper engine
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. performance and long life, careful
Dipstick. See Checking the See Power Steering Fluid on attention must be paid to engine oil.
Fluid Level under Automatic page 1026. Following these simple, but
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed I. Brake Master Cylinder important steps will help protect
Transmission) on page 1011 or Reservoir. See Brake Fluid on your investment:
Automatic Transmission Fluid page 1029. . Always use engine oil approved
(6-Speed Transmission) on J. Windshield Washer Fluid to the proper specification and of
page 1014. Reservoir. See Adding Washer the proper viscosity grade. See
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When Fluid under Washer Fluid on Selecting the Right Engine Oil
to Add Engine Oil under page 1027. in this section.
Engine Oil on page 107. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, . Check the engine oil level
see the Vehicle Checks section in regularly and maintain the
the Duramax diesel supplement. proper oil level. See Checking
Engine Oil and When to Add
Engine Oil in this section.
. Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 1010.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See What to Do with
Used Oil in this section.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
It is a good idea to check the engine
be damaged. You should drain
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
out the excess oil or limit driving
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
of the vehicle and seek a service
must be on level ground. The
professional to remove the
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
excess amount of oil.
loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 106 for the See Engine Compartment Overview
location of the engine oil dipstick. If the oil is below the cross-hatched on page 106 for the location of the
area at the tip of the dipstick, add engine oil fill cap.
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential: 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil Add enough oil to put the level
and then recheck the level. See somewhere in the proper operating
1. If the engine has been running Selecting the Right Engine Oil in range. Push the dipstick all the way
recently, turn off the engine and this section for an explanation of back in when through.
allow several minutes for the oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
to drain back into the oil pan. oil crankcase capacity, see Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Checking the oil level too soon Capacities and Specifications on
after engine shutoff will not Selecting the right engine oil
page 122. depends on both the proper oil
provide an accurate oil level
reading. Notice: Do not add too much oil. specification and viscosity grade:
Oil levels above or below the Specification
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it acceptable operating range
with a paper towel or cloth, then shown on the dipstick are harmful Use and ask for engine oils with
push it back in all the way. to the engine. If you find that you the dexos certification mark. Oils
Remove it again, keeping the have an oil level above the meeting the requirements of the
tip down, and check the level. operating range, i.e., the engine vehicle should have the dexos
has so much oil that the oil level certification mark on the container.
gets above the cross-hatched
Vehicle Care 10-9
This certification mark indicates that If you are unsure whether the
the oil has been approved to the oil is approved to the dexos
dexos specification. specification, ask your service
provider.
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos is unavailable: In the event
that dexosapproved engine oil is
not available at an oil change or for
maintaining proper oil level, you
may use substitute engine oil
This vehicle was filled at the factory displaying the API Starburst symbol
with dexosapproved engine oil. and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Use of oils that do not meet the
Notice: Use only engine oil dexos specification, however, may
that is approved to the dexos result in reduced performance
specification or an equivalent under certain circumstances.
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils Viscosity Grade
approved to the dexos SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
specification will show the grade for the vehicle. Do not use
dexos symbol on the container. other viscosity oils such as
Failure to use the recommended SAE 10W30, 10W40, or 20W-50.
engine oil or equivalent can result
in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Cold Temperature Operation: In an What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
area of extreme cold, where the
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
temperature falls below 29C
elements that can be unhealthy for
(20F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should This vehicle has a computer system
your skin and could even cause
be used. An oil of this viscosity that indicates when to change the
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
grade will provide easier cold engine oil and filter. This is based
your skin for very long. Clean your
starting for the engine at extremely on a combination of factors which
skin and nails with soap and water,
low temperatures. When selecting include engine revolutions, engine
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
an oil of the appropriate viscosity temperature, and miles driven.
properly dispose of clothing or rags
grade, be sure to always select an Based on driving conditions, the
containing used engine oil. See the
oil that meets the required mileage at which an oil change is
manufacturer's warnings about the
specification, dexos. See indicated can vary considerably.
use and disposal of oil products.
Specification earlier in this section For the oil life system to work
for more information. Used oil can be a threat to the
properly, the system must be reset
environment. If you change your every time the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never When the system has calculated
Do not add anything to the oil. The dispose of oil by putting it in the that oil life has been diminished,
recommended oils with the dexos trash or pouring it on the ground, it indicates that an oil change is
specification and displaying the into sewers, or into streams or necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
dexos certification mark are all that bodies of water. Recycle it by taking OIL SOON message comes on.
is needed for good performance and it to a place that collects used oil. See Engine Oil Messages on
engine protection. page 535. Change the oil as
soon as possible within the next
Engine oil system flushes are not 1 000 km (600 mi).
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-11
It is possible that, if driving under How to Reset the Engine Oil Automatic Transmission
the best conditions, the oil life Life System
system might indicate that an oil
Fluid (4-Speed
change is not necessary for up Reset the system whenever the Transmission)
to a year. The engine oil and filter engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
must be changed at least once a see the Duramax diesel supplement
year and, at this time, the system engine oil change. To reset the
system: for more information.
must be reset. Your dealer has
trained service people who will 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN When to Check and Change
perform this work and reset the with the engine off. Automatic Transmission Fluid
system. It is also important to check
2. Fully press and release the A good time to check the automatic
the oil regularly over the course of
accelerator pedal slowly three transmission fluid level is when the
an oil drain interval and keep it at
times within five seconds. engine oil is changed.
the proper level.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. Change the fluid and filter at the
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON intervals listed in Scheduled
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) message comes back on when the Maintenance on page 113 and be
since the last oil change. vehicle is started, the engine oil life sure to use the transmission fluid
Remember to reset the oil life system has not reset. Repeat the listed in Recommended Fluids and
system whenever the oil procedure. Lubricants on page 118.
is changed.
10-12 Vehicle Care
How to Check Automatic Wait at least 30 minutes before A cold fluid check can be made
Transmission Fluid checking the transmission fluid level after the vehicle has been sitting
if you have been driving: for eight hours or more with the
Because this operation can be a engine off, but this is used only as
little difficult, it may be decided to . When outside temperatures are
above 32C (90F). a reference. Let the engine run at
have this done at the dealer service idle for five minutes if outside
department. . At high speed for quite a while. temperatures are 10C (50F) or
If not taken to the dealer, be sure . In heavy traffic especially in more. If it is colder than 10C
to follow all the instructions here hot weather. (50F), the engine may have to idle
or a false reading on the dipstick longer. Should the fluid level be low
could result.
. While pulling a trailer. during this cold check, the fluid must
To get the right reading, the fluid be checked hot before adding fluid.
Notice: Too much or too
should be at normal operating Checking the fluid hot will give a
little fluid can damage the
temperature, which is 82C to 93C more accurate reading of the
transmission. Too much can
(180F to 200F). fluid level.
mean that some of the fluid could
come out and fall on hot engine Get the vehicle warmed up by
parts or exhaust system parts, driving about 24 km (15 mi) when
starting a fire. Too little fluid outside temperatures are above
could cause the transmission 10C (50F). If it is colder than 10C
to overheat. Be sure to get an (50F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)
accurate reading if checking the until the engine temperature gauge
transmission fluid. moves and then remains steady for
10 minutes.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the

Prepare the vehicle as follows: engine, follow these steps:
1. Park the vehicle on a level

place. Keep the engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied,
place the shift lever in P (Park). 3. Check both sides of the dipstick,
3. With your foot on the brake and read the lower level. The
pedal, move the shift lever fluid level must be in the COLD
through each gear range, The transmission dipstick is located area for a cold check or in the
pausing for about three seconds near the center of the engine HOT or cross-hatched area for a
in each range. Then, position the compartment and will be labeled hot check. Be sure to keep the
shift lever in P (Park). with the graphic shown. dipstick pointed down to get an
See Engine Compartment Overview accurate reading.
4. Let the engine run at idle for
three minutes or more. on page 106 for more information. 4. If the fluid level is in the
1. Flip the handle up and then pull acceptable range, push the
out the dipstick and wipe it with dipstick back in all the way; then
a clean rag or paper towel. flip the handle down to lock the
dipstick in place.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait
three seconds and then pull it
back out again.
10-14 Vehicle Care
How to Add Automatic Notice: Use of the incorrect Automatic Transmission

Transmission Fluid automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
Fluid (6-Speed
Refer to Recommended Fluids and damages may not be covered by Transmission)
Lubricants on page 118 to the vehicle warranty. Always use
determine what kind of transmission the automatic transmission fluid When to Check and Change
fluid to use. listed in Recommended Fluids Automatic Transmission Fluid
Using a funnel, add fluid down the and Lubricants on page 118. It is usually not necessary to
transmission dipstick tube only after . After adding fluid, recheck the check the transmission fluid level.
checking the transmission fluid fluid level as described under The only reason for fluid loss is a
while it is hot. A cold check is used How to Check Automatic transmission leak or overheating the
only as a reference. If the fluid level Transmission Fluid, earlier in transmission. If a small leak is
is low, add only enough of the this section. suspected, use the following
proper fluid to bring the level up to procedures to check the fluid level.
the HOT area for a hot check. . When the correct fluid level is However, if there is a large leak,
It does not take much fluid, obtained, push the dipstick back then it may be necessary to have
generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). in all the way; then flip the the vehicle towed to a dealer
Do not overfill. handle down to lock the service department and have it
dipstick in place. repaired before driving the
vehicle further.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 113, and be
sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 118.
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Check Automatic Wait at least 30 minutes with the Warm or Hot before adding fluid.
Transmission Fluid engine Off, before checking the If the outside temperature is colder
transmission fluid level if the vehicle than 15C (60F) or hotter than
Because this operation can be has been driven: 32C (90F), a cold check cannot
difficult, it is recommended to have be performed.
. In hot weather, when outside
this check done at the dealer
service department, which can temperatures are above A warm fluid level check can be
monitor the transmission 32C (90F). performed by driving the vehicle
temperature. The transmission fluid . The vehicle is heavily loaded. under lightly loaded conditions and
level increases with temperature. outside temperatures between 10C
To obtain a highly accurate fluid
. At high speed for quite a while in to 27C (50F to 80F). The vehicle
level check, the transmission hot weather. should be driven for at least 24 km
temperature must be measured. . In heavy traffic and hot weather. (15 mi) before performing a warm
check. Checking the fluid Warm or
If it is decided to check the fluid . While pulling a trailer. Hot will give a more accurate
level, be sure to follow all the reading of the fluid level than a
After driving under these conditions,
instructions here, or a false reading cold check.
a hot check can be performed. The
on the dipstick may occur.
fluid should be Hot, which is 71C to Because the vehicle is equipped
Notice: Too much or too 93C (160F to 200F). with a high-efficiency air-to-oil
little fluid can damage the cooler, the transmission fluid
A cold fluid level check can be
transmission. Too much can temperature may not reach the
performed after the vehicle has
mean that some of the fluid could required Hot fluid level checking
been sitting for eight hours or more
come out and fall on hot engine temperature under normal lightly
with the engine off, but this is used
parts or exhaust system parts, loaded driving vehicle conditions.
only as a reference. Let the engine
starting a fire. Too little fluid
run at idle for five minutes if outside
could cause the transmission
temperatures is between 15C to
to overheat. Be sure to get an
32C (60F to 90F). Should the
accurate reading if checking
fluid level be low during this cold
the transmission fluid.
check, the fluid must be checked
10-16 Vehicle Care
Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the

Prepare the vehicle as follows: engine:
1. Park the vehicle on a level

place. Keep the engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied,
place the shift lever in P (Park). A. COLD Range
3. With foot on the brake pedal, B. WARM Range
move the shift lever through
The transmission dipstick is located C. HOT Range
each gear range, pausing for
about three seconds in each near the center of the engine 3. Check both sides of the dipstick,
range. When M is reached, compartment and will be labeled and read the lower level.
move the selector from M1 with the graphic shown. The fluid level must be in the
through M3. Then, position the See Engine Compartment Overview COLD (A) range for a cold
shift lever in P (Park). on page 106 for more information check, transmission temperature
on location. 27C to 32C (80F to 90F),
4. Let the engine run at idle for
between the COLD (A) and
two minutes or more. 1. Flip the handle up and then pull HOT (C) range for a WARM (B)
out the dipstick and wipe it with check, 50C to 60C (122F to
a clean rag or paper towel. 140F) or in the HOT (C)
2. Push it back in all the way, wait cross-hatched range for a hot
three seconds and then pull it check, 71C to 93C (160F to
back out again. 200F). Be sure to keep the
dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
Vehicle Care 10-17
4. If the fluid level is in the Using a funnel, add fluid down the Notice: Use of the incorrect
acceptable range, push the transmission dipstick tube only after automatic transmission fluid may
dipstick back in all the way; then checking the transmission fluid damage the vehicle, and the
flip the handle down to lock the while it is warm or hot. A cold check damages may not be covered by
dipstick in place. is used only as a reference. If the the vehicle warranty. Always use
fluid level is low, add only enough of the automatic transmission fluid
How to Add Automatic the proper fluid to bring the level up listed in Recommended Fluids
Transmission Fluid to the middle of the WARM (A) or and Lubricants on page 118.
Refer to Recommended Fluids and HOT (B) range depending on the . After adding fluid, recheck the
Lubricants on page 118 to ambient temperature and prior fluid level as described under
determine what kind of transmission driving conditions. Refer to How to How to Check Automatic
fluid to use. Check Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid, earlier
Fluid, earlier in this section for in this section.
instructions on driving to achieve
warm or hot transmission fluid. . When the correct fluid level is
It does not take much fluid, obtained, push the dipstick back
generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). in all the way; then flip the
Do not overfill. handle down to lock the
dipstick in place.
A. WARM Range
B. HOT Range
10-18 Vehicle Care
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the engine air
Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter, do the following:
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the Duramax diesel supplement Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the 1. Unhook the retainer clips and
for more information. scheduled maintenance intervals remove the cover.
and replace it at the first oil change 2. Lift the filter out of the engine air
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi) cleaner/filter housing. Care
interval. See Scheduled should be taken to dislodge as
Maintenance on page 113 for more little dirt as possible.
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each 3. Clean the engine air cleaner/
engine oil change. filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air
How to Inspect the Engine Air cleaner/filter. Make sure that the
Cleaner/Filter filter fits properly into the
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, housing.
remove the filter from the vehicle 5. Reinstall the cover and fasten
and lightly shake the filter to release the retaining clips.
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is
remains covered with dirt, a new
located near the center of the
filter is required. Never use { WARNING
engine compartment. See Engine
compressed air to clean the filter. Operating the engine with the air
Compartment Overview on
page 106 for more information cleaner/filter off can cause you or
on location. others to be burned.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-19
WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

The air cleaner not only cleans Heater and radiator hoses, and
the air; it helps to stop flames if other engine parts, can be very
the engine backfires. Use caution hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
when working on the engine and you can be burned.
do not drive with the air cleaner/ Do not run the engine if there is
filter off. a leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is cause an engine fire, and you
off, dirt can easily get into the could be burned. Get any leak
engine, which could damage it. A. Radiator Pressure Cap fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Always have the air cleaner/filter B. Coolant Recovery Tank
in place when you are driving. Notice: Using coolant other than
C. Engine Cooling Fan
(Out of View) DEX-COOL can cause premature
Cooling System engine, heater core, or radiator
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, { WARNING corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
see Van Models under Cooling
System in the Duramax diesel An electric engine cooling fan can sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
supplement. start even when the engine is not or 24 months, whichever occurs
running. To avoid injury, always first. Any repairs would not be
The cooling system allows the covered by the vehicle warranty.
engine to maintain the correct keep hands, clothing, and tools
Always use DEX-COOL
working temperature. away from any engine
(silicate-free) coolant in
cooling fan.
the vehicle.
10-20 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL engine { WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
coolant. This coolant is designed to This mixture:
Adding only plain water or some
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. can be dangerous. Plain water to 37C (34F), outside
and other liquids, can boil before temperature.
The following explains the cooling the proper coolant mixture will.
system and how to check and add
. Gives boiling protection up to
The coolant warning system is set 129C (265F), engine
coolant when it is low. If there is a for the proper coolant mixture.
problem with engine overheating, temperature.
With plain water or the wrong
see Engine Overheating on mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and
page 1024. corrosion.
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
could catch fire and you or . Helps keep the proper engine
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Notice: If extra inhibitors Checking Coolant

and/or additives are used in the
The vehicle must be on a level
vehicle cooling system, the
surface when checking the
vehicle could be damaged. Use
coolant level.
only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this Check to see if coolant is visible in
manual for the cooling system. the coolant recovery tank. If the The coolant recovery tank cap has
See Recommended Fluids and coolant inside the coolant recovery this symbol on it.
Lubricants on page 118 for tank is boiling, do not do anything
more information. else until it cools down. If coolant is When the engine is cold, the coolant
visible but the coolant level is not at level should be at or above the
Never dispose of engine coolant by COLD FILL mark. If it is not, there
or above the COLD FILL mark, add
putting it in the trash, pouring it on could be a leak in the cooling
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
the ground, or into sewers, streams, system.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
coolant recovery tank, but be sure If the coolant is low, add the coolant
changed by an authorized service
the cooling system is cool before or take the vehicle to a dealer for
center, familiar with legal
this is done. service.
requirements regarding used
coolant disposal. This will
help protect the environment and
your health.
10-22 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the If coolant is needed, add the proper

Recovery Tank for Gasoline DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the { WARNING
Engines coolant recovery tank.
Steam and scalding liquids from a
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, How to Add Coolant to the hot cooling system can blow out
see How to Add Coolant to the Radiator and burn you badly. They are
Coolant Recovery Tank under under pressure, and if you turn
Van Models in the Cooling System the surge tank pressure
see How to Add Coolant to the
section of the Duramax diesel cap even a little they can
Radiator under Van Models in
supplement for the proper coolant come out at high speed. Never
the Cooling System section of the
fill procedure. turn the cap when the cooling
Duramax diesel supplement for
the proper radiator fill procedure. system, including the surge tank
{ WARNING pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
You can be burned if you spill { WARNING cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
coolant on hot engine parts. An electric engine cooling fan have to turn the pressure cap.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol under the hood can start up even
and it will burn if the engine parts when the engine is not running
are hot enough. Do not spill If coolant is needed, add the proper
and can cause injury. Keep mixture directly to the radiator, but
coolant on a hot engine. hands, clothing, and tools away be sure the cooling system is cool
from any underhood electric fan. before this is done.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
Vehicle Care 10-23
1. Remove the radiator pressure

cap when the cooling system,
including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise
until it first stops. Do not press 3. Fill the radiator with the proper 4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to
down while turning the DEX-COOL coolant mixture, up the COLD FILL mark.
pressure cap. to the base of the filler neck. 5. Reinstall the cap back on the
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to See Recommended Fluids and coolant recovery tank, but leave
stop. A hiss means there is still Lubricants on page 118 for the radiator pressure cap off.
some pressure left. more information about the
proper coolant mixture.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap,
but now push down as you turn
it. Remove the pressure cap.
10-24 Vehicle Care
8. Replace the pressure cap. At See Roadside Assistance Program

any time during this procedure if (U.S. and Canada) on page 138 or
coolant begins to flow out of the Roadside Assistance Program
filler neck, reinstall the (Mexico) on page 1310.
pressure cap. If the decision is made to lift the
Notice: If the pressure cap is not hood, make sure the vehicle is
tightly installed, coolant loss and parked on a level surface.
possible engine damage may Then check to see if the engine
occur. Be sure the cap is properly cooling fans are running. If the
and tightly secured. engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
Engine Overheating do not continue to run the engine
6. Start the engine and let it run and have the vehicle serviced.
until the upper radiator hose can
see the Duramax diesel supplement See if the engine cooling fan speed
be felt getting hot. Watch out for
for more information. increases when idle speed is
the engine cooling fan.
The vehicle has an indicator to warn doubled by pushing the accelerator
7. By this time, the coolant level pedal down. If it does not, the
of engine overheating.
inside the radiator filler neck vehicle needs service. Turn off
may be lower. If the level is There is an engine coolant the engine.
lower, add more of the proper temperature gauge on the vehicle's
DEX-COOL coolant mixture instrument panel. See Engine Notice: Engine damage from
through the filler neck until the Coolant Temperature Gauge on running the engine without
level reaches the base of the page 515 for more information. coolant is not covered by
filler neck. the warranty.
If the decision is made not to
lift the hood when this warning Notice: If the engine catches fire
appears, but instead get because of being driven with no
service help right away. coolant, the vehicle can be badly
Vehicle Care 10-25
damaged. The costly repairs If No Steam is Coming from 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
would not be covered by the the Engine Compartment idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
vehicle warranty. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
If an engine overheat warning is road, shift to P (Park) or
If Steam is Coming from the displayed but no steam can be seen N (Neutral) and let the
Engine Compartment or heard, the problem may not be engine idle.
too serious. Sometimes the engine
If the temperature overheat gauge is
{ WARNING can get a little too hot when the
vehicle: no longer in the overheat zone or an
Steam from an overheated engine .
overheat warning no longer
Climbs a long hill on a hot day. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
can burn you badly, even if you . Stops after high-speed driving. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
just open the hood. Stay away
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
from the engine if you see or hear . Idles for long periods in traffic.
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
steam coming from it. Just turn it . Tows a trailer. See Driving on front. If the warning does not come
off and get everyone away from Grades under Trailer Towing on back on, continue to drive normally.
the vehicle until it cools down. page 948.
Wait until there is no sign of If the warning continues, pull over,
If the overheat warning is displayed stop, and park the vehicle
steam or coolant before you
with no sign of steam: right away.
open the hood.
1. Turn the air off. If there is still no sign of steam,
If you keep driving when the
2. Turn the heater on to the highest push down the accelerator until the
engine is overheated, the liquids engine speed is about twice as fast
in it can catch fire. You or others temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as as normal idle speed for at least
could be badly burned. Stop the three minutes while you are parked.
engine if it overheats, and get out necessary.
If the warning is still on, turn off the
of the vehicle until the engine engine until it cools down.
is cool.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood, get service help right away.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Engine Fan Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering

Fluid
The vehicle has a clutched engine
cooling fan. When the clutch is To check the power steering fluid,
engaged, the fan spins faster to do the following:
provide more air to cool the engine. 1. Turn the key off and let the
In most everyday driving conditions, engine compartment cool down.
the fan is spinning slower and the
clutch is not fully engaged. This 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
improves fuel economy and reduces The power steering fluid reservoir is reservoir clean.
fan noise. Under heavy vehicle located in the engine compartment 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
loading, trailer towing, and/or high on the driver side of the vehicle. dipstick with a clean rag.
outside temperatures, the fan speed See Engine Compartment Overview
increases as the clutch more fully on page 106 for reservoir location. 4. Replace the cap and completely
engages, so an increase in fan tighten it.
noise may be heard. This is normal When to Check Power Steering 5. Then remove the cap again and
and should not be mistaken as the Fluid look at the fluid level on the
transmission slipping or making It is not necessary to regularly dipstick.
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling check power steering fluid unless The level should be at the COLD
system functioning properly. The fan there is a leak suspected in the FILL mark. If necessary, add only
will slow down when additional system or an unusual noise is enough fluid to bring the level up to
cooling is not required and the heard. A fluid loss in this system the mark.
clutch partially disengages. could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired. To prevent contamination of brake
This fan noise may be heard when
fluid, never check or fill the power
starting the engine. It will go away
steering reservoir with the brake
as the fan clutch partially
master cylinder cover off.
disengages.
Vehicle Care 10-27
What to Use Adding Washer Fluid

. Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
To determine what kind of fluid to Water can cause the solution
use, see Recommended Fluids and to freeze and damage the
Lubricants on page 118. Always washer fluid tank and other
use the proper fluid. Failure to use parts of the washer system.
the proper fluid can cause leaks and Also, water does not clean as
damage hoses and seals. well as washer fluid.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer
three-quarters full when it is
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
What to Use until the tank is full. See Engine very cold. This allows for
Compartment Overview on fluid expansion if freezing
When the vehicle needs windshield occurs, which could damage
washer fluid, be sure to read the page 106 for reservoir location.
the tank if it is
manufacturer's instructions before Notice completely full.
use. If operating the vehicle in an . When using concentrated . Do not use engine coolant
area where the temperature may
washer fluid, follow the (antifreeze) in the windshield
fall below freezing, use a fluid that
manufacturer's instructions washer. It can damage the
has sufficient protection against
for adding water. windshield washer system
freezing.
and paint.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Brakes Notice: Continuing to drive with Brake Adjustment

worn-out brake pads could result
This vehicle has disc brakes. Every time the brakes are applied,
in costly brake repair.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
indicators that make a high-pitched Some driving conditions or climates the brakes adjust for wear.
warning sound when the brake pads can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be applied. This does not mean The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is something is wrong with the brakes. complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying the Properly torqued wheel nuts are of top quality and work well together
brake pedal firmly. necessary to help prevent brake if the vehicle is to have really good
pulsation. When tires are rotated, braking. The vehicle was designed
{ WARNING inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound proper sequence to torque system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will specifications in Capacities and new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to Specifications on page 122. If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear not work properly.
Brake linings should always be For example, installing disc brake
warning sound is heard, have the replaced as complete axle sets. pads that are wrong for the vehicle,
vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel can change the balance between
the front and rear brakes for the
See your dealer if the brake pedal worse. The braking performance
does not return to normal height, expected can change in many other
or if there is a rapid increase in ways if the wrong replacement
pedal travel. This could be a sign brake parts are installed.
that brake service might be
required.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Brake Fluid Do not top off the brake fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. to determine when to check the
If fluid is added when the linings are brake fluid. See Scheduled
worn, there will be too much fluid Maintenance on page 113.
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, Checking Brake Fluid
as necessary, only when work is Check brake fluid by looking at the
done on the brake hydraulic system. brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See { WARNING page 106.
Engine Compartment Overview on If too much brake fluid is added,
page 106 for the location of the
it can spill on the engine and/or
reservoir.
fuel operated heater parts,
There are only two reasons why the if equipped. If the vehicle has a
brake fluid level in the reservoir diesel engine and a fuel operated
might go down: heater, see Fuel Operated
. The brake fluid level goes down Heater (FOH) in the diesel
because of normal brake lining engine supplement. The fluid will
wear. When new linings are burn if the engine is hot enough.
installed, the fluid level goes You or others could be burned,
back up. and the vehicle could be
. A fluid leak in the brake damaged. Add brake fluid only
hydraulic system can also cause when work is done on the brake The fluid level should be above
a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system. See Checking MIN. If it is not, have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a Brake Fluid in this section. hydraulic system checked to see if
leak means that sooner or later there is a leak.
the brakes will not work well.
10-30 Vehicle Care
After work is done on the brake Notice Battery

hydraulic system, make sure the . Using the wrong fluid can
level is above the MIN but not over Refer to the replacement number
badly damage brake shown on the original battery label
the MAX mark. hydraulic system parts. For when a new battery is needed.
What to Add example, just a few drops of See Engine Compartment Overview
mineral-based oil, such as on page 106 for battery location.
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake
from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can
Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic { DANGER
Lubricants on page 118. system parts so badly that Battery posts, terminals, and
Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced.
related accessories contain lead
reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in
and lead compounds, chemicals
the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid.
helps keep dirt from entering the known to the State of California to
. If brake fluid is spilled on the cause cancer and reproductive
reservoir. vehicle's painted surfaces, harm. Wash hands after handling.
the paint finish can be
{ WARNING damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
With the wrong kind of fluid in vehicle. If you do, wash it off
the brake hydraulic system, the immediately.
brakes might not work well.
This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive

{ WARNING Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
You can be badly hurt if you are to determine how often to check the
not careful. See Jump Starting on lubricant. See Scheduled
page 1088 for tips on working Maintenance on page 113.
around a battery without How to Check Lubricant
getting hurt.
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
Infrequent Usage: Remove the surface. If the level is below the bottom of
black, negative () cable from the the filler plug hole, some lubricant
battery to keep the battery from will need to be added. Add enough
running down. lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use
Extended Storage: Remove the care not to overtighten the plug.
black, negative () cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle What to Use
charger. Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 118 to
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Front Axle What to Use
When to Check and Change Refer to Recommended Fluids and

Lubricant Lubricants on page 118 to
determine what kind of lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to use.
to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to change it. Rear Axle
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 113. When to Check Lubricant
How to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine how often to check the
To get an accurate reading, the
lubricant. See Scheduled
vehicle should be on a level If the level is below the bottom of Maintenance on page 113.
surface. the fill plug hole, some lubricant
may need to be added.
When the differential is cold, add
enough lubricant to raise the level
to 10 mm (3/8 in) below the fill
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating
temperature (warm), add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the fill plug hole.
Vehicle Care 10-33
How to Check Lubricant What to Use These standards apply only to

vehicles sold in the United States.
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 118 to Federal law prohibits the following
determine what kind of lubricant acts or the causing thereof:
to use. 1. The removal or rendering
inoperative by any person,
Noise Control System other than for purposes of
The following information maintenance, repair or
relates to compliance with federal replacement, of any device or
noise emission standards for element of design incorporated
vehicles with a Gross Vehicle into any new vehicle for the
Weight Rating (GVWR) of more purpose of noise control, prior to
than 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs). The its sale or delivery to the ultimate
Maintenance Schedule provides purchaser or while it is in use; or
To get an accurate reading, the information on maintaining the
vehicle should be on a level 2. The use of the vehicle after such
noise control system to minimize device or element of design has
surface. degradation of the noise emission been removed or rendered
If you have the 1500 Series, the control system during the life of inoperative by any person.
proper level is from 15 mm (5/8 in) to the vehicle. The noise control
40 mm (1 5/8 in) below the bottom of system warranty is given in the
the fill plug hole. The proper level vehicle warranty booklet.
for the 2500 and 3500 Series is
from 0 to 6 mm (1/4 in) below
the bottom of the fill plug hole.
Add only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Among those acts presumed to Exhaust: 2. Firmly apply both the parking
constitute tampering are the acts . Removal of the muffler and/or brake and the regular brake.
listed below. resonator. See Parking Brake on
page 934.
Insulation: . Removal of the exhaust pipes
and exhaust pipe clamps. Do not use the accelerator
. Removal of the noise shields or pedal, and be ready to turn off
any underhood insulation. Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) the engine immediately if it
Engine: Diesel Engine: starts.
. Removal or rendering engine . Removal of the muffler. 3. Try to start the engine in each
speed governor, if the vehicle gear. The vehicle should start
has one, inoperative so as to Starter Switch Check only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
allow engine speed to exceed If the vehicle starts in any other
manufacturer specifications. { WARNING position, contact your dealer
for service.
Fan and Drive:
When you are doing this
. Removal of fan clutch, if the inspection, the vehicle could
vehicle has one, or rendering move suddenly. If the vehicle
clutch inoperative. moves, you or others could
. Removal of the fan shroud, if be injured.
the vehicle has one.
Air Intake: 1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
. Removal of the air cleaner
around the vehicle.
silencer.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Automatic Transmission 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Ignition Transmission

See Parking Brake on
Shift Lock Control page 934.
Lock Check
Function Check Be ready to apply the regular While parked, and with the
brake immediately if the vehicle parking brake set, try to turn the
{ WARNING begins to move. ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift
lever position.
When you are doing this 3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
. The ignition should turn to
inspection, the vehicle could LOCK/OFF only when the shift
move suddenly. If the vehicle engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the lever is in P (Park).
moves, you or others could
be injured. shift lever out of P (Park) with . The ignition key should come
normal effort. If the shift lever out only in LOCK/OFF.
moves out of P (Park), contact
1. Before starting this check, Contact your dealer if service is
your dealer for service.
be sure there is enough room required.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set Windshield wiper blades should be
the parking brake. inspected for wear and cracking.
{ WARNING . To check the parking brake's
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 113 for more information on
When you are doing this check, holding ability: With the engine wiper blade inspection.
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot Replacement blades come in
You or others could be injured different types and are removed in
pressure from the regular brake
and property could be damaged. different ways. To remove the type
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front with a release clip, do the following:
held by the parking brake only.
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park) 1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks
mechanism's holding ability: into a vertical position.
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move. With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Vehicle Care 10-37
4. To install the new wiper insert, Bulb Replacement

slide the notched end last, into
the end with two blade claws. For the proper type of replacement
Then slide the insert all the way bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
through the blade claws at the page 1043.
opposite end. For any bulbchanging procedure
5. Make sure that the notches are not listed in this section, contact
locked by the bottom claws. your dealer.
Make sure that all other claws
are properly locked on both Halogen Bulbs
sides of the insert slot.
2. Press down on the blade

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in { WARNING
the wiper arm hook. Pull it up
assembly pivot locking tab. Pull until the pivot locking tab locks Halogen bulbs have pressurized
down on the blade assembly to in the hook slot. gas inside and can burst if you
release it from the wiper drop or scratch the bulb. You or
arm hook. 7. Carefully lower the wiper arm
and blade assembly into the others could be injured. Be sure
3. The insert has two notches at windshield. to read and follow the instructions
one end that are locked by on the bulb package.
bottom claws of the blade
assembly. At the notched end,
pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Headlamps
Composite Headlamp
A. HighBeam Headlamp 2. Remove the two bolts from the 5. Disconnect the electrical
headlamp assembly. connector.
B. LowBeam Headlamp
3. Lift the headlamp assembly to 6. Turn the bulb counterclockwise
To remove the headlamp assembly release the lower tabs from the one quarter turn to remove it
from the vehicle and access the radiator support. from the headlamp assembly.
bulbs:
4. Turn the headlamp forward and
1. Open the hood. See Hood on upward to remove it from the
page 104 for more information. grille.
Vehicle Care 10-39
7. Install the new bulb into the SealedBeam Headlamp

headlamp assembly and connect
the electrical connector.
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the
headlamp assembly.
To prevent headlamp vibration
and shortened bulb life, be sure
to insert the headlamp assembly
tabs in the slots at the lower
portion of the housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical

connector (B) and remove the
A. Headlamp retainer screws headlamp bulb (A).
B. Headlamp retainer 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
C. Sealedbeam headlamp bulb reinstall the headlamp.
1. Remove the four screws (A)
from the headlamp retainer (B).
Pull the retainer (B) out and set
it aside.
2. Pull the bulb (C) forward to gain
access to the electrical
connector.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Front Turn Signal, To replace the front turn signal, 6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
sidemarker, and/or parking lamp to reinstall it in the lamp
Sidemarker, and bulb(s): assembly.
Parking Lamps 7. Reinstall the lamp assembly into
the grille until the outboard clip
snaps into place.
Taillamps
To replace a taillamp/turn signal
lamp or backup lamp bulb:
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the
outboard clip on the lamp by
pushing inboard and prying the
A. Front Parking and Turn lamp assembly forward.
Signal Lamp 2. Remove the lamp from the grille.
B. Front Sidemarker Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise one quarter
turn and remove it from the lamp
assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the
socket by pulling it straight out.
5. Replace the bulb.
1. Remove the two inboard nuts
from the inside of the taillamp
assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-41
4. Remove the third nut (C) from 7. Remove the bulb by pulling it
the upper outboard side of straight out.
the lamp. 8. Push the new bulb into the
5. Remove the taillamp assembly socket.
from the vehicle. 9. Reinstall the bulb socket by
turning it clockwise into the
lamp assembly.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to
reinstall the taillamp assembly
and applique.
2. The third nut (C) is under the

applique piece (B) above the
lamp. Remove the two inboard
applique nuts. Pull the
applique (B) straight rearward
slightly to clear the studs. Then
rotate the applique (B) just far
6. Remove the taillamp/turn signal
enough to gain access to the
lamp (A) or backup lamp (B)
outer push pins (A). bulb socket by turning it
3. Carefully disconnect the push counterclockwise one quarter
pins (A) from the applique turn and pulling it out of the
bracket lamp assembly.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Center High-Mounted 2. Remove the CHMSL assembly. License Plate Lamp

Stoplamp (CHMSL) 3. Turn the bulb socket To replace one of these bulbs:
counterclockwise one quarter
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp turn to remove it from the lamp
(CHMSL) is located above the rear assembly.
doors at the center of the vehicle.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of
To replace a bulb: the socket and push the new
bulb into the socket.
5. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
one quarter turn to install it in the
lamp assembly.
6. Reinstall the CHMSL assembly
and two screws.
Do not block or damage the CHMSL
when items are loaded on the roof A. Bulb Socket
of the vehicle. B. License Plate Bulb Assembly
C. Screws
1. Remove the two screws from the

CHMSL assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-43
1. Remove the screws (C) that Replacement Bulbs Bulb

secure the license plate bulb Exterior Lamp
Number
assembly (B). Bulb
Exterior Lamp Headlamps
2. Turn the bulb socket (A) Number
counterclockwise and pull the Back-up, Rear Composite
bulb straight out of the socket. Parking, Stoplamp, High-Beam 9005LL
3157KX Headlamp
3. Install the new bulb. and Turn
Signal Lamp Composite
4. Reverse steps 1 and 2 to
reinstall the license plate bulb Center Low-Beam 9006LL
assembly. HighMounted Headlamp
912LL
Stop Lamp Sealed Beam
(CHMSL) H6054
Headlamp
Front Parking and
3157KX For replacement bulbs not listed
Turn Signal Lamp
here, contact your dealer.
Front
194LL
Sidemarker Lamp
License
194LL
Plate Lamp
10-44 Vehicle Care
Electrical System greatly reduces the chance of circuit

overload and fire caused by
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
electrical problems. same amperage fuse can be
Electrical System borrowed. Choose some feature of
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
Overload the following in the vehicle: the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
The vehicle has fuses and circuit . Headlamp Wiring
breakers to protect against an Headlamp Wiring
electrical system overload. . Windshield Wiper Motor
An electrical overload may cause
When the current electrical load is . Power Windows and Other the lamps to go on and off, or in
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens Power Accessories some cases to remain off. Have the
and closes, protecting the circuit Replace a bad fuse with a new one headlamp wiring checked right away
until the current load returns to of the identical size and rating. if the lamps go on and off or
normal or the problem is fixed. This remain off.
Vehicle Care 10-45
Windshield Wipers Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

If the wiper motor overheats due to Breakers Fuse Block
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are The fuse block is located in the
wipers will stop until the motor cools
protected from short circuits by a engine compartment on the driver
and will then restart.
combination of fuses and circuit side of the vehicle.
Although the circuit is protected breakers. This greatly reduces the Notice: Spilling liquid on any
from electrical overload, overload chance of fires caused by electrical electrical component on the
due to heavy snow or ice may problems. vehicle may damage it. Always
cause wiper linkage damage.
Look at the silver-colored band keep the covers on any electrical
Always clear ice and heavy snow
inside the fuse. If the band is broken component.
from the windshield before using the
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
windshield wipers.
you replace a bad fuse with a new
If the overload is caused by an one of the identical size and rating.
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuse Usage

Right Stop/Turn
3
Trailer
4 Spare
5 Spare
Fuel System
6 Control Module
Ignition
Body Control
7
Module 5
Body Control
8
Module 7
Body Control
9
Module 4
Instrument Panel
10
Cluster
11 Trailer Wiring
12 Spare
13 Brake Switch
The vehicle may not be equipped 14 Windshield Washer

with all of the fuses, relays, 16 Horn
and features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage

17 Transmission Special Equipment Fuel Operated
27 35
Option Heater Module
Air Conditioning
18
Compressor 28 Airbag Fuel System
36 Control Module
Engine Control Steering Wheel
19 29 Battery
Module Battery Sensor
Left HighBeam
20 Spare Engine Control 51
Headlamp
30 Module Ignition/
Left Stop/Turn
21 Glow Plug Module Right HighBeam
Trailer 52
Headlamp
Transmission
22 Spare
31 Control Module Left LowBeam
53
23 Spare Ignition Headlamp
24 Fuel Pump Transmission Right LowBeam
54
32 Control Module Headlamp
Auxiliary Power
25 Battery
Outlet 55 Wiper
33 Spare
Body Control Canister Vent
26 56
Module 3 34 Spare Solenoid
10-48 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage

Body Control Daytime Running Body Control
58 72
Module 2 Lamps 2 Module 6
66
(LOLVLV22)
Body Control Lighter/Data Link
59 (If Equipped) 73
Module 1 Connection
Daytime Running
61 Spare 75 V6 Fuel Injectors
Lamps 1
67
Oxygen Sensor 2 (UPLVL+V22) 76 Spare
62 (Post), EV Fan (If Equipped)
Oxygen Sensor
(Diesel) 77
Auxiliary Stop 2 (Pre)
68
63 Spare Lamps
Engine Control
78
Mass Air Flow/ 69 Spare Module Powertrain
64
Canister Vent
70 Spare Even Ignition/
79
Odd Ignition/ Injectors
65 71 Fuel Heater
Injectors
Vehicle Care 10-49
JCase Fuse Usage Relay Usage Relay Usage

1 ABS Motor 15 Run/Crank 48 Fan High
2 ABS Module 37 Spare 49 Powertrain
41 Spare 38 Fuel Pump 50 Spare
42 Trailer Wiring 39 Crank 57 Fan Low
43 Fan High Air Conditioning 60 Fan Control
40
Compressor
44 Starter Solenoid
Engine Control
45
Module/Powertrain
46 Spare
47 Fan Lo
74 Front Blower
10-50 Vehicle Care
Floor Console Fuse Block

The floor console fuse block is
located under the driver seat.
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-51
MiniFuse Usage MiniFuse Usage MiniFuse Usage

F1 Empty OnStar Remote Function
F11
(If Equipped) F21 Actuator/Tire
Steering Wheel
F2 Pressure Monitor
Sensor F12 Empty
Ignition Switch/
Auxiliary Parking Heating,
F3 Discrete Logic
Lamps (CutAway) F13 Ventilation and F22
Ignition
Air Conditioning 2
F4 Front Park Lamps Sensor (PK3)
Heating,
F5 Trailer Park Lamps Instrument Panel
F14 Ventilation and F23
Cluster
Upfitter Park Air Conditioning 1
F6
Lamps Heating, Ventilation
F15 Empty
Right Rear and Air
F7 F25
Outside Rear View Conditioning
Park Lamp F17
Mirror Heater Control
Left Rear
F8 Rear Window Auxiliary/Trailer
Park Lamp F18 F26
Defogger Backup
Outside Rear View
F9 F19 Compass F27 Taillamps Backup
Mirror Switch
Radio/Chime/XM Upfitter Courtesy
Airbag/Automatic F30
F10 F20 Satellite Radio Lamps
Occupant Sensing
(If Equipped)
10-52 Vehicle Care
MiniFuse Usage Relays Usage Wheels and Tires

F31 Front Door Lock Run (High Current
K1 Tires
Micro)
F32 Rear Door Lock
Empty (High Every new GM vehicle has
F33 Cargo Door Unlock K2
Current Micro) high-quality tires made by a
F34
Passenger Door
Park Lamps (High leading tire manufacturer.
Unlock K3 See the warranty manual for
Current Micro)
Rear Passenger information regarding the tire
F35 Upfitter Auxiliary 2 warranty and where to get
Door Unlock K4
(High Current Mini)
F36 Driver Door Unlock
service. For additional
Rear Defogger information refer to the tire
F37 Empty K5 (High Current manufacturer.
F38 Empty Micro)
Retained { WARNING
JCase Fuse Usage Accessory Power
K6 . Poorly maintained and
(RAP) (High
F16 Upfitter Auxiliary 1 Current Micro) improperly used tires are
dangerous.
F24 Empty
Circuit Usage . Overloading the tires can
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 cause overheating as a result
F28 Breaker
Reading Lamps of too much flexing. There
F29 Rear Blower CB1 Power Seats could be a blowout and a
CB2 Power Windows serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 912.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-53
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
maintain the recommended the tires.
pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
should be checked when excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
the tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
. Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc. Passenger (PMetric) Tire
likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode. (A) Tire Size: The tire size
impact such as when code is a combination of letters
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at and numbers used to define a
the recommended pressure. Tire Sidewall Labeling particular tire's width, height,
. Worn or old tires can cause a Useful information about a aspect ratio, construction type,
crash. If the tread is badly tire is molded into the sidewall. and service description. See the
worn, replace them. The examples show a typical Tire Size illustration later in this
. Replace any tires that have passenger vehicle and light section for more detail.
been damaged by impacts truck tire sidewall.
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
10-54 Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (D) Tire Identification (F) Uniform Tire Quality
(Tire Performance Criteria Number (TIN): The letters and Grading (UTQG):
Specification): numbers following the DOT code Tire manufacturers are
Original equipment tires are the Tire Identification required to grade tires based
designed to GM's specific tire Number (TIN). The TIN shows on three performance factors:
performance criteria have a the manufacturer and plant treadwear, traction, and
TPC specification code molded code, tire size, and date the tire temperature resistance. For
onto the sidewall. GM's TPC was manufactured. The TIN is more information, see Uniform
specifications meet or exceed all molded onto both sides of the Tire Quality Grading on
federal safety guidelines. tire, although only one side may page 1072.
(C) DOT (Department of have the date of manufacture. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Transportation): (E) Tire Ply Material : The type Load Limit: Maximum load
The Department of of cord and number of plies in that can be carried and the
Transportation (DOT) code the sidewall and under the tread. maximum pressure needed
indicates that the tire is in to support that load. For
compliance with the U.S. information on recommended
Department of Transportation tire pressure see Tire Pressure
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. on page 1060 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 912.
Vehicle Care 10-55
(B) TPC Spec (D) DOT (Department of

(Tire Performance Criteria Transportation):
Specification): The Department of
Original equipment tires Transportation (DOT) code
designed to GM's specific tire indicates that the tire is in
performance criteria have a compliance with the U.S.
TPC specification code molded Department of Transportation
onto the sidewall. GM's TPC Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
specifications meet or exceed all (E) Tire Identification
federal safety guidelines. Number (TIN): The letters and
This does not apply to numbers following the DOT code
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire Goodyear LT225/75R16 are the Tire Identification
G949 RSA and Goodyear Number (TIN). The TIN shows
(A) Tire Size: The tire size LT225/75R16 G933 RSD
code is a combination of letters the manufacturer and plant
commercial truck tires. code, tire size, and date the tire
and numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height, (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: was manufactured. The TIN is
aspect ratio, construction type, Maximum load that can be molded onto both sides of the
and service description. See the carried and the maximum tire, although only one side may
Tire Size illustration later in this pressure needed to support that have the date of manufacture.
section for more detail. load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on
recommended tire pressure see
Tire Pressure on page 1060
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 912.
10-56 Vehicle Care
(F) Tire Ply Material : The type Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The threedigit
of cord and number of plies in number indicates the tire section
the sidewall and under the tread. Tire Size width in millimeters from
(G) Single Tire Maximum The following examples show sidewall to sidewall.
Load: Maximum load that can the different parts of a tire size. (C) Aspect Ratio: A twodigit
be carried and the maximum number that indicates the tire
pressure needed to support that heighttowidth measurements.
load when used as a single. For For example, if the tire size
information on recommended aspect ratio is 75, as shown in
tire pressure see Tire Pressure item C of the illustration, it would
on page 1060 and Vehicle Load mean that the tire's sidewall is
Limits on page 912. Passenger (PMetric) Tire 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(A) Passenger (PMetric) Tire: (D) Construction Code:
The United States version of a A letter code is used to indicate
metric tire sizing system. The the type of ply construction in
letter P as the first character in the tire. The letter R means
the tire size means a passenger radial ply construction; the
vehicle tire engineered to letter D means diagonal or
standards set by the U.S. Tire bias ply construction; and the
and Rim Association. letter B means beltedbias ply
construction.
Vehicle Care 10-57
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of (B) Tire Width: The threedigit (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches. number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These width in millimeters from (F) Load Range: Load Range.
characters represent the load sidewall to sidewall.
(G) Service Description:
index and speed rating of the (C) Aspect Ratio: A twodigit The service description indicates
tire. The load index represents number that indicates the tire the load index and speed rating
the load carrying capacity a tire heighttowidth measurements. of a tire. If two numbers are
is certified to carry. The speed For example, if the tire size given as in the example,
rating is the maximum speed a aspect ratio is 75, as shown 120/116, then this represents
tire is certified to carry a load. in item C of the light truck the load index for single versus
(LTMetric) tire illustration, it dual wheel usage (single/dual).
would mean that the tire's The speed rating is the
sidewall is 75 percent as maximum speed a tire is
high as it is wide. certified to carry a load. This
(D) Construction Code: does not apply to Goodyear
A letter code is used to indicate LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and
Light Truck (LTMetric) Tire the type of ply construction in Goodyear LT225/75R16
(A) Light Truck (LTMetric) the tire. The letter R means G933 RSD commercial truck
Tire: The United States version radial ply construction; the tires; see the dual tire and single
of a metric tire sizing system. letter D means diagonal or tire maximum load and load
The letters LT as the first two bias ply construction; and the range letter designations on the
characters in the tire size mean letter B means beltedbias tire sidewall.
a light truck tire engineered to ply construction.
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
10-58 Vehicle Care
Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel molded into the sidewall of a
cords that hold the tire onto tire signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
of the tire. Air pressure is Standards. The DOT code
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of includes the Tire Identification
or psi (pounds per square inch). Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
the tread.
Accessory Weight: designator which can also
The combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: identify the tire manufacturer,
accessories. Some examples The amount of air pressure production plant, brand, and
of optional accessories are in a tire, measured in date of production.
automatic transmission, power kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds
per square inch) before a tire GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
steering, power brakes, power Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
windows, power seats, and air has built up heat from driving.
See Tire Pressure on on page 912.
conditioning.
page 1060. GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Weight Rating for the front axle.
of a tire's height to its width. Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and See Vehicle Load Limits on
Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the page 912.
cords that is located between maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle
the plies and the tread. Cords and coolant, but without Weight Rating for the rear axle.
may be made from steel or other passengers and cargo. See Vehicle Load Limits on
reinforcing materials. page 912.
Vehicle Care 10-59
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:

The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb A tire used on passenger cars
that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, and some light duty trucks and
when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight. Recommended Inflation
unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LTMetric) Tire: The number of occupants a manufacturer's recommended
A tire used on light duty trucks vehicle is designed to seat tire inflation pressure as shown
and some multipurpose multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). on the tire placard. See Tire
passenger vehicles. See Vehicle Load Limits on Pressure on page 1060
page 912. andVehicle Load Limits on
Load Index: An assigned page 912.
number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution :
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall: tire in which the ply cords that
The side of an asymmetrical tire extend to the beads are laid at
Maximum Inflation Pressure: 90 degrees to the centerline of
The maximum air pressure to that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on the tread.
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is a vehicle. The side of the tire Rim: A metal support for a tire
molded onto the sidewall. that contains a whitewall, and upon which the tire beads
bears white lettering, or bears are seated.
Maximum Load Rating: manufacturer, brand, and/or
The load rating for a tire at the Sidewall: The portion of a tire
model name molding that is between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation higher or deeper than the same
pressure for that tire. moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
10-60 Vehicle Care
Speed Rating: Ratings are determined See Tire and Loading

An alphanumeric code assigned by tire manufacturers using Information Label under Vehicle
to a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 912.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the
operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure
Traction: The friction between Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount of
the tire and the road surface. page 1072. air pressure to operate
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: effectively.
Tread: The portion of a tire that The number of designated Notice: Neither tire
comes into contact with seating positions multiplied by underinflation nor
the road. 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated overinflation is good.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires
Treadwear Indicators: Limits on page 912.
Narrow bands, sometimes called that do not have enough air,
wear bars, that show across the Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in:
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm Tire: Load on an individual tire . Tire overloading and
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See due to curb weight, accessory overheating which could
When It Is Time for New Tires weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout.
on page 1068. cargo weight.
. Premature or
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label irregular wear.
Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling.
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a capacity weight and the . Reduced fuel economy.
tire's traction, temperature, and original equipment tire size and
treadwear. recommended inflation pressure.
Vehicle Care 10-61
Overinflated tires, or tires that How the vehicle is loaded Remove the valve cap from the
have too much air, can affects vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire
result in: comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to
. Unusual wear. with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement.
designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure
. Poor handling. matches the recommended
When to Check
. Rough ride. pressure on the Tire and
Check the tires once a month Loading Information label, no
. Needless damage from or more. further adjustment is necessary.
road hazards. If the inflation pressure is low,
Do not forget the spare tire,
The Tire and Loading if the vehicle has one. add air until the recommended
Information label on the vehicle SeeFull-Size Spare Tire on pressure is reached. If the
indicates the original equipment page 1088 for additional inflation pressure is high, press
tires and the correct cold tire information. on the metal stem in the center
inflation pressures. The of the tire valve to release air.
recommended pressure is the How to Check
Re-check the tire pressure with
minimum air pressure needed to Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge.
support the vehicle's maximum gauge to check tire pressure.
load carrying capacity. Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the
determined by looking at the tire. valve stems to prevent leaks
For additional information and keep out dirt and moisture.
regarding how much weight Check the tire inflation pressure
the vehicle can carry, and an when the tires are cold, meaning
example of the Tire and Loading the vehicle has not been driven
Information label, see Vehicle for at least three hours or no
Load Limits on page 912. more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
10-62 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor low tire pressure telltale when one The TPMS malfunction indicator is
or more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
System underinflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle startups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly underinflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
Each tire, including the spare lead to tire failure. Underinflation illuminated, the system may not be
(if provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability. of reasons, including the installation
vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if underinflation has telltale after replacing one or more
should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow
As an added safety feature,
the TPMS to continue to function
your vehicle has been equipped Your vehicle has also been properly.
with a tire pressure monitoring equipped with a TPMS malfunction
system (TPMS) that illuminates a indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 1063 for
additional information.
Vehicle Care 10-63
Federal Communications For additional information and

Commission (FCC) and details about the DIC operation and
Industry Canada displays, see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 528 and Tire
See Radio Frequency Statement on Messages on page 540.
page 1319 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal The low tire pressure warning light
Communications Commission (FCC) When a low tire pressure condition may come on in cool weather when
rules and Industry Canada is detected, the TPMS illuminates the vehicle is first started, and then
Standards RSS-210/220/310. the low tire pressure warning light turn off as the vehicle is driven.
located on the instrument cluster. This could be an early indicator
If the warning light comes on, stop that the air pressure is getting low
Tire Pressure Monitor as soon as possible and inflate the and needs to be inflated to the
Operation tires to the recommended pressure proper pressure.
This vehicle may have a Tire shown on the Tire and Loading
A Tire and Loading Information label
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Information label. See Vehicle Load
shows the size of the original
The TPMS is designed to warn the Limits on page 912.
equipment tires and the correct
driver when a low tire pressure A message to check the pressure in inflation pressure for the tires when
condition exists. TPMS sensors are a specific tire displays in the Driver they are cold. See Vehicle Load
mounted onto each tire and wheel Information Center (DIC). The low Limits on page 912, for an example
assembly, excluding the spare tire tire pressure warning light and the of the Tire and Loading Information
and wheel assembly. The TPMS DIC warning message come on at label and its location. Also see Tire
sensors monitor the air pressure in each ignition cycle until the tires Pressure on page 1060.
the tires and transmit the tire are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure readings to a receiver pressure. If the vehicle has
located in the vehicle. DIC buttons, tire pressure levels
can be viewed.
10-64 Vehicle Care
The TPMS can warn about TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching
a low tire pressure condition but Message process was not done or
it does not replace normal tire not completed successfully
maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly after rotating the tires. The
on page 1066, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC
page 1066 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
page 1052. system detects a malfunction, the successfully completing the
low tire pressure warning light sensor matching process.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are flashes for about one minute and See "TPMS Sensor Matching
not all the same. A non-approved then stays on for the remainder of Process" later in this section.
tire sealant could damage the the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor message also displays. The
. One or more TPMS sensors
damage caused by using an malfunction light and DIC warning are missing or damaged. The
incorrect tire sealant is not message come on at each ignition malfunction light and the DIC
covered by the vehicle warranty. cycle until the problem is corrected. message should go off when the
Always use only the Some of the conditions that can TPMS sensors are installed and
GM-approved tire sealant cause these to come on are: the sensor matching process
available through your dealer or is performed successfully.
included in the vehicle.
. One of the road tires has been See your dealer for service.
replaced with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not have a
. Replacement tires or wheels do
TPMS sensor. The malfunction not match the original equipment
light and the DIC message tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
should go off after the road tire other than those recommended
is replaced and the sensor could prevent the TPMS from
matching process is performed functioning properly. See Buying
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor New Tires on page 1069.
Matching Process" later in
this section.
Vehicle Care 10-65

. Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the If the vehicle does not have
being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire, RKE, press the Driver
wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger Information Center (DIC) vehicle
TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear. information button until the
sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE
If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool. POSITIONS message displays.
properly, it cannot detect or signal a There are two minutes to match the The horn sounds twice to signal
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and the receiver is in relearn mode
for service if the TPMS malfunction five minutes overall to match all four and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
light and DIC message come on tire/wheel positions. If it takes message displays on the DIC
and stay on. longer, the matching process stops screen.
TPMS Sensor Matching and must be restarted. If the vehicle does not have RKE
Process The TPMS sensor matching or DIC buttons, press the trip
process is: odometer reset stem located on
Each TPMS sensor has a unique the instrument panel cluster until
identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake.
code needs to be matched to a new the PRESS V TO RELEARN
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with TIRE POSITIONS message
tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off.
vehicles tires or replacing one or displays. The horn sounds twice
more of the TPMS sensors. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry to signal the receiver is in
Also, the TPMS sensor matching (RKE) transmitter's LOCK and relearn mode and TIRE
process should be performed after UNLOCK buttons at the same LEARNING ACTIVE message
replacing a spare tire with a road time for approximately displays on the DIC screen.
tire containing the TPMS sensor. five seconds. The horn sounds 4. Start with the driver side
The malfunction light and the DIC twice to signal the receiver is in front tire.
message should go off at the next relearn mode and TIRE
ignition cycle. The sensors are LEARNING ACTIVE message
matched to the tire/wheel positions, displays on the DIC screen.
10-66 Vehicle Care
5. Place the relearn tool against 9. Turn the ignition switch to . The tire has a bump, bulge,
the tire sidewall, near the valve LOCK/OFF. or split.
stem. Then press the button to 10. Set all four tires to the . The tire has a puncture, cut,
activate the TPMS sensor. recommended air pressure
A horn chirp confirms that the or other damage that cannot
level as indicated on the Tire be repaired well because of
sensor identification code has and Loading Information label.
been matched to this tire and the size or location of the
wheel position. damage.
Tire Inspection
6. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the We recommend that the tires, Tire Rotation
procedure in Step 5. including the spare tire, if the Tires should be rotated
vehicle has one, be inspected every 12 000 km (7,500 mi).
7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the for signs of wear or damage at See Scheduled Maintenance on
procedure in Step 5. least once a month. page 113.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear Replace the tire if: Tires are rotated to achieve
tire, and repeat the procedure in . The indicators at three or a uniform wear for all tires.
Step 5. The horn sounds two more places around the tire The first rotation is the most
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
can be seen. important.
matched to the driver side rear . There is cord or fabric Any time unusual wear is
tire, and the TPMS sensor showing through the tire's noticed, rotate the tires as soon
matching process is no longer rubber. as possible and check the wheel
active. The TIRE LEARNING alignment. Also check for
ACTIVE message on the DIC . The tread or sidewall is
damaged tires or wheels.
display screen goes off. cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord
or fabric.
Vehicle Care 10-67
See When It Is Time for New Adjust the front and rear tires
Tires on page 1068 and Wheel to the recommended inflation { WARNING
Replacement on page 1074. pressure on the Tire and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
Loading Information label after parts to which it is fastened, can
the tires have been rotated. make wheel nuts become loose
See Tire Pressure on after time. The wheel could come
page 1060 and Vehicle Load off and cause an accident. When
Limits on page 912. changing a wheel, remove any
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor rust or dirt from places where the
System. See Tire Pressure wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Monitor Operation on
towel can be used; however, use
page 1063.
a scraper or wire brush later to
Check that all wheel nuts are remove all rust or dirt.
properly tightened. See Wheel
Nut Torque under Capacities Lightly coat the center of the
Use this rotation pattern when and Specifications on
rotating the tires. wheel hub with wheel bearing
page 122. grease after a wheel change or
If the vehicle has a compact tire rotation to prevent corrosion
spare tire, do not include it in the or rust build-up. Do not get
tire rotation. grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
10-68 Vehicle Care
Dual Tire Rotation The outer tire on a dual wheel When It Is Time for
setup generally wears faster than
When the vehicle is new, the inner tire. Tires last longer and
New Tires
or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, wear more evenly if they are Factors such as maintenance,
or wheel nut is replaced, check rotated. See Tire Inspection on temperatures, driving speeds,
the wheel nut torque after page 1066 and Tire Rotation on vehicle loading, and road conditions
160, 1 600, and 10 000 km page 1066. Also see Scheduled affect the wear rate of the tires.
(100, 1,000, and 6,000 m) of driving. Maintenance on page 113.
For proper wheel nut tightening
information, see Removing the Flat
Tire and Installing the Spare Tire { WARNING
later in this section, under If a Tire If the vehicle is operated with a
Goes Flat on page 1076. Also see tire that is underinflated, the tire
Wheel Nut Torque under
can overheat. An overheated tire
Capacities and Specifications on
can lose air suddenly or catch
page 122.
fire. You or others could be
injured. Properly inflate all tires,
including the spare.
See Tires on page 1052 and Tire

Pressure on page 1060 for more Treadwear indicators are one way to
information on proper tire inflation. tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining.
Vehicle Care 10-69
Some commercial truck tires, Tires will typically need to be Buying New Tires
including Goodyear LT225/75R16 replaced due to wear before
G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/ they may need to be replaced GM has developed and matched
75R16 G933 RSD, may not have due to age. Consult the tire specific tires for the vehicle. The
treadwear indicators. If the tires do manufacturer for more information original equipment tires installed
not have treadwear indicators, on when tires should be replaced. were designed to meet General
replace the tires when the tread Motors Tire Performance Criteria
depth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) for Vehicle Storage Specification (TPC Spec) system
the front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) for Tires age when stored normally rating. When replacement tires are
the rear tires. See Tire Inspection mounted on a parked vehicle. needed, GM strongly recommends
on page 1066 and Tire Rotation on Park a vehicle that will be stored for buying tires with the same TPC
page 1066 for additional at least a month in a cool, dry, clean Spec rating.
information. area away from direct sunlight to GM's exclusive TPC Spec system
The rubber in tires ages over time. slow aging. This area should be considers over a dozen critical
This also applies to the spare tire, free of grease, gasoline or other specifications that impact the
if the vehicle has one, even if it is substances that can deteriorate overall performance of the
never used. Multiple conditions rubber. vehicle, including brake system
including temperatures, loading Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling,
conditions, and inflation pressure cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging may result in vibrations while monitoring performance. GM's TPC
takes place. driving. When storing a vehicle for Spec number is molded onto the
at least a month, remove the tires or tire's sidewall near the tire size.
raise the vehicle to reduce the If the tires have an allseason tread
weight from the tires. design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 1053 for additional
information.
10-70 Vehicle Care
GM recommends replacing all the

tires at the same time. Uniform tread { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
depth on all tires will help to
maintain the performance of the Mixing tires of different sizes, The spare tire was developed for
vehicle. Braking and handling brands, or types may cause loss use on this vehicle and will not
performance may be adversely of control of the vehicle, resulting affect vehicle handling.
affected if all the tires are not in a crash or other vehicle
replaced at the same time. See Tire damage. Use the correct size,
Inspection on page 1066 and Tire brand, and type of tires on
Rotation on page 1066 for all wheels. { WARNING
information on proper tire rotation. This vehicle may have a different Using bias-ply tires on the
size spare than the road tires vehicle may cause the wheel
{ WARNING originally installed on the vehicle. rim flanges to develop cracks
When new, the vehicle included a after many miles of driving.
Tires could explode during
spare tire and wheel assembly
improper service. Attempting to A tire and/or wheel could fail
with a similar overall diameter as
mount or dismount a tire could suddenly and cause a crash.
the road tires and wheels, so it is
cause injury or death. Only your
all right to drive on it.
Use only radial-ply tires with
dealer or authorized tire service the wheels on the vehicle.
center should mount or dismount (Continued)
the tires.
Vehicle Care 10-71
If the vehicle tires must be replaced Different Size Tires and WARNING (Continued)
with a tire that does not have a TPC
Spec number, make sure they are
Wheels
the same size, load range, speed If wheels or tires are installed that This increases the chance of
rating, and construction (radial) as are a different size than the original a crash and serious injury. Only
the original tires. equipment wheels and tires, vehicle use GM specific wheel and tire
Vehicles that have a tire pressure performance, including its braking, systems developed for the
monitoring system could give an ride and handling characteristics, vehicle, and have them properly
inaccurate lowpressure warning if stability, and resistance to rollover installed by a GM certified
nonTPC Spec rated tires are may be affected. If the vehicle has technician.
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor electronic systems such as antilock
System on page 1062. brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability See Buying New Tires on
The Tire and Loading Information control, the performance of these page 1069 and Accessories and
label indicates the original systems can also be affected. Modifications on page 103 for
equipment tires on the vehicle. additional information.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 912 for the label location
{ WARNING
and more information about the If different sized wheels are used,
Tire and Loading Information label. there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety
if tires not recommended for
those wheels are selected.
(Continued)
10-72 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality The Uniform Tire Quality Treadwear

Grading Grading (UTQG) system does The treadwear grade is a
not apply to deep tread, comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found winter-type snow tires,
where applicable on the tire wear rate of the tire when tested
space-saver, or temporary use under controlled conditions on a
sidewall between tread shoulder spare tires, tires with nominal
and maximum section width. specified government test
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches course. For example, a tire
For example: (25 to 30 cm), or to some graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA limited-production tires. a half (1) times as well on the
Temperature A While the tires available on government course as a tire
The following information relates General Motors passenger cars graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the and light trucks may vary with performance of tires depends
United States National Highway respect to these grades, they upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration must also conform to federal their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires safety requirements and depart significantly from the
by treadwear, traction, and additional General Motors Tire norm due to variations in
temperature performance. This Performance Criteria (TPC) driving habits, service practices
applies only to vehicles sold in standards. and differences in road
the United States. The grades All Passenger Car Tires Must characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of Conform to Federal Safety
most passenger car tires. Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Traction AA, A, B, C Temperature A, B, C properly inflated and not

The traction grades, from The temperature grades are overloaded. Excessive speed,
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, A (the highest), B, and C, underinflation, or excessive
and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance loading, either separately or in
the tire's ability to stop on wet to the generation of heat and its combination, can cause heat
pavement as measured under ability to dissipate heat when buildup and possible tire failure.
controlled conditions on tested under controlled
specified government test conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire
surfaces of asphalt and laboratory test wheel. Sustained Balance
concrete. A tire marked C may high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
have poor traction performance. material of the tire to degenerate and balanced at the factory to
Warning: The traction grade and reduce tire life, and provide the longest tire life and best
assigned to this tire is based on excessive temperature can lead overall performance. Adjustments to
straight-ahead braking traction to sudden tire failure. The grade wheel alignment and tire balancing
tests, and does not include C corresponds to a level of will not be necessary on a regular
acceleration, cornering, performance which all basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire
hydroplaning, or peak traction passenger car tires must meet wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
characteristics. under the Federal Motor Safety one side or the other. If the vehicle
Standard No. 109. Grades B and vibrates when driving on a smooth
A represent higher levels of road, the tires and wheels might
performance on the laboratory need to be rebalanced. See your
test wheel than the minimum dealer for proper diagnosis.
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
10-74 Vehicle Care
Wheel Replacement Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel Notice: The wrong wheel can
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor also cause problems with bearing
Replace any wheel that is bent, System (TPMS) sensors with new life, brake cooling, speedometer
cracked, or badly rusted or GM original equipment parts. or odometer calibration,
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming headlamp aim, bumper height,
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced. { WARNING vehicle ground clearance, and
tire or tire chain clearance to
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Using the wrong replacement the body and chassis.
Some aluminum wheels can be wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
repaired. See your dealer if any of See If a Tire Goes Flat on
nuts can be dangerous. It could page 1076 for more information.
these conditions exist.
affect the braking and handling of
Your dealer will know the kind of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, Used Replacement Wheels
wheel that is needed. and cause loss of control, causing
Each new wheel should have the a crash. Always use the correct { WARNING
same load-carrying capacity, wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
diameter, width, offset, and be nuts for replacement. Replacing a wheel with a used
mounted the same way as the one is dangerous. How it has
one it replaces. been used or how far it has
been driven may be unknown.
It could fail suddenly and cause
a crash. When replacing wheels,
use a new GM original equipment
wheel.
Vehicle Care 10-75
Tire Chains Notice: Use tire chains only For Cutaway models with
where legal and only when you LT245/75R16, LT225/75R16 or
must. Use chains that are the LT215/85R16 size single or dual
{ WARNING proper size for the tires. Install rear tires, use Low Profile Z-Chain
Tire chains used on a vehicle them on the tires of the rear axle. or SAE Class S cables.
Do not use chains on the tires of For Cargo or Passenger models
without the proper amount of
the front axle. Tighten them as with P245/70R17, LT225/75R16 or
clearance can cause damage to
tightly as possible with the LT245/75R16 size tires, use
the brakes, suspension, or other ends securely fastened. Drive
vehicle parts. The area damaged Low Profile Z-Chain cables.
slowly and follow the chain SAE Class S chains are not
by the tire chains could cause you manufacturer's instructions.
to lose control of the vehicle and recommended.
If you can hear the chains
you or others may be injured in a contacting the vehicle, stop and If the vehicle has dual rear tires,
crash. To help avoid damage to retighten them. If the contact do not use individual tire chains.
the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, continues, slow down until it Use tire chains that fit across both
or remove the device if it is stops. Driving too fast or dual tires.
contacting the vehicle. Do not spinning the wheels with chains
spin the vehicle's tires. Follow the on will damage the vehicle.
manufacturer's instructions.
10-76 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blow out
while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for
are maintained properly. If air goes permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could
out of a tire, it is much more likely to Re-inflating a tire after it has be badly injured or killed if the
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a been driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only
what to expect and what to do: blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
toward that side. Take your foot off severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
the accelerator pedal and grip the Have your dealer or an authorized to a level place, well off the road,
steering wheel firmly. Steer to tire service center repair or if possible. Turn on the hazard
maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon warning flashers. See Hazard
gently brake to a stop, well off the as possible. Warning Flashers on page 65.
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a { WARNING
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
{ WARNING Changing a tire can be
used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting dangerous. The vehicle can slip
accelerator pedal and steer to under it to do maintenance or off the jack and roll over or fall
straighten the vehicle. It may be repairs is dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire.
to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with (Continued)
if possible.
the vehicle, it is designed only for
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-77
WARNING (Continued)
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Changing
use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of Removing the Spare Tire and
To help prevent the vehicle from the wheel blocks (A). Tools
moving:
If you have a cargo van or a
1. Set the parking brake firmly. passenger van, the equipment you
2. Put an automatic will need is located in the passenger
transmission in P (Park) or a side rear corner of the vehicle.
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
A. Wheel Block
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle. B. Flat Tire
5. Place wheel blocks on both The following information explains
sides of the tire at the how to repair or change a tire.
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and

lift it off of the mounting bracket.
10-78 Vehicle Care
If you have a van with the To lower the spare tire from
15passenger seating arrangement, the vehicle:
the equipment you will need is
secured on the rear floor of the
passenger side of the vehicle.
The tools you will be using include:

A. Jack
B. Jack Handle A. Spare Tire
C. Hoist Extension B. Tire/Wheel Retainer
To access the equipment, remove D. Jack Handle Extension C. Hoist Cable

the retaining wing bolt and lift it out E. Wheel Wrench D. Hoist Assembly
of the mounting bracket. E. Hoist Shaft
The spare tire is mounted in the
rear underbody of the vehicle. F. Jack Handle and
You will use the hoist extension, the Hoist Extensions
jack handle extensions and the G. Wheel Wrench
wheel wrench to remove the
underbodymounted spare tire.
Vehicle Care 10-79
3. Turn the wheel wrench

counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
Continue to turn the wheel
wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (G) vehicle.
to one or two of the jack handle If the spare tire does not lower to
and the hoist extensions (F). the ground, the secondary latch
Insert the hoist extension end is engaged causing the tire not
through the hole in the rear to lower. See Secondary Latch
bumper. System on page 1086.
4. When the tire has been
2. Be sure the hoist extension end lowered, pull the tire toward you
connects to the hoist shaft (E). so you can reach the tire
The chiseled end of the retainer and pull it up through
extension is used to lower the the wheel opening.
spare tire.
If you have a vehicle which was
completed from a cab and
chassis, refer to the information
from body supplier/installer.
The spare tire is a fullsize tire,
like the other tires on the
vehicle.
5. Put the spare tire near the
flat tire.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
If the vehicle has plastic wheel nut
caps, loosen them by turning the
wheel wrench counterclockwise.
The wheel nut caps are designed
to remain with the center cap.
Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center
piece, place the chisel end of the
wheel wrench in the slot on the
wheel and gently pry it out. Front Position
Front Flat: Assemble the
1. Do a safety check before jack (A) together with the jack
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes handle (B), one or two jack
Flat on page 1076 for more handle extensions (D) and the
information. wheel wrench (E).
2. Loosen all the wheel nuts with Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A)
the wheel wrench. Do not together with the jack handle (B),
remove them yet. two jack handle extensions (D),
3. Assemble the jack and tools: and the wheel wrench (E).
Front Position
Vehicle Care 10-81
4. Position the jack under the

vehicle as shown. { WARNING
The front position jacking point is Raising the vehicle with the
on the frame. The rear position jack improperly positioned can
jacking point is on the rear axle. damage the vehicle and even
If the exhaust system interferes make the vehicle fall. To help
in the jack location in the rear avoid personal injury and vehicle
axle, such as in Diesel vehicles, damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
place the jack (A) on the rear head into the proper location
axle between the axle housing before raising the vehicle.
and the shock absorber
bracket in order to avoid any
Rear Position 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the
interference with the exhaust
pipe (B). wheel wrench clockwise. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room
{ WARNING for the spare tire to fit.
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack you could
be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
Rear Alternative Position (Diesel

Vehicles)
10-82 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
6. Remove all the wheel nuts. 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the
a scraper or wire brush later to
7. Take flat tire off of the mounting wheel bolts, mounting surfaces
remove all rust or dirt. and spare wheel.
surface.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
Vehicle Care 10-83

Wheel nuts that are not tight can To be sure, replace all studs on
work loose. If all the nuts on a the wheel. If the stud holes in a
wheel come off, the wheel can wheel have become larger, the
come off the vehicle, causing a wheel could collapse in operation.
crash. All wheel nuts must be Replace any wheel if its stud
properly tightened. Follow the holes have become larger or
rules in this section to be sure distorted in any way. Inspect hubs
they are. and hubpiloted wheels for
damage. Because of loose
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with running wheels, piloting pad
the rounded end of the nuts { WARNING damage may occur and require
replacement of the entire hub, for
toward the wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand until the If wheel studs are damaged, they proper centering of the wheels.
wheel is held against the hub. can break. If all the studs on a When replacing studs, hubs,
10. Lower the vehicle by wheel broke, the wheel could wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to
turning the jack handle come off and cause a crash. use GM original equipment parts.
counterclockwise. If any stud is damaged because
Lower the jack completely. of a loose-running wheel, it
could be that all of the studs
are damaged.
(Continued)
10-84 Vehicle Care
Notice: Improperly tightened 12. Put the wheel cover or the

{ WARNING wheel nuts can lead to brake center cap and plastic wheel
pulsation and rotor damage. To nut caps back on. Remove any
Wheel nuts that are improperly or avoid expensive brake repairs, wheel blocks.
incorrectly tightened can cause evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the wheels to become loose or Have a technician check
the proper sequence and to the the wheel nut tightness
come off. The wheel nuts should proper torque specification. See
be tightened with a torque wrench of all wheels with a
Capacities and Specifications on torque wrench after the
to the proper torque specification page 122 for the wheel nut first 160 km (100 miles) and
after replacing. Follow the torque torque specification. then 1600 km (1,000 miles)
specification supplied by the
after that. Repeat this service
aftermarket manufacturer when whenever you have a tire
using accessory locking wheel removed or serviced. See
nuts. See Capacities and Capacities and Specifications
Specifications on page 122 for on page 122 for more
original equipment wheel nut information.
torque specifications.
11. Use the wheel wrench to

tighten the nuts firmly.
Turn the wheel wrench
clockwise and in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and the cable is tight. The

and Tools spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the
center of the wheel, making sure
1. Put the tire on the ground at the
it is properly attached.
rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem pointed down. 3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of
the vehicle, keeping the cable 6. Make sure the tire is stored
tight. securely. Push, pull (A), and then
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
4. Put the chisel end of the hoist moves, use the wheel wrench to
extension on an angle through tighten the cable.
the hole in the rear door frame,
above the bumper. You will hear two clicks when the
tire is up all the way.
5. Raise the tire fully against the
underside of the vehicle. 7. Return the jacking equipment to
Continue turning the wheel the proper location. Secure the
wrench until the tire is secure items and replace the jack cover.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the

secondary latch:
This vehicle has an
underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a { WARNING
secondary latch system. It is Someone standing too close
designed to stop the spare tire from during the procedure could be
suddenly falling off the vehicle if the
injured by the jack. If the spare
cable holding the spare tire is
tire does not slide off the jack
damaged. For the secondary latch
to work, the tire must be stowed completely, make sure no one is
with the valve stem pointing down. behind you or on either side of
you as you pull the jack out from
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire under the spare. If the cable is not visible, start
and Tools under Tire Changing on this procedure at Step 6.
page 1077 for instructions on
storing the spare tire correctly. 1. Check under the vehicle to see if 2. Turn the hoist extension
the cable end is visible. counterclockwise until
{ WARNING approximately 15 cm (6 in) of
cable is exposed.
Before beginning this procedure
read all the instructions. Failure to
read and follow the instructions
could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
Vehicle Care 10-87
spare tire and turn the handle Turn the wheel wrench
clockwise to raise the jack until it counterclockwise to lower the
lifts the secondary latch spring. spare the rest of the way.
5. Keep raising the jack until the 8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the
spare tire stops moving upward cable and pull it through the
and is held firmly in place. This wheel opening. Pull the tire out
3. Attach the jack handle/jack lets you know that the secondary from under the vehicle.
handle extension and wheel latch has released. The spare Notice: If you drive away
wrench to the jack. tire is now balancing on the jack. before the spare tire or secondary
6. Lower the jack by turning the latch system cable has been
wheel wrench counterclockwise. reinstalled, you could damage the
Keep lowering the jack until the vehicle. Always reinstall this
spare tire slides off the jack or is cable before driving the vehicle.
hanging by the cable. 9. If the cable is hanging under the
7. Disconnect the jack handle from vehicle, turn the wheel wrench in
the jack and carefully remove the hoist shaft hole in the
the jack. Use one hand to push bumper clockwise to raise the
against the spare while firmly cable back up.
pulling the jack out from under Have the hoist assembly inspected
the spare tire with the as soon as you can. You will not be
other hand. able to store a spare or flat tire
If the spare tire is hanging from using the hoist assembly until it has
4. Place the jack under the vehicle,
the cable, assembly the wheel been repaired or replaced.
ahead of the rear bumper.
wrench onto the hoist extension
Position the center lift point of
and insert the chisel end of the
the jack under the center of the
hoist extension into the hoist
shaft hole above the bumper.
10-88 Vehicle Care
To continue changing the flat tire, After installing the spare tire on the Jump Starting
return to Step 4 of Storing a Flat or vehicle, you should stop as soon as
Spare Tire and Tools under Tire possible and make sure the spare is For more information about the
Changing on page 1077. correctly inflated. The spare tire is vehicle battery, see Battery on
made to perform well at speeds up page 1030.
Full-Size Spare Tire to 112 km/h (70 mph) at the If the vehicle battery has run down,
recommended inflation pressure, so you may want to use another
This vehicle, when new, may have you can finish your trip.
had a fully-inflated spare tire. vehicle and some jumper cables to
A spare tire may lose air over time, Have the damaged or flat road tire start your vehicle. Be sure to use
so check its inflation pressure repaired or replaced as soon as you the following steps to do it safely.
regularly. See Tire Pressure on can and installed back onto the
page 1060 and Vehicle Load Limits vehicle. This way, a spare tire will
on page 912 for information be available in case you need it
regarding proper tire inflation and again. Do not mix tires and wheels
loading the vehicle. For instruction of different sizes, because they will
on how to remove, install or store a not fit. Keep the spare tire and its
spare tire, see Removing the Flat wheel together.
Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools under Tire Changing on
page 1077.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Notice: Only use a vehicle that Notice: If the radio or other

{ WARNING has a 12-volt system with a accessories are left on during the
negative ground for jump jump starting procedure, they
Batteries can hurt you. They can starting. If the other vehicle does could be damaged. The repairs
be dangerous because: not have a 12-volt system with a would not be covered by the
. They contain acid that can negative ground, both vehicles warranty. Always turn off the
burn you. can be damaged. radio and other accessories when
2. Get the vehicles close enough jump starting the vehicle.
. They contain gas that can
explode or ignite. so the jumper cables can reach, 3. Turn off the ignition on both
. but be sure the vehicles are vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
They contain enough
not touching each other. If they accessories plugged into the
electricity to burn you.
are, it could cause a ground cigarette lighter or the accessory
If you do not follow these steps connection you do not want. You power outlet. Turn off the radio
exactly, some or all of these would not be able to start your and all lamps that are not
things can hurt you. vehicle, and the bad grounding needed. This will avoid sparks
could damage the electrical and help save both batteries.
systems. And it could save the radio!
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to To avoid the possibility of the 4. Open the hoods and locate the
the vehicle that would not be vehicles rolling, set the parking positive (+) and negative ()
covered by the warranty. brake firmly on both vehicles terminal locations of the other
involved in the jump start vehicle.
Trying to start the vehicle by procedure. Put an automatic
pushing or pulling it will not On your van, use the unpainted
transmission in P (Park) or a radio antenna bracket as a
work, and it could damage manual transmission in
the vehicle. remote negative () terminal.
N (Neutral) before setting the
1. Check the other vehicle. It must parking brake.
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
10-90 Vehicle Care
Do not connect positive (+) to

{ WARNING { WARNING negative () or you will get a
short that would damage the
Using an open flame near a Fans or other moving engine battery and maybe other parts
battery can cause battery gas to parts can injure you badly. Keep too. And do not connect the
explode. People have been hurt your hands away from moving negative () cable to the
doing this, and some have been parts once the engine is running. negative () terminal on the dead
blinded. Use a flashlight if you battery because this can cause
need more light. 5. Check that the jumper cables do sparks.
Be sure the battery has enough not have loose or missing
water. You do not need to add insulation. If they do, you could
water to the battery installed in get a shock. The vehicles could
your new vehicle. But if a battery be damaged too.
has filler caps, be sure the right Before you connect the cables,
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, here are some basic things you
add water to take care of that should know. Positive (+) will go
first. If you do not, explosive gas to positive (+) or to a remote
could be present. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative () will go to
Battery fluid contains acid that
an unpainted metal part or to a
can burn you. Do not get it on remote negative () terminal if
you. If you accidentally get it in the vehicle has one. On your
your eyes or on your skin, flush van, use the unpainted radio 6. Connect the red positive (+)
the place with water and get antenna bracket as a remote cable to the positive (+) terminal
medical help immediately. negative () terminal. of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Do not let the
other end touch metal.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Connect it to the positive (+) Notice: Your vehicle uses the

terminal of the good battery. Use unpainted radio antenna bracket
a remote positive (+) terminal if as a remote negative () terminal.
the vehicle has one. Move the antenna coax cable out
7. Now connect the black of the way before clamping the
negative () cable to the negative jumper cable to the fixed
negative () terminal of the antenna bracket. Avoid touching
good battery. Use a remote the negative cable clamp to the
negative () terminal if the air conditioning line. Failure to do
vehicle has one. either of these could damage
your vehicle. The repairs would
Do not let the other end touch not be covered by the warranty.
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative () 8. Connect the other end of the 9. Now start the vehicle with the
cable does not go to the dead negative () cable to the good battery and run the engine
battery. It goes to a heavy, negative () terminal location on for a while.
unpainted metal engine part or the vehicle with the dead battery. 10. Try to start the vehicle that had
to a remote negative () terminal On your van, use the unpainted the dead battery. If it will not
on the vehicle with the dead radio antenna bracket as a start after a few tries, it
battery. On your van, use the remote negative () terminal. probably needs service.
unpainted radio antenna bracket
as a remote negative ()
terminal.
10-92 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables

connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following:
wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black
may occur and damage the negative () cable from the
vehicle. The repairs would not be vehicle that had the dead
covered by the vehicle warranty. battery.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct 2. Disconnect the black
order, making sure that the negative () cable from the
cables do not touch each other or vehicle with the good battery.
other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
A. Unpainted Metal Part or 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Remote Negative () Terminal cable from the other vehicle.
B. Good Battery or Remote 5. Return the remote positive (+)
Positive (+) and Remote terminal cover to its original
Negative () Terminals position.
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-93

. What is the distance that will be
Towing Recreational Vehicle travelled? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means long they can tow.
Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment
disabled vehicle should be vehicle such as behind a motor going to be used? See your
towed with all four wheels off the home. The two most common types dealer or trailering professional
ground. Care must be taken with of recreational vehicle towing are for additional advice and
vehicles that have low ground known as dinghy towing and dolly equipment recommendations.
clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
. Is the vehicle ready to be
equipment. Always flatbed
ground. Dolly towing is towing the towed? Just as preparing the
on a car carrier.
vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make
Consult your dealer or a sure the vehicle is prepared to
ground and two wheels up on a
professional towing service if the be towed.
device known as a dolly.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program Here are some important things to
(U.S. and Canada) on page 138 or consider before recreational vehicle
Roadside Assistance Program towing:
(Mexico) on page 1310. . What is the towing capacity of
To tow the vehicle behind another the towing vehicle? Be sure to
vehicle for recreational purposes, read the tow vehicle
such as behind a motorhome, see manufacturer's
Recreational Vehicle Towing in recommendations.
this section.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles should Dolly Towing

not be towed with all four wheels on
the ground. Two-wheel-drive Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
transmissions have no provisions the Ground) TwoWheelDrive
for internal lubrication while Vehicles
being towed.
AllWheelDrive Vehicles
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four wheels
off the ground.
Two-WheelDrive Vehicles Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive
vehicle with all four wheels on the
Notice: If the vehicle is towed ground, or even with only two of
with all four wheels on the its wheels on the ground, will
ground, the drivetrain damage drivetrain components. Use the following procedure to
components could be damaged. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive tow the vehicle from the rear:
The repairs would not be vehicle with any of its wheels 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
covered by the vehicle warranty. on the ground. vehicle following the dolly
Do not tow the vehicle with all manufacturer's instructions.
four wheels on the ground.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto
the dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-95
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive
See Parking Brake on page 934 the Ground) AllWheelDrive vehicle with all four wheels on the
for more information. Vehicles ground, or even with only two of
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components.
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly Do not tow an all-wheel-drive
following the manufacturer's vehicle with any of its wheels on
instructions. the ground.
6. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the tow vehicle will not be
started or driven for six weeks or
more, remove the battery cable The vehicle was not designed to be
from the negative terminal (post) towed with two wheels on the
of the battery to prevent the ground. To properly tow these
battery from draining while vehicles, they should be placed on
towing. a platform trailer with all four wheels
off the ground.
10-96 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care Washing the Vehicle precautions and appropriate

disposal of any vehicle care
The best way to preserve the finish
product.
Exterior Care is to keep it clean by washing it
often. Rinse the vehicle well, before
If dirt and/or contaminants build up washing and after to remove all
in the glass seals, use a cloth and Notice: Certain cleaners contain
cleaning agents completely. If they
water to clean the glass seals. chemicals that can damage the
are allowed to dry on the surface,
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will emblems or nameplates on the
they could stain.
make them last longer, seal better, vehicle. Check the cleaning
and not stick or squeak. Apply product label. If it states that it Dry the finish with a soft, clean
silicone grease with a clean cloth. should not be used on plastic chamois or an all-cotton towel to
During very cold, damp weather parts, do not use it on the vehicle avoid surface scratches and
frequent application may be or damage may occur and it water spotting.
required. See Recommended Fluids would not be covered by the High pressure car washes may
and Lubricants on page 118. warranty. cause water to enter the vehicle.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct Avoid using high pressure washes
sunlight. Use a car washing soap. closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
Do not use cleaning agents that are surface of the vehicle. Use of
petroleum based or that contain power washers exceeding
acid or abrasives, as they can 8 274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result
damage the paint, metal or plastic in damage or removal of paint
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning and decals.
products can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
Vehicle Care 10-97
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Notice: Machine compounding or Exterior painted surfaces are
Lenses aggressive polishing on a subject to aging, weather and
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish chemical fallout that can take their
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a may damage it. Use only toll over a period of years. To help
soft cloth and a car washing soap to non-abrasive waxes and polishes keep the paint finish looking new,
clean exterior lamps and lenses. that are made for a basecoat/ keep the vehicle garaged or
Follow instructions under Washing clearcoat paint finish on the covered whenever possible.
the Vehicle. vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Finish Care Foreign materials such as calcium Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing chloride and other salts, ice melting
Bright metal parts should be
of the vehicle by hand may be agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
cleaned regularly to keep their
necessary to remove residue from bird droppings, chemicals from
luster. Washing with water is all that
the paint finish. Approved cleaning industrial chimneys, etc., can
is usually needed. However, chrome
products can be obtained from your damage the vehicle's finish if they
polish may be used on chrome or
dealer. remain on painted surfaces. Wash
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ If necessary, use non-abrasive Use special care with aluminum
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat cleaners that are marked safe for trim. To avoid damaging protective
gives more depth and gloss to the painted surfaces to remove trim, never use auto or chrome
colored basecoat. Always use foreign matter. polish, steam or caustic soap to
waxes and polishes that are clean aluminum. A coating of
non-abrasive and made for a wax, rubbed to high polish, is
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. recommended for all bright
metal parts.
10-98 Vehicle Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades Aluminum Wheels The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
Clean the outside of the windshield Notice: Using strong soaps,
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
with glass cleaner. chemicals, abrasive polishes,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
Clean the rubber blades using a cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
lint free cloth or paper towel soaked that contain acid on aluminum or
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
with windshield washer fluid or a chrome-plated wheels, could
on them because they could
mild detergent. Wash the windshield damage the surface of the
damage the surface. Do not use
thoroughly when cleaning the wheel(s). The repairs would not
chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved Notice: Driving the vehicle
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
cleaners on aluminum or through an automatic car wash
treatments may cause wiper
chrome-plated wheels. that has silicone carbide tire
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
cleaning brushes, could damage
if they are worn or damaged. Keep the wheels clean using a
the aluminum or chrome-plated
Wipers can be damaged by: soft clean cloth with mild soap and
wheels. The repairs would not be
water. Rinse with clean water. After
. Extreme dusty conditions. covered by the vehicle warranty.
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
Never drive a vehicle that has
. Sand and salt. clean towel. A wax may then be
aluminum or chrome-plated
applied.
. Heat and sun. wheels through an automatic car
Notice: Using chrome polish on wash that uses silicone carbide
. Snow and ice, without proper aluminum wheels could damage tire cleaning brushes.
removal. the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Vehicle Care 10-99
Tires Finish Damage Dirt packed in close areas of the

frame should be loosened before
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush Any stone chips, fractures or deep
being flushed. Your dealer or an
with tire cleaner. scratches in the finish should be
underbody car washing system can
Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will
do this.
tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
vehicle may damage the paint into major repair expense. Underbody Maintenance
finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be Chemicals used for ice and snow
a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials removal and dust control can collect
any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger on the underbody. If these are not
surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be removed, corrosion and rust can
corrected in your dealer's body and develop on the underbody parts
Sheet Metal Damage paint shop. such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
If the vehicle is damaged and Chemicals used for ice and snow and exhaust system even though
requires sheet metal repair or removal and dust control can collect they have corrosion protection.
replacement, make sure the body on the underbody. If these are not At least every spring, flush these
repair shop applies anti-corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can materials from the underbody with
material to parts repaired or develop on the underbody parts plain water. Clean any areas
replaced to restore corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, where mud and debris can collect.
protection. and exhaust system even though Dirt packed in close areas of the
Original manufacturer replacement they have corrosion protection. frame should be loosened before
parts will provide the corrosion At least every spring, flush these being flushed. Your dealer or an
protection while maintaining the materials from the underbody with underbody car washing system
vehicle warranty. plain water. Clean any areas where can do this.
mud and debris can collect.
10-100 Vehicle Care
Chemical Paint Spotting Interior Care Permanent damage may result

from using cleaners on surfaces
Some weather and atmospheric The interior will continue to look its for which they were not intended.
conditions can create a chemical best if it is cleaned often. Although Use glass cleaner only on glass.
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall not always visible, dust and dirt can Remove any accidental over-spray
upon and attack painted surfaces on accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt from other surfaces immediately.
the vehicle. This damage can take can damage carpet, fabric, leather, To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped and plastic surfaces. Regular directly to the cleaning cloth.
discolorations, and small, irregular vacuuming is recommended to
dark spots etched into the paint remove particles from the Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
surface. upholstery. It is important to keep when cleaning glass surfaces
the upholstery from becoming and on the vehicle, could scratch the
Although no defect in the paint job
remaining heavily soiled. Soils glass and/or cause damage to
causes this, we will repair, at no
should be removed as quickly as the rear window defogger. When
charge to the owner, the surfaces of
possible. The interior may cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
new vehicles damaged by this
experience extremes of heat that use only a soft cloth and glass
fallout condition within 12 months or
could cause stains to set rapidly. cleaner.
20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase,
whichever occurs first. Lighter colored interiors may require Many cleaners contain solvents that
more frequent cleaning. Use care may become concentrated in the
because newspapers and garments breathing space. Before using
that transfer color to home cleaners, read and adhere to all
furnishings may also transfer color safety instructions on the label.
to the interior. While cleaning the interior, maintain
adequate ventilation by opening the
When cleaning the interior, only use doors and windows.
cleaners specifically designed for
the surfaces being cleaned. Dust may be removed from small
buttons and knobs using a small
brush with soft bristles.
Vehicle Care 10-101
Products that remove odors from

. Too much cleaner that saturates To clean:
the upholstery and clean the glass the upholstery.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
can be obtained from your dealer. . Cleaners that contain solvents cloth with water or club soda.
Do not clean the vehicle using: can damage the interior.
2. Wring the cloth to remove
. A knife or any other sharp object Fabric/Carpet excess moisture.
to remove a soil from any interior Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft 3. Start on the outside edge of the
surface. brush attachment frequently to soil and gently rub toward the
. A stiff brush. It can cause remove dust and loose dirt. center. Continue cleaning, using
damage to the interior surfaces. A canister vacuum with a beater bar a clean area of the cloth each
. Heavy pressure or aggressive in the nozzle may only be used on time it becomes soiled.
rubbing with a cleaning cloth. floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled
Use of heavy pressure can For any soil, always try to remove it area until the cleaning cloth
damage the interior and does first with plain water or club soda. remains clean.
not improve the effectiveness of Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using 5. If the soil is not completely
soil removal. removed, use a mild soap
one of the following techniques:
. Laundry detergents or solution and repeat the cleaning
dishwashing soaps with
. For liquids: gently blot the process that was used with plain
degreasers can leave residue remaining soil with a paper water.
that streaks and attracts dirt. For towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no If any of the soil remains, a
liquid cleaners, about 20 drops commercial fabric cleaner or spot
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a more can be removed.
lifter may be necessary. When a
good guide. Use only mild, . For solid dry soils: remove as commercial upholstery cleaner or
neutral-pH soaps. much as possible and then spot lifter is to be used, test a small
vacuum. hidden area for colorfastness first.
10-102 Vehicle Care
If the locally cleaned area gives any Many commercial cleaners and Notice: Air fresheners contain
impression that a ring formation may coatings that are sold to preserve solvents that may cause damage
result, clean the entire surface. and protect soft plastic surfaces to plastics and painted surfaces.
After the cleaning process has been may permanently change the Follow the manufacturers
completed, a paper towel can be appearance and feel of the interior instructions when using air
used to blot excess moisture from and are not recommended. Do not fresheners in the vehicle. If air
the fabric or carpet. use silicone or wax-based products, freshener comes in contact with
or those containing organic solvents paint or a plastic surface, blot
Instrument Panel, Vinyl and to clean the interior because they immediately with a soft cloth.
other Plastic Surfaces can alter the appearance by Damage caused by using air
increasing the gloss in a fresheners would not be
A soft cloth dampened with non-uniform manner. covered by the vehicle warranty.
water may be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is Some commercial products may
necessary, a clean soft cloth increase gloss on the instrument
dampened with a mild soap solution panel. The increase in gloss may
can be used to gently remove dust cause annoying reflections in the
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or windshield and even make it difficult
removers on plastic surfaces. to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Vehicle Care 10-103
Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
{ WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or
mats were designed for the
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
It may severely weaken them. In interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
a crash, they might not be able to pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
provide adequate protection. Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
Clean safety belts only with mild cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
soap and lukewarm water. and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
accelerator or brake pedal. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
10-104 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information As the vehicle owner, you are

responsible for the scheduled
Maintenance This maintenance section applies to
vehicles with a gasoline engine.
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
For diesel engine vehicles, see the perform these services. Proper
General Information maintenance schedule section in vehicle maintenance helps to keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 the Duramax Diesel Supplement. the vehicle in good working
Notice: Maintenance intervals, condition, improves fuel economy,
Scheduled Maintenance checks, inspections, and reduces vehicle emissions for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-3 recommended fluids, and better air quality.
Recommended Fluids, lubricants are necessary to keep Because of all the different ways
Lubricants, and Parts this vehicle in good working people use vehicles, maintenance
Recommended Fluids and condition. Damage caused by needs vary. The vehicle might need
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 failure to follow scheduled more frequent checks and services.
Maintenance Replacement maintenance might not be Please read the information under
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 covered by the vehicle warranty. Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
Maintenance Records your dealer.
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-11
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The maintenance schedule is for The proper replacement parts,

vehicles that: { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
. Carry passengers and cargo listed in Recommended Fluids and
Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 118 and
within recommended limits on be dangerous. Some jobs can
the Tire and Loading Information Maintenance Replacement Parts on
cause serious injury. Perform page 1110. We recommend the use
label. See Vehicle Load Limits maintenance work only if you
on page 912. of genuine parts from your dealer.
have the required know-how and
. Are driven on reasonable road the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
surfaces within legal driving If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
limits. have a qualified technician do the performance of the vehicle, it is
. Use the recommended fuel. work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation
See Recommended Fuel on Service Work on page 104. service for new tires be performed.
page 940. Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km/7,500 mi. See Tire
At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 1066.
that you will receive the highest
level of service available. Your
dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
uptodate tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.

. Windshield washer fluid level
Scheduled Your dealer has trained service
technicians who will perform this check. See Washer Fluid on
Maintenance work and reset the system. If the page 1027.
engine oil life system is reset . Windshield wiper blade
When the Change Engine Oil accidentally, service the vehicle inspection for wear, cracking,
Soon Message Displays within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the or contamination and windshield
Change engine oil and filter. last service. Reset the oil life and wiper blade cleaning,
See Engine Oil on page 107. system whenever the oil is changed. if contaminated. See Exterior
An Emission Control Service. See Engine Oil Life System on Care on page 1096. Worn or
page 1010. damaged wiper blade
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
replacement. See Wiper Blade
SOON message displays, service is Every Engine Oil Change
Replacement on page 1036.
required for the vehicle as soon as . Change engine oil and filter.
possible, within the next 1 000 km/ . Tire inflation pressures check.
Reset oil life system. See
600 mi. If driving under the best See Tire Pressure on
Engine Oil on page 107 and
conditions, the engine oil life system page 1060.
Engine Oil Life System on
might not indicate the need for page 1010. An Emission . Tire wear inspection. See Tire
vehicle service for more than a year. Control Service. Inspection on page 1066.
The engine oil and filter must be
. Engine coolant level check. . Rotate tires if necessary.
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset. See Engine Coolant on See Tire Rotation on
page 1020. page 1066.
. Engine cooling system . Fluids visual leak check
inspection. Visual inspection of (or every 12 months, whichever
hoses, pipes, fittings, and occurs first). A leak in any
clamps and replacement, system must be repaired and
if needed. the fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filter . Body hinges and latches, key . Fuel system inspection for
inspection. See Engine Air lock cylinders, folding seat damage or leaks.
Cleaner/Filter on page 1018. hardware, and rear compartment . Exhaust system and nearby heat
. Brake system inspection hinges, linkage, and handle pivot shields inspection for loose or
(or every 12 months, whichever points lubrication. See damaged components.
occurs first). Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 118. More . Vehicles with diesel engine or
. Steering and suspension frequent lubrication may be GVWR above 4 536 kg
inspection. Visual inspection for required when the vehicle is (10,000 lbs) only: Shields
damaged, loose, or missing exposed to a corrosive inspection for damage or
parts or signs of wear. environment. Applying silicone looseness. Adjust or replace as
. Lubricate the front suspension, grease on weatherstrips with a required. This is a Noise
kingpin bushings, steering clean cloth makes them last Emission Control Service.
linkage, and rear driveline longer, seal better, and not stick Applicable to vehicles sold in the
center splines. or squeak. United States and recommended
for vehicles sold in Canada.
. Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 323.
Additional Required Services At Each Fuel Stop Once a Year

At the First 160 km/100 Miles,
. Engine oil level check. . See Starter Switch Check on
1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and See Engine Oil on page 107. page 1034.
10 000 km/6,000 Miles . Engine coolant level check. . See Automatic Transmission
. For vehicles with dual wheels: See Engine Coolant on Shift Lock Control Function
Check dual wheel nut torque. page 1020. Check on page 1035.
For proper torque, see . Windshield washer fluid level . See Ignition Transmission Lock
Capacities and Specifications on check. See Washer Fluid on Check on page 1035.
page 122. page 1027. . See Park Brake and P (Park)
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles Once a Month Mechanism Check on
. Rotate tires. Tires should be page 1036.
. Tire inflation pressures check.
rotated every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on . Accelerator pedal check for
7,500 mi. See Tire Rotation on page 1060. damage, high effort, or binding.
page 1066. Replace if needed.
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 1066. . Underbody flushing service.
. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
Support Gas Strut Service:
Visually inspect gas strut,
if equipped, for signs of wear,
cracks, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of the gas
strut. Contact your dealer if
service is required.
First Engine Oil Change After

. Allwheel drive only: Transfer . Evaporative control system
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles case fluid change (severe inspection. Check all fuel and
service) for vehicles mainly vapor lines and hoses for proper
. Engine air cleaner filter driven when frequently towing a hookup, routing, and condition.
replacement. See Engine Air trailer, or used for taxi, police, Check that the purge valve,
Cleaner/Filter on page 1018. or delivery service. Check vent if the vehicle has one, works
. Automatic transmission fluid hose at transfer case for kinks properly. Replace as needed.
change (severe service) for and proper installation. Check to An Emission Control Service.
vehicles mainly driven in heavy be sure vent hose is The U.S. Environmental
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly unobstructed, clear, and free of Protection Agency or the
or mountainous terrain, when debris. During any maintenance, California Air Resources Board
frequently towing a trailer, if a power washer is used to has determined that the failure
or used for taxi, police, clean mud and dirt from the to perform this maintenance item
or delivery service. See underbody, care should be taken will not nullify the emission
Automatic Transmission Fluid to not directly spray the transfer warranty or limit recall liability
(4-Speed Transmission) on case output seals. High pressure prior to the completion of the
page 1011 or Automatic water can overcome the seals vehicle's useful life. We,
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed and contaminate the transfer however, urge that all
Transmission) on page 1014. case fluid. Contaminated fluid recommended maintenance
will decrease the life of the services be performed at the
transfer case and should be indicated intervals and the
replaced. maintenance be recorded.
First Engine Oil Change After During any maintenance, if a First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles power washer is used to Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
. Automatic transmission fluid clean mud and dirt from the . Engine cooling system drain,
change (normal service). underbody, care should be taken flush, and refill (or every
See Automatic Transmission to not directly spray the transfer five years, whichever occurs
Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on case output seals. High pressure first). See Engine Coolant on
page 1011 or Automatic water can overcome the seals page 1020. An Emission
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed and contaminate the transfer Control Service.
Transmission) on page 1014. case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the . Engine drive belts inspection
. Allwheel drive only: Transfer transfer case and should for fraying, excessive cracks,
case fluid change (normal be replaced. or obvious damage (or every
service). Check vent hose at 10 years, whichever occurs
transfer case for kinks and
. Spark plug replacement and first). Replace, if needed.
proper installation. Check to be spark plug wires inspection.
sure vent hose is unobstructed, An Emission Control Service.
clear, and free of debris.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the
maintenance schedule section in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 107.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 1020.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake System
(GM Part No. 12377967, in Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Parking Brake Cable Guides
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRONVI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock Cylinders
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC or
Front Wheel Bearings
GC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
Front and Rear Axle
Transfer Case DEXRONVI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
One-Piece Propshaft Slip Yoke
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
Spline, Two-Piece Propshaft
Slip-in-Tube Spline
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Maintenance Replacement Parts

If the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15950115 A3097C
Engine Oil Filter
4.3L V6 25010792 PF47
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 12568387 41-101
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12621258 41-110
Wiper Blades 56.0 cm (22 in) 25949887
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading

Odometer
Reading

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the
Vehicle Identification VIN is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See Engine Specifications
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 122 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the rear edge of the
passenger side front door, has the
following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and
outside. The VIN also appears on special equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from
Parts labels and certificates of title the vehicle.
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 118 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under
the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System without Rear Heat
4.3L V6 9.5 L 10.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 11.8 L 12.4 qt
6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt
Cooling System with Rear Heat
4.3L V6 12.3 L 13.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 14.6 L 15.4 qt
6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal
Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal
Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal
* 4 039 mm (159 inch) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 inch) wheelbase only
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4-SPD 4L60-E 4.7 L 5.0 qt
6-SPD 6L90 6.0 L 6.3 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in
this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6 X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in)
4.8L V8 A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8 4 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.0L V8 G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
for more information.
Customer Information 13-1
Roadside Assistance Program

Customer (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Information Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Scheduling Service Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18
Customer Information Appointments (U.S. and OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Satisfaction Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Radio Frequency
Procedure (U.S. and Courtesy Transportation Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Program (U.S. and Radio Frequency
Customer Satisfaction Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4 Collision Damage Repair
Customer Assistance Offices (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-12
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Service Publications
Customer Assistance Offices Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to
Telephone (TTY) Users the United States
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Reimbursement the Canadian
Program (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13-2 Customer Information
Customer Information STEP TWO: If after contacting a

member of dealership management,
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's
Customer Satisfaction resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest
Procedure (U.S. and further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first.
Canada) Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE U.S. Owners:
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your
Your satisfaction and goodwill are Canada, call General Motors of
important to your dealer and to dealer are committed to making
Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
with the sales transaction or the with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or We encourage you to call the after following the procedure
service departments. Sometimes, toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you
however, despite the best intentions inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business
of all concerned, misunderstandings following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program
can occur. If your concern has not give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
been resolved to your satisfaction, representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an
the following steps should be taken: . Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
with a member of dealership from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive
management. Normally, concerns title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
can be quickly resolved at that level. the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle
If the matter has already been through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may
reviewed with the sales, service, . Dealership name and location. be required to resort to this informal
or parts manager, contact the owner dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the
of your dealership or the general
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
manager.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the STEP THREE Canadian For further information concerning
decision given in your case, you Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
may reject it and proceed with any not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
other venue for relief available addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
to you. procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer
You may contact the BBB Auto Line and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre,
Program using the toll-free Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English),
telephone number or write them at participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
the following address: Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited The Mediation/Arbitration Program
BBB Auto Line Program has committed to binding arbitration
Council of Better Business c/o Customer Communication
of owner disputes involving Centre
Bureaus, Inc. factory-related vehicle service
4200 Wilson Boulevard General Motors of Canada Limited
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Suite 800 the review of the facts involved by
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 may include an informal hearing
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification
This program is available in all settlement process, from the time Number (VIN).
50 states and the District of you file your complaint to the final
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by decision, should be completed in
vehicle age, mileage, and other about 70 days. We believe our
factors. General Motors reserves impartial program offers advantages
the right to change eligibility over courts in most jurisdictions
limitations and/or discontinue its because it is informal, quick, and
participation in this program. free of charge.
Customer Satisfaction Customer Assistance STEP ONE

Procedure (Mexico) Procedure Explain your case to your dealer
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are service agent, service manager,
very important to your dealer and dealer sales agent, or sales
General Motors. manager, depending on your case.
Normally, any problem with the Make sure that they have all
transaction, sale, or usage of the necessary information. They are
vehicle must be handled by your interested in your continual
dealer sales or service departments. satisfaction.
Did you get the Warranty Extension However, we recognize that STEP TWO
Plan? This plan is recommended by despite the good intentions of all
General Motors to supplement the parties involved, sometimes a If you are not satisfied, please
warranty included with the new misunderstanding may occur. contact the general manager or your
vehicle purchase. dealership owner to ask for their
If you have a problem that has not help. If they are not able to resolve
See your dealer for details. been satisfactorily handled through your case, ask them to contact the
the normal means, we suggest the right people at General Motors for
following steps: support, if needed.
STEP THREE See Customer Assistance Offices From Puerto Rico:

If your case is not resolved in a (U.S. and Canada) on page 135 or 1-800-496-9992 (English)
reasonable amount of time by your Customer Assistance Offices 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
dealer, please call the General (Mexico) on page 136 for more
information. From U.S. Virgin Islands:
Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the 1-800-496-9994
following information: Customer Assistance
Canada
. Name Offices (U.S. and Canada)
General Motors of Canada Limited
. Address Chevrolet encourages customers Customer Communication Centre,
to call the toll-free number for Mail Code: CA1-163-005
. Phone number assistance. However, if a customer 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
. Model year wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
the letter should be addressed to: www.gm.ca
. Brand
. Vehicle Identification United States 1-800-263-3777 (English)
Number (VIN) Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-7854 (French)
Chevrolet Customer 1-800-263-3830 (For Text
. Mileage Telephone devices (TTYs))
Assistance Center
. Delivery date P.O. Box 33170 Roadside Assistance:
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 1-800-268-6800
. Description of the problem
.
www.Chevrolet.com Overseas
Dealership name
1-800-222-1020 Please contact the local General
. Dealership address 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Motors Business Unit.
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
Mexico, Central America, and Customer Assistance United States and Canada
Caribbean Islands/Countries Offices (Mexico) 1-866-466-8190
(Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) To contact the Customer Assistance Costa Rica
Center (CAC), use the phone
General Motors de Mexico, S. numbers listed in this section. 00-800-052-1005
de R.L. de C.V. Customer assistance is available Guatemala
Customer Assistance Center Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 1-800-999-5252
Col. Granada 08:00 to 15:00 hours.
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Panama
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 00-800-052-0001
01-800-466-0800 Assistance Center (CAC) should be
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com. Dominican Republic
Mexico 1-888-751-5301
From Mexico City El Salvador
5329-0811 800-6273
From Other Mexico Locations Honduras
01-800-466-0811 800-0122-6101

. Chevrolet dealer locator for
Customer Assistance for service nationwide.
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
Text Telephone (TTY) . access to:
Exclusive privileges and offers.
Users (U.S. and Canada) . My Showroom: Find and save
. Recall notices for your specific
To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle. information on vehicles and
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired current offers in your area.
and who use Text Telephones
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries. . My Dealers: Save details such
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
as address and phone number
equipment available at its Customer Other Helpful Links for each of your preferred GM
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
Chevrolet www.chevrolet.com dealers.
the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: Chevrolet Merchandise . My Driveway: Access quick links
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in www.chevymall.com to parts and service estimates,
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. check trade-in values,
Help Center www.chevrolet.com/ or schedule a service
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do appointment by adding the
Online Owner Center . FAQ vehicles you own to your
Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.) . driveway profile.
Contact Us
www.chevyownercenter.com . My Preferences: Manage your
Information and services My GM Canada www.gm.ca profile and use tools and forms
customized for your specific My GM Canada is a with greater ease.
vehicle all in one convenient password-protected section of To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
place. www.gm.ca where you can save section within www.gm.ca.
. Digital owner manual, warranty information on GM vehicles, get
information, and more. personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
. Storage for online service and
maintenance records.

. Location of the vehicle.
GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for plate number of the vehicle.
(U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and
. Description of the problem.
Canada) Coverage
For U.S.purchased vehicles, call Services are provided up to 5 years/
18002438872; (Text Telephone 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
This program is available to
(TTY): 18888892438). comes first.
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible For Canadianpurchased vehicles, In the U.S., anyone driving the
aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
required for the vehicle, such as person driving the vehicle without
Service is available 24 hours a day, permission from the owner is
hand controls or a wheelchair/
365 days a year. not covered.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information Chevrolet and General Motors of
Center at 1-800-323-9935. ready: Canada Limited reserve the right to
Text Telephone (TTY) users, make any changes or discontinue
call 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and the Roadside Assistance program at
home telephone number. any time without notification.
. Telephone number of your
location.
Chevrolet and General Motors of

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles
limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
claims are made too often, or the properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
same type of claim is made responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
many times. replacement of the tire if it is restricted. Propane and other
not covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
Services Provided this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Lock-Out Service:
jump start a dead battery.
Delivery of enough fuel for the Vehicle registration is required.
vehicle to get to the nearest Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service:
service station. Roadside Assistance
Detailed maps of North America
. LockOut Service: Service to . Impound towing caused by are provided when requested
unlock the vehicle if you are violation of any laws. either with the most direct route
locked out. A remote unlock may . Legal fines. or the most scenic route. There
be available if you have OnStar. is a limit of six requests per year.
For security reasons, the driver
. Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is
must present identification or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three
before this service is given. chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery.
. Emergency Tow From a Public
. Towing or services for vehicles
Road or Highway: Tow to the driven on a non-public road
nearest Chevrolet dealer for or highway.
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
250 kilometers from where Program (Mexico) Appointments
your trip was started to Roadside Assistance is available (U.S. and Canada)
qualify. General Motors of 24 hours a day, 365 days of
Canada Limited requires When the vehicle requires
the year. warranty service, contact your
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a For detailed information about dealer and request an appointment.
copy of the repair orders. Roadside Assistance, please see By scheduling a service
Once authorization has been the brochure provided with your new appointment and advising the
received, the Roadside vehicle or visit our website at: service consultant of your
Assistance advisor will help to www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigate transportation needs, your dealer
make arrangements and explain the site and click on Asistencia en can help minimize your
how to receive payment. el Camino. E-mail correspondence inconvenience.
should be sent to: If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
. Alternative Service: If asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com.
assistance cannot be provided into the service department
right away, the Roadside To contact Roadside Assistance by immediately, keep driving it until it
Assistance advisor may give phone, use the following numbers: can be scheduled for service,
permission to get local unless, of course, the problem is
Mexico safety related. If it is, please call
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100, 01-800-466-0800 your dealership, let them know this,
after sending the original receipt and ask for instructions.
United States
to Roadside Assistance. If your dealer requests you to bring
Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8901 the vehicle for service, you are
covered, however any cost for Canada urged to do so as early in the work
parts and labor for repairs not day as possible to allow for the
covered by the warranty are the 1-800-268-6800 same day-repair.
owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation entitled Warranty and Owner Public Transportation or

Assistance Information furnished Fuel Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and with each new vehicle provides
Canada) If the vehicle requires overnight
detailed warranty coverage warranty repairs, and public
To enhance your ownership information. transportation is used instead of
experience, we and our participating Transportation Options your dealer's shuttle service, the
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy expense must be supported by
Transportation, a customer support Warranty service can generally be original receipts and can only be up
program for vehicles with the completed while you wait. However, to the maximum amount allowed by
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty if you are unable to wait, GM helps GM for shuttle service. In addition,
Coverage period in Canada), to minimize inconvenience by for U.S. customers, should you
extended powertrain, and/or providing several transportation arrange transportation through a
hybridspecific warranties in both options. Depending on the friend or relative, limited
the U.S. and Canada. circumstances, your dealer can reimbursement for reasonable
offer one of the following: fuel expenses may be available.
The Courtesy Transportation
program is no longer available Shuttle Service Claim amounts should reflect actual
for cutaway vehicles. costs and be supported by original
Shuttle service is the preferred receipts. See your dealer for
Several Courtesy Transportation means of offering Courtesy information regarding the allowance
options are available to assist in Transportation. Dealers may provide amounts for reimbursement of fuel
reducing inconvenience when shuttle service to get you to your or other transportation costs.
warranty repairs are required. destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
Courtesy Transportation is not a oneway or roundtrip shuttle service
part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance
Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

Your dealer may arrange to provide Information (U.S. and Canada)
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle If the vehicle is involved in a
service, may not be available at collision and it is damaged, have
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your
for an overnight warranty repair. the damage repaired by a qualified
dealer for specific information about technician using the proper
Rental reimbursement will be limited availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
Transportation arrangements will be parts. Poorly performed collision
receipts. This requires that you sign administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement repairs diminish the vehicle resale
personnel. value, and safety performance can
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the right to be compromised in subsequent
Requirements vary and may include unilaterally modify, change, collisions.
minimum age requirements, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to Collision Parts
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage resolve all questions of claim Genuine GM Collision parts are
charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and new parts made with the same
responsible for taxes, levies, conditions described herein at its materials and construction methods
usage fees, excessive mileage, sole discretion. as the parts with which the vehicle
or rental usage beyond the was originally built. Genuine GM
completion of the repair. Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
It may not be possible to provide a appearance, durability, and safety
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts Aftermarket parts are not covered Many insurance policies provide
may also be used for repair. These by the GM New Vehicle Limited reduced protection to the GM
parts are typically removed from Warranty, and any vehicle failure vehicle by limiting compensation
vehicles that were total losses in related to such parts is not covered for damage repairs by using
prior crashes. In most cases, the by that warranty. aftermarket collision parts. Some
parts being recycled are from insurance companies will not
undamaged sections of the vehicle. Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts.
A recycled original equipment GM GM also recommends that you When purchasing insurance, we
part may be an acceptable choice to choose a collision repair facility that recommend that you ensure that the
maintain the vehicle's originally meets your needs before you ever vehicle will be repaired with GM
designed appearance and safety need collision repairs. Your dealer original equipment collision parts.
performance; however, the history of may have a collision repair center If such insurance coverage is not
these parts is not known. Such parts with GM-trained technicians and available from your current
are not covered by the GM New stateoftheart equipment, or be insurance carrier, consider
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any able to recommend a collision switching to another insurance
related failures are not covered by repair center that has GM-trained carrier.
that warranty. technicians and comparable If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
Aftermarket collision parts are also equipment. company may require you to have
available. These are made by Insuring The Vehicle insurance that ensures repairs with
companies other than GM and may Genuine GM Original Equipment
not have been tested for the vehicle. Protect your investment in the Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
As a result, these parts may fit GM vehicle with comprehensive Genuine Manufacturer replacement
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ and collision insurance coverage. parts. Read the lease carefully, as
corrosion problems, and may There are significant differences in you may be charged at the end of
not perform properly in subsequent the quality of coverage afforded by the lease for poor quality repairs.
collisions. various insurance policy terms.
If a Crash Occurs Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
If there has been an injury, call . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
emergency services for help. telephone number. In the event that the vehicle requires
Do not leave the scene of a crash . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
until all matters have been taken that you take an active role in its
. Owner name, address, and
care of. Move the vehicle only if its repair. If you have a pre-determined
position puts you in danger, or telephone number. repair facility of choice, take the
you are instructed to move it by a . Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
police officer. Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
Give only the necessary information required replacement collision parts
model year.
to police and other parties involved be original equipment parts, either
in the crash.
. Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
For emergency towing see recycled parts will not be covered
Roadside Assistance Program
. Insurance company and
policy number. by the GM vehicle warranty.
(U.S. and Canada) on page 138 or
Roadside Assistance Program . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
(Mexico) on page 1310. damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
See Collision Parts earlier in aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
this section. the repair professional, and insist on
If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
Inflates? on page 331. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within The Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Or write to:
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Booklet. P.O. Box 07130
Service Manuals Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Prices are subject to change
and repair information on the shipping fees. without notice and without incurring
engines, transmission, axle, obligation. Allow ample time
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: for delivery.
steering, body, etc. Owner Manual only.
All listed prices are quoted in
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins U.S. funds. Make checks payable
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and in U.S. funds.
Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
a crash or could cause injury or write to: Transport Canada
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Road Safety Branch
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. 2780 Sheffield Road
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data These modules may store data to
help your dealer technician service
to General Motors Recording and the vehicle. Some modules may
In addition to notifying NHTSA also store data about how you
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy operate the vehicle, such as rate of
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of fuel consumption or average speed.
sophisticated computers that record These modules may also retain the
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
information about the vehicles owners personal preferences, such
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
Chevrolet Customer For example, the vehicle uses and temperature settings.
Assistance Center computer modules to monitor and
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the
In Canada, call conditions for airbag deployment
1-800-263-3777 (English) or and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write: if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control
General Motors of Canada Limited the vehicle.
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

. How far, if at all, the driver was
Event Data Recorders pressing the accelerator and/or
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
This vehicle has an Event Data brake pedal. access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose needed. In addition to the vehicle
. How fast the vehicle was
of an EDR is to record, in certain manufacturer, other parties, such as
traveling.
crash or near crash-like situations, law enforcement, that have the
such as an airbag deployment or This data can help provide a better special equipment, can read the
hitting a road obstacle, data that understanding of the circumstances information if they have access to
will assist in understanding how a in which crashes and injuries occur. the vehicle or the EDR.
vehicle's systems performed. The Important: EDR data is recorded
EDR is designed to record data GM will not access this data or
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial share it with others except: with the
related to vehicle dynamics and crash situation occurs; no data is
safety systems for a short period of consent of the vehicle owner or,
recorded by the EDR under normal if the vehicle is leased, with the
time, typically 30 seconds or less. driving conditions and no personal
The EDR in this vehicle is designed consent of the lessee; in response
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and to an official request by police or
to record such data as: crash location) is recorded. similar government office; as part of
. How various systems in the However, other parties, such as law GM's defense of litigation through
vehicle were operating. enforcement, could combine the the discovery process; or, as
EDR data with the type of required by law. Data that GM
. Whether or not the driver and
personally identifying data routinely collects or receives may also be
passenger safety belts were
acquired during a crash used for GM research needs or may
buckled/fastened.
investigation. be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If the vehicle is equipped with an Identification (RFID) Statement
active OnStar system, that system RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
may also record data in crash or vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
near crashlike situations. The pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
OnStar Terms and Conditions system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
provides information on data connection with conveniences rules and with Industry Canada
collection and use and is available such as key fobs for remote door Standards RSS210/220/310.
in the OnStar glove box kit, at locking/unlocking and starting, and
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by door openers. RFID technology in
pressing the Q button and GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
speaking to an advisor. personal information or link with any interference.
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept
personal information. any interference received,
including interference that may
cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2 NOTES
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Assistance Program,

When Should an Airbag Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Airbags Audio System
Add-On Electrical
On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-18
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Automatic
Airbag
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Automatic
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-32 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25, 9-28
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11, 10-14
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Anti-theft Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
How Does an Airbag
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-39 Shift Lock Control
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Antilock Brake Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Passenger Sensing
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
What Makes an Airbag
Appearance Care Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
What Will You See after an
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-37, 10-38 Check
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-42 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Ignition
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-35
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Child Restraints
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 C Infants and Young
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-36
California Lower Anchors and
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-52
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-24
Perchlorate Materials Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-58, 3-60, 3-64
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Capacities and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Cleaning
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Carbon Monoxide Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Climate Control System
Center High-Mounted
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-42
Cautions, Danger, and Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Front Turn Signal,
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Sidemarker, and
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Center High-Mounted Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
INDEX i-3
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12 D Drive Systems

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-32
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Driver Information
Danger, Warnings, and
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Driving
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18
Coolant Characteristics and
Daytime Running
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Engine Temperature Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-20
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Transportation Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
Door
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-6 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Text Telephone (TTY) Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7 Dual Tire
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Customer Information Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Service Publications
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont.) F
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Fan
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Electrical Equipment, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Electrical System Filter,
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Compartment Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-50 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Fuses and Circuit Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-103
Engine Oil
Engine Fluid
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Automatic
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Check and Service Engine Transmission . . . . . . . 10-11, 10-14
Enhanced Technology
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Coolant Temperature Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Front Seats
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Cooling System Messages . . .5-34 Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
Front Turn Signal
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 G H
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Gasoline Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Filling a Portable Fuel
Gauges Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Engine Coolant Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-40
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-40
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Daytime Running
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Requirements, California . . . . .9-40
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Fuel Economy
Warning Lights and Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Heater
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
General Information Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Fuses
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Engine Compartment
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-50
Glass, Enhanced Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
Fuses and Circuit Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
GM Mobility Reimbursement Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
i-6 INDEX
I L Lights
Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Idle System Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-53
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Antilock Brake System
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Lamps
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Ignition Transmission Lock Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-24
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Infants and Young Children, Exterior Lamps Off
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
J Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
StabiliTrak Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-25
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 LATCH System
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Replacing Parts after a
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
K LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37 Locks
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Keyless Entry Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lighting
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
INDEX i-7
Locks (cont.) Messages (cont.) N

Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-33
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-34
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 O
for Children (LATCH Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
M Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Oil
Maintenance Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Maintenance Schedule
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Engine Oil Pressure
Recommended Fluids and
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Mirrors Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-21
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-43
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Operation, Infotainment
Messages
Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Monitor System, Tire Ordering
Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-39
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-15
Battery Voltage and
Outlets
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
i-8 INDEX
P Power R
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Park Radio Frequency
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Parking Radios
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Brake and P (Park) Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Parking Lamps Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Privacy
Passenger Airbag Status Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-6
Radio Frequency
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-35 Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Program
Perchlorate Materials Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Proposition 65 Warning,
Personalization Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Recommended
Phone Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24 Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
INDEX i-9
Records Restraints Safety Defects Reporting

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16
Recreational Vehicle Retained Accessory General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Reimbursement Program, Ride Control Systems Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Remote Keyless Entry Roads Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Roadside Assistance Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10 Seats
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 Running the Vehicle While Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-42 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Replacing LATCH System Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 S Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-86
Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Securing Child
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-24 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-58, 3-60, 3-64
Reporting Safety Defects Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Security
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16 How to Wear Safety Belts Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Service
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Accessories and
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-24 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
i-10 INDEX
Service (cont.) StabiliTrak T

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-11 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Maintenance, General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-7
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Publications Ordering Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Tires
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Shift Lock Control Function Storage Areas
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Check, Automatic Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Shifting Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Switches
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-63
Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Sidemarker Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 System
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Signals, Turn and Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-62
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
INDEX i-11
Tires (cont.) Trailer V

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Vehicle
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-86 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Transmission
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Terminology and Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25, 9-28
Identification
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-11, 10-14
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Uniform Tire Quality Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Transportation Program,
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Wheel Alignment and Tire Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-74 Turn and Lane-Change
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
When It Is Time for New Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 U Vehicle Care
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Uniform Tire Quality Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Towing Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Vehicle Identification
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-45 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Service Parts Identification
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-93
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
i-12 INDEX
W Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Enhanced Technology
Warning
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Windshield
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Winter
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Wheels
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-36
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-50

Chevrolet 2011 Express Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet 2011 Express Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Express Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

2011 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Warning or Caution indicates a Symbols

A circle with a slash through it

In Brief Sensing System for Passenger

Initial Drive Press L and hold for more than

Power Windows ExpressDown Seat Adjustment

Power Seats Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the

To adjust a power seat, if available, To recline the seatback:

Safety Belts Airbag On-Off Switch

Canada and Mexico

Canada and Mexico

Manually fold the mirrors inward Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

E DOME OFF : This button is Exterior Lighting AUTO: Automatically turns on

Windshield Wiper/Washer Climate Controls

The lever is located on the left side

See Climate Control Systems on

Vehicles With Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control

2. Press the plus/minus buttons, While using Range Selection Mode,

Vehicle Features : Seek or scan stations.

Radio with CD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock Satellite Radio

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle,

Leaving children in a vehicle with Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

L (Vehicle Locator/ Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

2. Remove the old battery. Check local regulations for any

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Door Locks Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Side Sliding Door

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

To open the front portion of a To open the rear portion of a

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

The swing-out doors have a Sliding Door

To open the sliding side door from

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Rear Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

Vehicle Security You do not have to manually arm

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

Manual Mirrors Trailer-Tow Mirrors Power Mirrors

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

ExpressDown Swing-Out Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

Enhanced Technology Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Seats and Restraints 3-1